AmigaOS 3.9 the book Umfassend. On 500 pages become all themes round around the alterations from OS3.5 and OS3.9 discusses. Additional offers the book an ampleness from tips and advertence to all program and special chapter to the installing and to the solution from problem-pronounce. For Einsteiger. Through the light clear language and the many clues and tips is the book particularly good for they suitable, the till now still no hard drive arranged and only little on the settings of Amiga changed have. Also the mounting from rom and the installing from program is detailed described. The book explains each point in more understandable, german language. For pros. The book contains all alterations in clearer and bulk form and relieved with it the location from informations. Through the comprehensive treatise from themes how Preferences, Commodities and ViNCEd is it also an ideal reference for the daily work in Amiga. The book sets he on all operator from OS3.5 and 3.9, the an clear and light understandable book seek, the all fields detailed discusses. 2. Reworked edition From the content . Installing . The Workbench . The Prefs the Workbench . The tools the Workbench . The new Shell the Tool the pros . The Commodities . The multimedia-tools . Further program's for OS3.9 . AmigaOS and the Internet . ARexx introduction in the Scriptsprache . WarpOS Volle achievement for the PowerPC . The Tastaturkürzel . Help by problems . Tips & artifices this book is Petro Tyschtschenko dedicated. Many thank for all, what you for the Amiga did have. Without your support would AmigaOS never advanced been. 1. Prelude 1.1. Foreword 1.2. Conventions 1.3. Architecture of manual page 1.4. The novelties from OS3.5/3.9 in the survey 2. Installing from AmigaOS 3.9 2.1. Emergency diskette produce 2.2. Mounting the Kickstart-rom 2.2.1. The mounting in the A1200 2.2.2. The mounting in the A3000 Desktop 2.2.3. The mounting in the A3000T 2.2.4. The mounting in the A2000 2.2.5. The mounting in the A500 2.3. Prepare the hard drive 2.3.1. IDE 2.3.2. SCSI 2.3.3. Fit the hard drive 2.3.3.1. Activating the HDToolbox 2.3.3.2. Step 1 - fit 2.3.3.3. Step 2 - Partitionieren 2.4. AmigaOS 3.9 install 3. The Preferences the Workbench (Prefs) 3.1. The "Prefs"-directory 3.2. The defaults (Presets) 3.3. The standard-menu the Preferences 3.3.1. Menu "project" 3.3.2. Menu "defaults" 3.3.3. Menu "settings" 3.4. WarpOS-Preferences (OS3.9) 3.5. DefIcons-Preferences (OS3.9) 3.5.1. Datatypes 3.5.2. Actions 3.5.2.1. Add 3.5.2.2. Enfernen 3.5.2.3. Learning... 3.5.3. The menu 3.5.3.1. Project 3.5.3.2. Defaults 3.5.3.3. Icon 3.6. ASL-Preferences (off OS3.9) 3.7. The Workbench-Preferences (off OS3.5) 3.8. ReAction-Preferences (off OS3.5) 3.9. CacheCDFS 3.9.1. The CacheCDFS-Preferences 3.10. Font-Preferences (Font) 3.10.1. Font-Auswahlwindow 3.11. The IControl-Preferences 3.11.1. Screen draw 3.11.2. Schirmversatz by menu 3.11.3. Filter Texteingabefeld 3.11.4. Flickering Vermeiden 3.11.5. Mode transfer 3.11.6. 1:1 Seitenverhältnis (OS3.9) 3.12. Input-Preferences (Input) 3.12.1. Mouse speed 3.12.2. Mouse acceleration 3.12.3. Blueprint Doppelklick 3.12.4. Delay by Tastenwiederholung 3.12.5. Speed for Tastenwiederholung 3.12.6. Keyboard test 3.12.7. Keyboard assignment 3.13. National-Preferences (Locale) 3.13.1. Employ of national-Preferencess 3.14. Guard zone-Preferences (Overscan) 3.15. Colour-Preferences (palette) 3.16. Mouse pointer-Preferences (Pointer) 3.17. Printer-Preferences (Printer) 3.17.1. Printer type 3.17.1.1. Printer connection 3.17.1.2. Strangers device driver (Use Custom Device) 3.17.1.3. Device driver (Port Device) 3.17.1.4. Oneness (Port Unit) 3.17.2. Page size & edges (footboy Size & Margins) 3.17.2.1. Paper type 3.17.2.2. Paper size 3.17.2.3. Character density 3.17.2.4. Line density 3.17.2.5. Paper length (lines) 3.17.2.6. Left edge (lines) 3.17.2.7. Right edge (lines) 3.17.2.8. Density 3.17.3. Settings (Settings) 3.17.3.1. Stress quality 3.17.3.2. Shade 3.17.3.3. Image 3.17.3.4. Image position 3.17.3.5. Coloration 3.17.3.6. Level 3.17.3.7. Left corner/Linker edge 3.17.3.8. Image centers 3.17.3.9. Weichzeichnen 3.17.3.10. Colour correction 3.17.3.11. Limitations 3.17.3.12. Stress example 3.17.4. Tips to the acceleration of print procedure for graphics 3.18. Graphic printer-Preferences (PrinterGfx) 3.19. PostScript-printer-Preferences (PrinterPS) 3.19.1. Driver mode 3.19.2. Copies 3.19.3. Paper size 3.19.4. Paper width and Papierlänge 3.19.5. Horizontal DPI and Vertikal DPI 3.19.6. Text-settings 3.19.7. Edges-settings 3.19.8. Graphic-settings 3.19.9. Graphic-scaling 3.20. Screenmode-Preferences (ScreenMode) 3.20.1. Announce mode 3.20.2. Mode attributes 3.20.3. Breadth/height 3.20.4. Colors 3.20.5. Car-roles 3.21. Serial-Preferences (Serial) 3.21.1. Baud-instalment 3.21.2. Input buffer size 3.21.3. Journal 3.21.4. Parity 3.21.5. Bits/Char 3.21.6. Stop bits 3.21.7. Default-oneness 3.22. Sound-Preferences 3.23. Time-Preferences (tIME) 3.24. Workbench-pattern-Preferences (WBPattern) 3.24.1. Selection of Hintergrundmusters 3.24.2. Selection from picture 3.24.3. Layout (OS3.9) 3.24.4. Menu "defaults" 4. The tools the Workbench 4.1. AmiDOCK 4.1.1. Docks 4.1.2. Categories 4.1.3. Pictograms 4.1.4. Backdrops 4.1.5. Dock-behavior 4.1.6. General. Dock-behavior 4.1.7. Configurations save and shop 4.2. Animated Icons 4.2.1. Create one "Animated Icon" 4.2.2. Optionally tees for "Transferanims" 4.3. BenchTrash - the clever garbage can 4.3.1. The Preferences from BenchTrash 4.3.2. Tees from BenchTrash 4.4. Calculator (pocket calculator) 4.4.1. Menu of pocket calculator 4.5. EditPad 4.5.1. Project 4.5.2. Process 4.5.3. Navigation 4.5.4. Settings 4.6. HDToolbox 4.6.1. The Hauptwindow 4.6.1.1. Inferface 4.6.1.2. Adr 4.6.1.3. LUN 4.6.1.4. Drive (Drive) 4.6.1.5. Bigness 4.6.2. Partitionieren one disk drive 4.6.2.1. Hard drive partitions 4.6.2.2. Adapt the bigness one Partition 4.6.2.3. Relocating from partitions within the Partitionierungsleiste 4.6.2.4. Add one new Partition 4.6.2.5. Rename one Partition 4.6.2.6. Discharge one Partition 4.6.3. Standard configuration for drives 4.6.4. Save and formatting the new partitions 4.6.5. Options to the Partitionierung for Erfahrene user 4.6.6. Prepare single sculler new hard drive 4.6.7. Re design from Dateisystemen 4.6.8. File system association 4.6.8.1. Add of new Dateisystems 4.6.8.2. Discharge of Dateisystems 4.6.8.3. Update of existing Dateisystems 4.6.8.4. Error handling 4.7. The Icon-editor "IconEdit" (off OS3.5) 4.7.1. Processing field 4.7.1.1. Selection "normal"/"Ausgewählt" 4.7.2. Colour selection field 4.7.3. The tools 4.7.3.1. Full pattern-symbols 4.7.3.2. Freehand drawing-symbol 4.7.3.3. Freehand lines-symbol 4.7.3.4. Circle-symbol 4.7.3.5. More filled circle-symbol 4.7.3.6. Rectangle-symbol 4.7.3.7. Filled rectangle-symbol 4.7.3.8. Lines symbol 4.7.3.9. Colt-symbol 4.7.3.10. Rescinded-symbol (Undo) 4.7.3.11. Reconstitute-symbol (Redo) 4.7.3.12. Discharge-symbol 4.7.3.13. Pipettes-symbol 4.7.3.14. Arrow-symbols 4.7.4. The menu 4.7.4.1. Menu "project" 4.7.4.2. Menu "Bearbeiten" 4.7.4.3. Menu "kind" 4.7.4.4. Menu "emphasizing" 4.7.4.5. Menu "images" 4.7.4.6. Menu "extras" 4.7.4.7. Menu "options" 4.7.5. Tees (Tooltypes) 4.8. IomegaTools 4.8.1. The installing 4.8.2. The handling 4.8.3. Ver-/unlock 4.8.4. Diskettes formatting 4.8.5. Settings 4.8.6. Pose 4.8.7. Diskettes status 4.8.8. Drive status 4.8.9. Drive activating 4.8.10. Drive parking 4.8.11. Help 4.8.12. The menu from "IomegaTools" 4.8.12.1. Menu "project" 4.8.12.2. Menu "window" 4.8.12.3. Menu "settings" 4.9. XAD-Entpacker 5. ViNCEd - the new Super-Shell 5.1. ViNCEd menu 5.2. ViNCEd settings 6. Commodities - the "peewees" helper 6.1. Prelude 6.2. General information tees (Tooltypes) 6.3. Tastenkombinationen 6.4. AutoPoint (Autoaktivierung) 6.5. Blanker (screen saver) 6.6. ClickToFront 6.7. CrossDOS (Konvertieren from DOS-write) 6.8. Exchange (Commodities-accociation) 6.9. Find (fast seeking) 6.10. Fkey (application keypad mode) 6.11. Mouse Blanker (Mauspfeil blind out) 6.12. NoCapsLock 6.13. RAWBInfo 6.13.1. The RAWBInfo-Preferences 6.13.1.1. The file-Preferences 6.13.1.2. The Icon-Preferences 6.13.2. The RAWBInfo-menu items 6.13.2.1. The project-menu 6.13.2.2. The type-menu 6.13.2.3. The images-menu 6.14. WB Clock 6.14.1. Hand 6.14.2. Dial 6.14.3. Colors 6.14.4. Noises 7. The Neuen multimedia-tools 7.1. Action - the video-Player 7.1.1. The surface 7.1.2. Requirements 7.1.3. Supplementary video-formats and Codecs 7.1.3.1. AVI-Videoformat 7.1.3.2. Supplementary audio-Codecs from AVI 7.1.3.3. QuickTime (.mov, .qt) 7.1.3.4. Supplementary audio-codes from QuickTime 7.1.4. The tees from Action 7.1.4.1. FILES 7.1.4.2. DITHER 7.1.4.3. MODEID 7.1.4.4. NOSOUND 7.1.4.5. NOSKIP 7.1.4.6. FPS 7.1.4.7. LOOPED 7.1.4.8. VERBOSE 7.1.4.9. NOCENTER 7.1.4.10. WINDOWPLAY or WINP 7.1.4.11. FORCE16 7.1.4.12. AKIKO or WRITECHUNKYPIXELS 7.1.4.13. SDBL or DOUBLEHEIGHT 7.1.4.14. NOVIDEO 7.1.4.15. MONITOR parameter 7.1.4.16. NOGUI 7.1.4.17. PUBSCREEN or PS 7.1.4.18. WINX and WINY 7.1.4.19. MABFIX 7.1.4.20. NOSURROUNDMONO or NSM 7.1.4.21. ZORRO2 or ZORRO2GFXBOARD 7.1.4.22. AUTOPLAY or AP 7.1.4.23. NOAUTOEXIT or NAE 7.1.4.24. GRAPHICBOARDSCREENWIDTH or GBSW 7.1.4.25. GRAPHICBOARDSCREENHEIGHT or GBSH 7.1.4.26. BUFSIZE 7.1.4.27. DEFAULTPATH 7.1.4.28. COLORKEY 7.2. AMPlifier 7.2.1. The Abspieler ("Player") 7.2.2. The Abspielliste 7.2.3. The Equalizer 7.2.4. Menu items 7.2.4.1. Project 7.2.4.2. Settings 7.2.5. Config 7.2.5.1. Audio I/O 7.2.5.2. MP3-Audioplayer 7.2.5.3. X-audio/AHI-giving out 7.2.5.4. Options 7.2.5.5. Advertisement 7.3. Multiview - the all purpose-indicator 7.3.1. Project 7.3.2. Process 7.3.3. Window 7.4. The new "Picture Datatype" 7.5. PlayCD 8. Further program's 8.1. Warp3D 8.1.1. Installing 8.1.2. Directory structure 8.1.3. Error handling 8.2. AHI 8.2.1. AHI-Preferences 8.2.2. Extended settings 8.3. Smart file system (SFS) 8.3.1. SFS fit 8.3.2. The clever garbage can 8.3.3. The SFS-tools 8.3.3.1. Diskspeed 8.3.3.2. SFSformat 8.3.3.3. SFScheck 8.3.3.4. SFSsetcache 8.3.3.5. SFSDefragmentGUI 8.4. Colorwheel 8.5. Fontcache 8.6. NewIconEmu 9. AmigaOS and the Internet 9.1. Prelude to the Internet 9.2. Genesis - the access in Internet 9.2.1. Prelude 9.2.2. Online in 5 minutes - step for step in Internet 9.2.3. Local network Aufbauen 9.2.4. The Genesis-Preferences (Prefs) 9.2.5. Interfaces 9.2.5.1. Interface 9.2.5.2. Sana II 9.2.5.3. Modem 9.2.5.4. Services 9.2.5.5. Happening 9.2.5.6. Resolv 9.2.6. Options 9.2.6.1. Advertisement 9.2.6.2. Different 9.2.6.3. Carry out 9.2.6.4. Extended 9.2.7. Modem/TAs 9.2.7.1. Modem/TA 9.2.7.2. Device 9.2.7.3. Comands 9.2.7.4. Results 9.2.8. File 9.2.8.1. Groups 9.2.8.2. Protocols 9.2.8.3. Services 9.2.8.4. Grips 9.2.8.5. Inetd 9.2.8.6. Networks 9.2.8.7. RPC 9.2.9. User 9.2.9.1. General 9.2.9.2. Countdown 9.2.10. Different 9.2.10.1. Socks 9.2.10.2. General 9.2.10.3. Socks Server 9.2.10.4. With cut 9.2.10.5. Authentification 9.2.10.6. Filter 9.2.11. Cost 9.2.11.1. Costs 9.2.11.2. General 9.3. AWeb 9.3.1. Special features from AWeb 9.3.2. Settings 9.3.3. System requirements 9.3.4. Installing 9.3.5. The Steuersymbole from AWeb 9.3.6. The Browserwindow 9.3.6.1. Through pages move (scrollen) 9.3.6.2. Frames 9.3.6.3. Left-hand 9.3.6.4. FTP-Links 9.3.6.5. Single images 9.3.6.6. Embedded images 9.3.6.7. Download 9.3.6.8. Popup-menu 9.3.6.9. Clipboard-use 9.3.6.10. AppWindow-property 9.3.6.11. Ikonifizieren 9.3.7. AWeb-settings 9.3.7.1. Browser settings 9.3.7.2. Progam-settings 9.3.7.3. GUI-settings 9.3.7.4. Network-settings 9.3.7.5. The menu 9.3.7.6. Image-functions 9.3.7.7. Left-hand-functions 9.3.7.8. Fram-functions 9.3.8. Frequently problems 9.3.9. Use of Low-week Amiga 9.4. AmigaMail 9.4.0.1. The Preferences "user" 9.4.0.2. The Preferences "SMTP Server" 9.4.0.3. The Preferences "POP Server" 9.4.0.4. The Preferences "POP settings" 9.4.0.5. New mail compose 9.5. Tips & alternatives 9.5.1. Interesting Amiga-pages in the Internet 10. ARexx 10.1. Introduction - what is ARexx? 10.2. First steps 10.3. The remote controlled Workbench 10.3.1. I know what 10.3.2. Many beautiful window 10.3.3. Pictograms move he 10.3.4. Menu and Tastenkombinationen 10.3.4.1. "Workbench"-menu 10.3.4.2. "Window"-menu 10.3.4.3. "Icon"-menu 10.3.4.4. "Resource"-menu 10.3.5. What otherwise still possible is 10.4. Commodities active 11. WarpOS - full achievement for the PowerPC 11.1. Introduction 11.2. WarpOS install 11.2.1. Which PPC-Board have you! 11.2.2. WShell-compatible 11.2.3. Selection the Grafikkarte 11.2.4. Would like she WarpOS V16 or the PowerUP-compatibles V7 fit 11.3. The WarpOS-Prefs 11.4. First help by difficulties with WarpOS 12. Picasso the Treibersystem for Amiga Grafikkarten 12.1. Supplementary Grafikkarten 12.2. No espoused Grafikkarten: 12.3. What software collaborates with Picasso together? 12.4. The installing 12.5. The use from Picasso 12.6. The tees the Monitordateien 12.7. PicassoMode: the Bildschirmmodus-Preferences 12.8. Help by problems 13. Keyboard macros (Shortcuts) 13.1. Workbench 13.2. Editpad 13.3. ASL - Dateiauswahl 13.4. Texteingabefelder 13.4.0.1. Text.datatype 13.5. Commodities 13.5.0.1. Exchange 13.5.0.2. FKey 13.5.0.3. Blanker 13.5.0.4. CrossDOS 13.5.0.5. RAWBInfo 13.5.0.6. Find 13.5.0.7. AmiDOCK 13.6. AWeb 13.7. AmigaMAIL 13.8. Genesis 13.9. AMPlifier 13.10. Iomega tools 14. Problems and solutions 14.1. Preparation to the installing 14.2. Problems with Patches, Icons, NewIcons, MagicWB and SetPatch 14.3. Problems with RTG, Picasso 96, CyberGraphX 14.4. Hard drives-problems 14.5. Problems with uses 14.6. Problems with Internet-program 14.7. Sundries problems 15. Glossary 15.1. A 15.2. B 15.3. C 15.4. D 15.5. E 15.6. F 15.7. G 15.8. H 15.9. I, J 15.10. K, L 15.11. M 15.12. N, O 15.13. P, Q 15.14. R 15.15. S 15.16. T 15.17. U, V 15.18. W, Z 1. Prelude 1.1. Foreword in oct 1998 happened he unusual for the AMIGA-community - an new AmigaOS-version became announced. Towards 6 years of "standstill" finally again an officially sign, because a wirklichen standstill had it never given. Always against have indefatigable programmer new software developed and developer new hardware on the market brought. The market lived from one immense number from amplifications the Amiga-Workbench, the visual representative of AmigaOS-"Look & Feel" and also of actual Amiga-operating system. The explain goal all these program's is the improvement the handling, the embellishment the Workbench and the Erstellen the necessary tools, around actual trends how multimedia and Internet of use to able. The plurality the tools and amplifications brought it but with he, that this to the a only conditional system-conforming implemented were and he to the other more standard parallel evolved. A the jobs from AmigaOS 3.5 and also from AmigaOS 3.9 is it hence, the most weighty functions and program's to a new whole zusammenzubringen. AmigaOS 3.5 began with so urgent necessary functions how the support from hard drives greater 4Gb, a CD-ROM-Filesystem, überarbeiteten Datatypes, a new printer driver-system and one plurality from Fehlerbereinigungen and betterments in Kernsystem. To this came an complete restyling the graphing Benutzerschnittstelle with new pictograms and nine Systemeinstallern, Internet-program's for the Surfen in the WWW and as transportation from E-mail, as soon as an standard for the support from PowerPC-amplifications. Towards the promulgation from AmigaOS 3.5 in the oct 1999 was the advertisement from AmigaOS 3.9 for December 2000 sure again an emergency. An update to only scanty 14 month? Those speed was one already long not more usual... AmigaOS 3.9 links seamless on this strategy on and sets new emphases by the support from multimedia-format, Internet- program and one plurality from amplifications the Workbench. New are hence program's to the playback from MP3, Quicktime and AVI, an send run-ledge, an comfortablier Entpacker, an automated Datatypes-recognition, an real professional-Shell, an swiftly Suchfunktion and innumerable another betterments. Glances one on the chops and changes, the he from these both update yield, so can one ascertain, that he Gewaltiges did has. Especially the handling of AmigaOS is dramatic enhanced and the range of function strong extended been. The look the Workbench is with the new GlowIcon-style and the modern formation the surface increased. Through the plurality on program has one from beginning on all together, around efficient and comfortable Sounds abzuspielen, videos study and relaxed in the Internet to surfen. What want one more... We wish you much fun by these reading. Markus Nerding The author's 1.2. Conventions we have attempted, this book so clear how possible to fashion and by it the language so easy how possible to hold. All the same must on unite places concept pp of einführen or uses become, without the the descriptions not possible are. This book is and shall no substitute for the original-AMIGA-handbooks is, the you with you Amiga get have. A updated copy the handbooks find you in the HTML- and PDF-format on the OS 3.5- and OS 3.9- CD-ROM. Those books, and herewith particularly the book "Workbench", describe the fundamental architecture of AmigaOS and the handling the separate components of Amiga and the Workbench. "Whole back" catches this book hence not on. When you however already some with you Amiga operated have, then ought you this book for the handling in the general and for the use the new functions from OS 3.5/3.9 suffice, because the is of us goal. When you an concept not clear is, then able you as first in the "glossary" check, in the some important concept explains become. When this not helps, then must you really to the original- documentation reach [for]. We think and hope however, the this not often the fall is is. The book uses following conventions, around appointed things there-deliver: The buttons the keyboard become in the rule in sharpen braces personated. Ought more buttons simultaneous pressed become, then sees this e.g. So from: ++ here shall so the buttons , and simultaneous pressed become. with this is the -key meant. Corresponding is the -key. WRINKLE, hint, this book deposits very much worth on tips, clues and important informations, because there stands in the rule the, after what you by problems seek. Around the Auffiden from tips and advertence if possible spectacular to fashion, become this special highlighted. Double-click this concept beudeutet an fast double Klicken with the lefthand Maustaste. Auswahltaste that opines the left Maustaste, because with you mostly some picked is. Menütaste that opines the raked Maustaste, because with it is the Menüleiste of accordingly program in upper Bildrand activates. With unite program must one he by the way with the mouse direct above in the Menüleiste find, around this with the right Maustaste invoice to able. 1.3. Architecture of manual page chapter 1 - prelude The prelude stands the novelties from OS3.5 and 3.9 in bulk form before and helps you so by the selection the for you important capital. Chapter 2 - installing those chapter describes the Systemanforderungen, the mounting the Kickstart 3.1-rom, the preparation the hard drive and the installing the software. Chapter 3 - The Preferences the Workbench this chapter deschäftigt he with all Preferencesn of AmigaOS, how e.g. Workbench, ReAction, CacheCDFS, onscreen, printer, here able you the system on your presentations and needs acclimatize. Chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench The leistungsfähigen tools of AmigaOS are the subject this chapter. Discussed become AmiDOCK, Animated Icons, EditPad, HDToolbox, IconEdit and the IomegaTools. Chapter 5 - The new Shell the chapter describes the new Shell ViNCEd, the elusive functions offers. Chapter 6 - Commodities - the "peewees" helper in these chapter become the so-called "Commodities" discussed. That are small aid programs, the in the background run and always to the place are, when one she needs. Typical agent are Find, Click To front, Fkey and RAWBInfo. Chapter 7 - The Neuen multimedia-tools this chapter describes the new multimedia-tools from OS3.9: CD-Player, AMPlifier, Action and MultiView. Chapter 8 - further program's Zu OS3.9 belong to still an row from program, the not so easy assign are (mostly system program) and the so-called "Contributions", so program's, the from the author's as free of charge makeweight to the zur ~ - at one's disposal posed become. We stand here before all Warp3D (3D- driver), AHI (Soundtreiber) and SFS (fast Filesystem) before. Chapter 9 - AmigaOS and the Internet the Internet is sure of the most interesting themes. From the fact are the instructions to Genesis, AWeb and AmigaMAIL very detailed. Chapter 10 - introduction in ARexx this chapter is as well as an introduction in the Scriptsprache ARexx, as also an short presentation the ARexx-possibilities the Workbench. Chapter 11 - WarpOS in these chapter is WarpOS envisaged, the PowerPC-Kernel for the Amiga. Chapter 12 - Picasso this chapter describes the Treibersystem for Grafikkarten and PicassoMode, the Preferences the software. Chapter 13 - The Tastaturkürzel in these chapter become the Tastaturkürzel the most weighty program's in clearer form envisaged. Chapter 14 - error reports and solutions possible and publicly known sources of errors and Lösungshinweise there to. Chapter 15 - glossary the glossary contains an description to important understood from the computer- and AMIGA-area. 1.4. The novelties from OS3.5/3.9 in the survey in these chapter become the novelties from OS3.5 and 3.9 short envisaged, with it you he in ease an image of it make able, which fields for you at present in most interesting are. You get hence also direct reproofs on the chapter, in which you another informations get. With what start? Those question stands he by the plurality from new program and functions already. We start hence with Themenblöcken. Program's for the Internet AWeb the Web-browser was already in OS3.5 hold and lies now in the version 3.4 SE the OS3.9 by. AWeb is an very faster and compatibles browser for the Internet or. The WWW. He bolstered the HTML-standard inclusive charts, Frames and Javascript. Further informations: chapter 9 - Internet Genesis the access to the Internet. With Genesis choose you he by you Provider (e.g. By T-Online) an, the you then the access in Internet enables. Genesis verfügy over an voluminous Provider-file, the the most weighty Call-passer-Call-offerer contains. You must only still a choose - the remainder done Genesis for you. Further informations: chapter 9 - Internet AmigaMAIL The electronically mailing. AmigaMAIL is an swiftly and simple solution, around electronically mailing, the so-called E- mail, to broadcast and to receive. Further informations: chapter 9 - Internet program's for music and video CD-Player the music-CD-gambler. With the CD-Player able you all herkömmlichen music-CDs play back. He disposes over the resemble control elements how the CD-Player one stereo- plant and is hence very easy to attend. Further informations: chapter 7 - multimedia AMPlifier the MP3-gambler. AMPlifier play next to the straight so populären MP3-format also still AIFF-, MAUD-, WAV-and ROH- files off. Also these Player leaves he very easy attend. He owns besides an Abspielliste, a Equalizer to the Klangeinstellung and an Skin-system, with the you is look new fashion able. In Internet find you there to hundreds from Skins to the Downloaden. Further informations: chapter 7 - multimedia Action the video-gambler. Action can as well as Quicktime-, as also AVI-videos play back. Then he very ressourcenschonend is, can he also on Amigas with little achievement deployed become. Further informations: chapter 7 - multimedia PowerPC-support WarpOS the PowerPC-Kernel. WarpOS is an multitasking-kernel for PowerPC-processors (PPC), whereby PPC-program's on the Amiga used become able. WarpOS can one in about compare with "Exec", the operating system-kernel of AmigaOS. With OS3.9 is the new version 5 delivered; besides able the most weighty settings now with a special progam resolved to do become. Further informations: chapter 11 - WarpOS program's to the change the Workbench AmiDOCK The progam-Startleiste. Whom has she not already disturbed - the disorder on the Workbench: anywhere lie progam- Icons around and when one some seeks, then is it either concealed or one finds it easy not. Here brings AmiDOCK remedy, in that all program's, to categories assorted, in one Startleiste disposed become able - and the easy through Hineinziehen. Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench IconEdit the Icon-editor. Indeed is IconEdit already always component of OS been, but first ever since OS3.5 is he an real strong tool for the building from pictograms become. He offers correct Malfunktionen and many special extras for Icons. Natural helps he also at creation of "glowing" for the "GlowIcons"-style. Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench Animated Icons Bewegte pictograms. The "animierten IUcons" become with the Weihnachtsthema of BoingBag #1-update from OS3.5 pp of einführen. With it is an GIF- order transfer-animation as Icon defined. When you the Animationen clever choose and appropriate on the Workbench place, get you a individual, animierten Desktop how him otherwise no one has. Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench RAWBInfo The progam-info. ReAction Worbench info - short RAWBInfo can more as one first thinks. Displayed become the general informations to the angewählten file, on wish but also version number and creation date or the bigness of list and the number the ingoing files. Natural able here also the write protection, the tees and another Icon- attributes gesetz become. New is the possibility, Icons to exchange, to change or as default to define. And the is still long not all... Further informations: chapter 6 - Commodities ReAction-Prefs the surfaces-Preferences. ReAction is the graph surface from OS3.5 and 3.9. The settings for background, the font the headings and the style the buttons and Rollbalken from ReAction-basierten program able you here eintellen. Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the Workbench Workbench-Prefs the Workbench-Preferences. Also the Workbench has ever since OS3.5 a Preferences, around drives to hide, by pictograms the GlowIcon- and NewIcon-style interrupt and the pop stack (Stack) as soon as the keyboard- Auswahlverzögerung to set. Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the Workbench The "peewees" helper Picasso the Grafikkarten-driver. Picasso is an Treibersystem for Grafikkarten. It is to the familiarize standard CyberGraphX- compatible and bolstered nearly all familiarize Grafikkarten, self very old types. Over a Preferences able nearly all values from Grafikkarte and monitor on each other attuned become. Further informations: chapter 12 - Picasso2000 CacheCDFS the CD-ROM-Filesystem. With these Filesystem able you all gängigen CD-ROM-drives in Amiga bustle. It bolstered the formats Amiga RockRidge, ISO-9660, Mac-HFS, Hybrid-CDs, Multi-Session and Multi-vom by von from. Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the Workbench HDToolbox the hard drives-tool. The HDToolbox became for OS3.5 complete new written. With you direct you hard drives an, alter partitions and determine the Filesystem. Important is the HDToolbox but also to the securing of RDB, without the you your hard drive to a defect often not reconstitute able. Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench EditPad the small editor. You will a board text write or easy only quick an change on the "user-startup"-file carry out? Then is EditPad exactly the correct editor for you. He is quick charged and easy to attend. IomegaTools the Zip- and Jaz-administrator. The IomegaTools serve to the formatting and Verwalten from Zip- and Jaz-disk drive. Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench ViNCEd The professional-Shell, actual is ViNCEd an "console Handler", however able many with these concept little begin. In ground is he an strong rectified Shell with History-function, variable TAB-completion and so elusive many functions, that it hierfµr a Preferences with 25 cut off gives. Who frequent with the Shell or the CLI collaborates, ought he ViNCEd on each fall closer look at. Chapter 5 - The new Shell Find fast seeking. Where was the file alike still? Or - in which file had I some to the subject xyz read? With it is now end, because "Find" finds every file on your hard drive and it can also to keyword in the files seek. Suchbegriff enter, Laufwerk(e) choose and loose goes's... Further informations: chapter 6 - Commodities WB Clock The clock on the Workbench. They wanted you not already always an clarify analogous-clock with a selbstgestalteten Hintergrundbild on your Workbench have? Possession - wish fills! Further informations: chapter 6 - Commodities DefIcons-Prefs The Datatypes-recognition. With DefIcons able you for all Datatypes (MP3, IFF, JPG, etc.) without pictograms an progam define, the this announce or play (e.g. IFF-images with Multiview show leave). DefIcons is by it natural not on the Dateiendung dependent, but can by means of of any attribute the file the type recognize. Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the Workbench Printer-Prefs the printer-Preferences. The Drucksystem of AmigaOS became in OS3.5 fundamental changes. The expression follow now faster and electively also in Echtfarben. The different Preferences older OS-versions become besides collected together. Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the Workbench ASL-Prefs the ASL-Preferences. Determin you self the bigness and position of Dateiauswahl-window and lay you fast, how assorted become shall. Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the Workbench XAD XAD is an Entpacker-system for files, the with LHA, LZX or ZIP gotta become. With a Doppelklick on an gotta file opens he an Dateiauswahl for the goal. Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench 2. Installing from AmigaOS 3.9" 2.1. Emergency diskette produce before you new Kickstart-rom in and the update on OS3.9 on you Amiga fit is it particularly weighty, an Notfalldiskette to produce. In you Amiga-system must an functioning CD-ROM-drive installert is. Layering you now the OS3.9 CD-ROM in you drive and doppelklicken you on the OS3.9-Installationssymbol. It opens he an newer onscreen and the installer appear in bottom right edge of the screen. The first entry in the Auswahlt is "Notfalldiskette unconditional first produce" and is vorausgewählt. Choose you "further" and follow you the assignments of installers. Holding you an 3½ custom-diskette ready, the with the emergency-data described become can. When you the assignments follow, is first of all the mentioned diskette requested, the formated and installed is. After this become all necessary data on the diskette copied. To this belong to an particular Startup-Sequence, possibly existing Grafikkarten-driver and self-evident the CD-ROM-driver. The procedure lasts ever to installierter hardware approx. 5 minutes. Eventually become you to the hardware-driver asked, on the you CD-ROM- drive connected is and to the hardware-ID. Please answer you the recitations correct. Towards more concluded installing is it advisable, the Notfalldiskette auszuproblieren. Letting you the diskette and the OS3.9 CD-ROM in the drive and commence the Amiga new. When all frictionless serves has, ought you system to short time over the CD-ROM already OS3.9 boot. When you but still the old Kickstart-rom (Bersion 39 or smaller) implemented have, is the procedure abbort. Reading you then in the next section wider. Credit you already Kickstart-rom 3.1 (version 40) in you system installed, able you the following section jump and in the übernächsten section "prepare the hard drive" weiterlesen. 2.2. Mounting the Kickstart-ROM the mounting the ROM-elements stands a erheblichen encroachment in the Amiga there. When you he these encroachment not confide should, leave you these from a autorisierten Amiga-trader carry out. With wrong mounting the rom become this inevitable destroys. The author and had silver plated & partner adopt no adhesion for upcomming damages. Before you with the ROM-installing start, toggle you please the computer and all angeschlossenen hardware from. 2.2.1. The mounting in the A1200 turning you the A1200 around and enternen you all screws on the bottom. Layering you the calculator again right around and heave the cover, as soon as the keyboard high and flap this to behind off. The rom should next to the enlargement-Slot uncover wein. Elevation you rom careful with a Schlitzschraubenzeiher from the socle. Walk you by it very careful before, then you the rom and also the socle damage could. Plug you thereafter the 3.1-rom in the socle. The ROM with the inscription 391773 comes in the socle with the lettering U6A. The dent must by it in direction of PCMCIA-ports show. The other ROM (391774) stick you in the socle with the lettering U6B. Squeeze you the rom fast in the socle, then this otherwise destroys become could. You able now the calculator in inverted order again assemble. 2.2.2. The mounting in the A3000 Desktop draw you all cable from 3000D off. Undoing you the bolt on the backplane and press the facing to in the front off. Now ought the AMIGA without facing before you stand. Building you all Zorro-edge-mounted from, before you he the Laufwerksbrücke devote. Undoing you on the Laufwerksbrücke the 3 screws on the front and the 2 on the reverse. You able the Laufwerksbrücke now light to above jack, around the battery, the hard drives- and Diskettenlaufwerkskabel from the motherboard to solve (the jack for the Stormversorgung is with a spring catch secured). Building you now the complete Laufwerksbrücke from. Attempts you now, the rom, the next to the joystick un the Mausport lie with a slotted screwdriver auszuhebeln. Here is care necessary, then you the socle and the rom with too much force damage could. Take you now the new ROM to the hand and set you this in the appositely socle an. Eighth you thereupon, that the rom right around (the nicks from the joystick-ports off) and also in the correct socle inserts become. The ROM with the inscription U180 comes in the socle with the lettering U180. The others ROM (U181) stick you in the socle with the lettering U181. Squeeze you the rom fast in the socle, then this otherwise destroys become could. You able now the calculator in umgekehreter order again assemble. 2.2.3. The mounting in the A3000T screws you the screen of 3000T off. Undoing you then the 4 screws on front and reverse of Festplateten-sledge. Attempts you disen from the Tower to remove (this cost some on power). Levers you now the rom with enem Schlitzschraubenzeiher from the socle, fit you by it on, that you the socle not damage. Plug you now the 3.1er rom in the socle. The ROM with the inscription U180 comes in the socle with the lettering U180. The dent must in direction the interfaces-connections show. The other ROM stick you in the socle with the lettering U181. Squeeze you the rom fast in the socle, then this otherwise destroys become could. You able now the calculator in inverted order again assemble. 2.2.4. The mounting in the A2000 screws you the casing yours A2000 on and take you it off. Now see you the Festplattenschlitten, the you remove must. Undoing you the screws on fore- and reverse of sledge and heave him out. The ROM lies between the battery, the 68000 CPU and the FAT LADY-chip. Attempts you the ROM with a slotted screwdriver from the socle U500 to remove. Take you then the new ROM to the hand and press it with the dent in direction the Anschlußports (audio, video...) in the socle. Squeeze you the ROM fast in the socle, then this otherwise destroys become could. You able now the calculator in inverted order again assemble. --- WEIGHTY -------------------------------------------------------------- when you a A2000 from 1989 commodore MAGGOT IN GERMANY (BSW) possession, must you modifications in ROM hear. Further details see you in the hint, the the ROM beiliegt. 2.2.5. The mounting in the A500 turning you the A500 around and remove all screws on the bottom. Turning you the calculator again right around and try you, the casing to open. Keyed you now the keyboard to behind off. The ROM-socle with the old ROM lies next to the FAT AGNUS-chip of A500. Attempts you the ROM careful with a slotted screwdriver from the socle to heave. Take you now the new ROM to the hand and press it with the dent in direction the Anschlußports in the socle. Squeeze you the ROM fast in the socle, then this otherwise destroys become could. You can now the calculator in inverted order again assemble. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when you Rev. 3 or 5 possession, must you modifications in ROM carry out. Further details see you in the hint, the the ROM beiliegt. 2.3. Prepare the hard drive after you now an Notfalldiskette generated and the new rom in yours Amiga implemented have (so far you not already the correct had), devote we us now the furniture the hard drive. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ basic is these step only notwenig, when you an new and with it vacuously hard drive with the new system install want or when really the emergency occurred is and your hard drive an irreparable malfunction has. Fundamental gives it two hard drives-Bussyteme for the AMIGA: . AT-BUS . SCSI --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ with the AT-bus-hard drives differs one still between IDE, ATA and UltraATA, where the last-mentioned type the recent is. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ with SCSI-hard drives gives it the standard SCSI 1, 2, 3 (ultra-Wide) and 4 (ultra 2 Wide). Of it become in Amiga only SCSI 1, 2 and 3 bolstered. 2.3.1. IDE IDE-hard drives are in the rule more easily to konfiguriueren. You are but special on the Amiga much slower as SCSI-hard drives. The systematics by IDE based on on one Master/Slave-topology, i.e. The boat- hard drive must always the "Master" is. As "Slave" is normalweise the CD-ROM or an other IDE-device defined. On a IDE-bus permit always only maximally two hardware hang. If you e.g. A 4-subject adapter for yours IDE-controllers possession, able you till to four hardware (on two Kabelsträngen) anschlißen. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ eighth §ie at Anschuluß the IDE-hardware always on the Polung. On one side of IDE-cord ought he an red marked cable find. This must at jack of IDE-device on the position "1" lie (is normally-wise on the hard drive characterized). A false Polung can to the destruction of IDE-device lead! 2.3.2. SCSI SCSI is an very wide scattered partyline Partyline on the Amiga, then many Amigas standard SCSI implemented have, SCSI is normalweise much faster as IDE (SCSI1=10Mb/braised, SCSI2=20Mb/braised, UW-SCSI=40Mb/braised, U2W-SCSI= 80Mb/braised), for it are hard drives, CD-burner and CD-rom also around some dearer. SCSI is more pretentious to configure, but for it offers it also more possibilities, how till to 14 hardware on a hank (bus). The hardware per bus hang natural from the SCSI-standard off. SCSI rebuilds on the UNIT-topology on, i.e. One configured the hardware to "Units". The order is by it not relevantly, only to the digest ought one e.g. The hard drives first (Unit 0 & 1) and the CD-ROM on Unit 3 set. The "Units" ought one so be taken, that she for he logical appear. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ The Unit "7" permit not allocates become, then the SCSI-controllers this Unit allocates. It permit also no Doppelbelegungen the "Units" come forward, then that system then probable not work is. The beginning and the end of SCSI-rope must always "scheduled" is. That is particularly by UW-SCSI weighty, then this without termination very probable not work is. In best is it active terminators to use, then this the data, the arrive again give back and not fizzle out leave. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ you should also if possible the interference from different SCSI-standard report, because the SCSI-controllers thereby on the lowest the existing SCSI-penance in the system decelerated is. Also by SCSI is on the Polung to respect. With UW-SCSI can one the hardware not verpolen, then the cable only in an direction aufsteckbar are. With SCSI 2 must one but at ribbon cable on the correct Polung respect. In most cases are SCSI-Jabek gegeb Verpolung protected, but regrettably however not always. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ the Benutzen from SCSI-adapter (e.g. Around SCSI-2-hardware on a UW-SCSI-bus to connect) ought weitmöglichst debared become, because this in the first place the SCSI-bus brakes and secondly the SCSI-bus instabiler makes. 2.3.3. Fit the hard drive building you hard drive in yours calculator an and close you she how described on (ever after if it an IDE- or SCSI-device is). Now should you the calculator commence, around the hard drive to configure. Activating you yours calculator now with ein inserted Notfalldiskette and AmigaOS 3.9 CD-ROM. Doppelklicken you to the boot on the Diskettensymbol the "Emregency-Disk" and commence likewise with a Doppelklick the HDToolbox Program. The actual config one hard drive runs in three they strode off: 1. Fit, 2. Partitionieren and 3. Formatting. The has go now this steps systematic through: 2.3.3.1. Activating the HDToolbox night the boot the HDToolbox from the Notfalldiskette, become you requested the device driver to select, on the your hard drive connected is. In example choose we the "cybppc.device" and toggle on "Wide SCSI adapter" in bottom edge. The brings about, that all 16 IDs the on these device angeschlossenen hard drives on the existence one hard drive inspected become. Is "Wide SCSI adapter" not active, e.g. At normal "scsi.device" become merely the maximally 8 IDs inspected. 2.3.3.2. Step 1 - fit towards the selection of device driver and click on "OK" become the bus searched and the gefundenen hard drives in one list displayed. Choose you the obversely hard drive from and press you now "hard drive install". The HDToolbox is you in front of it warn, that the content the plate destroys is. Squeeze you "OK". You become now asked if an RDB generated become shall, press you "new". Now opens he an new window. Squeeze you "harvest config" and the HDToolbox reads the data the hard drive from. Now should fabricator, Festplattenname etc. Filling is. Squeeze you now still "fit". You reach then again on the Startbildschirm the HDToolbox. The hard drive is now installed and already automatic partitioniert. You must so no one adjustments more carry out and able the HDToolbox leave and direct with the formatting the hard drive leave (step 3). You able now but also the point "hard drive partitionieren" invoice and the division the plate kongrollieren and if necessary alter. 2.3.3.3. Step 2 - Partitionieren when you in the HDToolbox the point "hard drive partitionieren invoked have, then appear the above Preferences. Ever to bigness the Fesplatte are an or more partitions vorkonfiguriert. Those able you so adopt. The bigness the partitions able you but also with the Schiebereglern alter. Now must you her Bootpartition only still "bootbar" make (as far as you an Bootpartition fix will). Choose you easy the Bootpartition above by the partitions from (ought now blue is) and toggle "Bootbar" on (left next to the "Hinzu./Update"- button). --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when an Partition "bootbar" made become shall, then must on each fall the complete Partition (beginning and end) below the 4Gb-border lie. The Fesplatte is is now fertif partitioniert, you must only still "save" drükken. After this must you a restart of computer carry out, when it not automatic happens. The partitions should now on the Workbench-surface as "Unformatiert" appear. Choose you this on and commence from the menu "Icon" the entry "Disk formatting". Please use you exclusive of the option "rapid" to the formatting, because this saves time and is besides complete insufficient. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ with the formatting should you the partitions meaningful names give, the the purpose the Partition correspond to. As standard has he for the system- Partition "system" and for the job-Partition "Work" achieved. Towards the formatting able you the hard drive use and the the new AmigaOS 3.9 install. Further info to the HDToolbox find you in a separate chapter. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ general information tips to hard drives save you frequent the RDB ("Ridged Disk block" your hard drive on a other data medium (e.g. An diskette) off. The RDB contains all important basic settings. When he once by one Festplattenoperation destroys is, have you no intervention more on the data your hard drive. The HDToolbox offers in the Tetelleisten-menu on the side a point "RDB computer store" on. The companion there to is then the function "RDB load". Save you by these contingency also alike the Mount-art off. Also this function is over a Munüpunkt offered. Please think you at it, the RDB and the Mount-art by every one change the hard drives-settings with the HDToolbox renewed to backup! With hard drives is sufficient it, at formatting the option "rapid" to choose. The Formatiervorgang runs then monumental faster off. 2.4. AmigaOS 3.9 install after now the Notfalldiskette prepared is and possibly an new hard drive formated became, open you ie CD-ROM "AmigaOS3.9" and doppelklicken on the drawer OS-Version3.9. Activating you the Installationsvorgang with Doppelklick on the Icon "OS3.9 installing". The has ahead, at creation the Notfalldiskette, is an newer onscreen open and the Installationsfenset in bottom right edge of the screen displayed. Here see you, next to the already beschribenen option "Notfalldiskette produce", 6 another options, the in the following Beschrieben become: OS3.9 update-installing over OS3.5 Ist already an OS3.5-Instllation on your hard drive existing and want you this merely on OS3.9 update, is sufficient the selection these option. Hereby become all changed parts of the program from OS3.5 and new added applications and Systemnestandteile installed. Towards the Instllation is an restart enforderlich. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- The installing is not carried out, when few as 20Mb fixed-disk storage on the hard drive to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stand or when the Kickstart 3.1 not installed is. OS3.9 Vollinstallation over OS3.1 or on emptiness HD Wählen you this option, when you an vacuously Partition your hard drive with a system install want or when you an with OS3.1 installed Partition on OS3.9 update will. Also herewith is an restart to the installing compulsary. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- The installing is not carried out, when few as 20Mb fixed-disk storage on the hard drive to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stand or when the Kickstart 3.1 not installed is. Internet program's, Genesis, AWeb and EMailer with the selection the installing the Internet-program's is zunächt supervised, if already OS3.9 installed is. Is this not the fall, is the procedure with one accordingly error message receipted. Fit you then first of all OS3.9, how in the previous cut off described. With the installing the Internet-program's is for every parcel discrete asked, if it installed become shall or not. The TCP/IP-Stack Genesis must installed become, around generally with the program AWEb or a any other Internet-progam access to even that to attain. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when you already an Einternet-parcel how for instance NetConnect installed have, is it advisable the Internet-Instllation NOT carry out. Activating you the installing all the same, is you an more corresponding hint displayed and it your decision abandon, if you the Instllation all the same carry out want. PowerPC Support. WarpOS version 5.0 WarpOS is ever since appearance from AmigaOS 3.5 the standard-Treibersystem for Dualprozessor-PowerPC-Turbokarten the firm Phase5/DCE Dellert. The new version 5 offers some betterments and also support for already announced applications how the PowerPC-macintosh-emulator iFusion. Fit you this Treibersystem, when in you Amiga an such PowerPC turbokarte installed is. CD-ROM driver the CD-ROM Treibersystem has an special position by the installing from OS3.9. Finally must already an CD-ROM-driver in you system installed is, around generally AmigaOS 3.9 from the CD install to able. It is hence advisable existing driver not with it to assign, then by the diversity available device driver not guaranted become can, that the the AmigaOS 3.9 enclosed driver on every system faultless work is. Is the AmigaOS3.9-installing to the boot from the Notfalldiskette through led, is the CD-ROM-driver from the Notfalldiskette automatic on the picked Partition transfer and with it automatic installed. When you sure sin, that the AmigaOS3.9 CD-ROM-driver on yours system serves, able you however with these Installationsoption other boat-partitions as the, from the booted became, with a CD-ROM-driver provide. Languages Aktualisieren the has by the AmigaOS3.9-Vollinstallation become you also by the selection from "languages update" asked, which languages on your boat- Partition installed become shall. With this able hind other Sprachvarianten the system program installed become. 3. The Preferences the Workbench (Prefs) The Workbench stands at AmigaOS the greatest part of user-inferface there. Corresponding extensive are the Einstellmöglichkeiten (English: Preferences or short Prefs). The Preferences find he standard in the directory "Prefs" on the system-Parition. You be able with it the behavior of great in part of AMIGA-intrasystem bias and appropriate yours Wüschen adjust. e.g.: . Sampling one keyboard assignment . Tuning the wished language . Re design the Workbench-screen display . Re design the colors for the Workbench . Re design the form of Mauspfeils . Give of print page and of it attitude for the Grafikausgabe . Configuring of modems . Tuning from time and date 3.1. The "Prefs"-directory The drawer "Prefs" contains the Preferences and the drawer "Presets" (defaults). The Preferences the "Prefs"-drawer in the following art are the Editoren in the order listed, in the she in these chapter explained become. ASL the Preferences for the ASL-Dateiauswahl (off OS3.9) DefIcons the Preferences for the competent definition from default-pictograms (off OS3.9) for files the no own pictograms possession. Font (font) sampling the fonts for Piktogrammtexte, Screen- and window-headings and for the Shell. IControl sampling differently Systemoptionen, e.g. The key to the draw of screen. Input (input) tuning the Mausgeschwindigkeit, the Wiederholungsgeschwindigkeit the keyboard and the national-keyboard assignment. Oertlich (land) sampling from language, land and time zone. Overscan tuning the bigness of reading area for text and (guard zone) graphics. Palette (colour) re design the colors the Workbenchobjekte. Pointer re design the bigness, form and colour of Mauspfeils and of (Mauszeiger) Wartezeigers (Busypointer). Printer (printer) selection of printer driver for yours Drukker and the accompanying options, e.g. Paper size and Randeinstellungen. PrinterGfx tuning of print page for the giving out from graphics. (Graphic printer) Ist off OS3.5 an Bestandtel of "Printer"-Preferencess. PrinterPS taxes the giving out on PostScript-Drukkern. (PostScript- printer) ReAction here become settings for the new GUI-system ReAction resolved to do (off OS3.5). ScreenMode sampling the screen resolution. (Screenmode) Serial (serial) tuning the specifications for the serial interface, the to the communicating with modems and hardware-doings serves. Sound Festlegen of clay (Sound) for the acoustic signal by Systemfehlern. TIME (time) tuning from date and time. WarpOS the Preferences for WarpOS (off OS3.9). WBPattern (pattern) sampling and Erstellen from Hintergrundmustern for the Workbench-window and -screens. Workbench here become fundamental settings of behavior the Workbench adjusted (off OS3.5). 3.2. The defaults (Presets) The drawer "Presets" is the Speicherort for defaults, the with the separate Voreinstllern resolved to do become and special gespreichert become. Every one Preferences disposes over the Menüpunke: "project", "defaults" and "settings". With help of menu "Project" able you files with differently defaults computer store and load. That enables you a expeditious change between differently configurations, without that an restart of intrasystem necessary is. Standard become this files in the drawer "Presets" (this find you on the hard drive under SYS:Prefs/Presets) saved. You able however on every one from you desired position saved become. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when you pictograms for this files create (through sampling from "pictograms produce?"), able you the settings through undoing of pictograms activate. That saved you the call of respective ones Preferencess. When you in Preferencesn "save" to the save the adjustments anklicken, become the settings under following path saved: SYS:Prefs/Env-archives/Sys/name.prefs with it stands SYS: for the names of data medium, the the file contains, and "name" for the names of specific Preferencess. With the system start become the in the drawer "Env-archives" store settings uses. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ with use of menu item "save as" commends it he, the Vorgabedatei (Preset) under the angegebenen path to computer store. 3.3. The standard-menu the Preferences with exception of time-Preferencess (tIME) disposes every one Preferences over following menu: project, defaults and settings. Those shall in the following short envisaged become. 3.3.1. Menu "project" over the in the following described menu "project" able you the settings of editor in one file computer store or ahead created files open. Undoing shop the data one angegebenen file with defaults. Save as Angeben the file, in the the actual settings as defaults saved become shall. In Dialogwindow is in the drawer "Presets" an standard-filename displayed. Re design you these names, in case several Vorgabedateien for the editor uses become. Termination termination of editor without save the adjustments. Those option has the same function how "breaking off". 3.3.2. Menu "defaults" over this menu able you ahead appropriated settings or. Default settings wiederhelstellen. The following menu items stand you to the zur ~ - at one's disposal. On defaults Zurücksetzen the settings of editor on the disfavour default settings of intrasystem Auf at last Zurücksetzen the settings of editor on the savings settings, the at last with "save" saved become. On previous Zurücksetzen on the settings of editor at condition first undoing of editor The menu "defaults" of Workbench-pattern-Preferencess (WBPattern) and of Mauspfeil-Preferencess (Pointer) have following additional options: Ausschneiden copying of entirety area of expertise in the buffer (Clipboard), thereafter discharge in the advertisement. Copying copying of entirety area of expertise in the clipboard. Integrate substitution of entirety area of expertise through the at last ausgeschnittenen or replicated data from the clipboard. Discharge discharge the data in the entirety area of expertise. Withdrawals undoing the zultzt carried out action. Wiederhestellen Stellt the at last widerrufenen condition again here. Image load... Undoing of Dateiauswahlwindows, in the the name one Bilddatei entered become can, the as Hintegrundmuster or -picture uses is. With these menu items able you pattern and Mauspfeilbilder more easily edit. Employ you the menu items "Ausschneiden", "copying" and "Einfügen", around images from editor to a progam to transfer, the on the clipboard seize can and the over more extensive Zichenfunktionen disposes (e.g. The progam "IconEdit"). Employ you "image load", around standard-IFF-bitmap-images in the editor to load. (Images, the greater are as the area of expertise of editor, become neim shop or. Integrate in the editor on the trailing edge or. On the right side cropped.) 3.3.3. Menu "settings" the menu "settings" contains the menu item "pictograms produce?", With of it help you project-pictograms for Vorgabedateien computer store able. When you e.g. Your Druckerspezifikationen in the file "SYS:Prefs/Presets/Canon.prefs" computer store, appear the corresponding pictograms in the window "Presets" (defaults). Click you to the activate the settings these file the Icon double on. 3.4. WarpOS-Preferences (OS3.9) a detailed description to these Preferences find you in the chapter 11. 3.5. DefIcons-Preferences (OS3.9) with DefIcons able you for all Datatypes (e.g. .mp3, .iff, .jpg etc.) the standard no Icon possession, an standard-Icon define, which then an voreingestelltes progam actuates (e.g. IFF- images with Multiview show leave). Thereby is the Workbench still stronger and the workings monumental simplified. It must e.g. Not more on the side an Bildanzeiger charged become, around an image to look, but one doppelklickt easy the Icon of picture on and already is it with the voreingestellten progam displayed. Around DefIcons in you system einzubinden, lay you the DefIcons- main program in the WBstartup-drawer. In addition must in the directory "Prefs" the DefIcons-Preferences and in "ENV-archives/sys" must default- pictograms (e.g. def_iff.info) be there. With the update- or Vollinstallation from AmigaOS 3.9 is this already automatic resolved to do. The DefIconsPrefs-Preferences apportions he in two fields: "Datatypes" and "actions". 3.5.1. Datatypess here become in one list all use Datatypes displayed. Around a new data type to create, press you on the button "New" below the list. Around a bestehenden from the art to clean, press you "remove". With the arrows, on the right next to the "remove"-button able you the position of Dateityps change. Around he the defined pictograms and the appropriated progam of Dateityps show to leave, click you easy double on a Dateityp. Now must he an Informationswindow open (how in the RAWBInfo chapter describe, am mapping). Left-hand in the Informationswindow see you the defined pictograms for the Dateityp. When you now in the Informationswindow on the submenu "pictograms" klickken is there an standard program specified (so far the Icon from type "project" is). This standard program gives on, with which progam the picked Dateityp invoked is (e.g. Multiview by the Dateityp "IFF" or EditPad by "TXT"-files). 3.5.2. Actionen right next to the Datatypesliste is the area "actions". Here become the Vergleichsoperatoren of gewählten Dateityps displayed, i.e. Here become the pattern specified, whereby DefIcons the Dateityp firm found. 3.5.2.1. Add here able you a Vergleichsoperator give. Here gives it following comands: comparison here give you in the gleichnamigen input field the character string on, the in the file on the under "position" angegebenen place to find is ought. Is "Sensitiv" picked, so is between grand- and use of small letters unterschiden. Is an sign the angegebenen strings not representable (it finds he no key on the keyboard there to), so able you the ASCII-worth of sign in hexadezimaler notation give, e.g. "\xff" for decimal 255 or "\x0a" for decimal 10. Quest with these comand able you direct in the file to a particular codeword, the for these Dateityp typical is, seek. Through selection from "Sensitiv" is between grand- and use of small letters discriminated. Is "blanks ignore" picked, so become blanks and tabs the the to seeking character string precede flashed, other sign the with the character string no agreement have lead to the breaking-off the quest. Also here able hexadecimal worth with vorangehenden \x entered become. Filesize here is to one particular bigness inspected. Credit e.g. Appointed files always the same bigness, able through this method also these files light an DefIcon allocated become. Pattern here able you to a particular pattern in the file names seek leave. When you e.g. "Pattern #?.iff" at Dateityp "IFF" give, become all files the with ".iff" end as IFF-images recognized. Those process is sure very quick, is but e.g. By IFF- picture without extension fustily. Cover here become the Schutzbits supervised. You able here choose which Schutzbits one file steady or excluded is must, with it this the ausgewählten Dateityp allied become can. Or with "or" knot you different operators together, how e.g. By the Guide-format: "pattern #?.guide" or "seek @file" that means, that the to überprüfende file either on ".guide" end must or the character string "@file" in you hold is must with it you as Guide-file recognized is. Is ascii Überprüft if the file an text file is or not. The use these action is only for the ASCII- Dateityp certain. Makroklasse is this action gesetz, so able possibly another defined actions sure there to lead, that the picked Dateityp recognized is, however is is Icon first uses, when an subclass of Datatypes also übereinstimmt and this self no Icon owns. 3.5.2.2. Enfernen action is from the list distant. 3.5.2.3. Learning... Through sampling of counter appear an Dateidialog, there become you solicited at least 2 files resemble model to select. On basis of byte for byte arrangement is then an list from actions created, the to the identification of ausgewählten Dateityps used is. Around the chops and changes to store press you please left back on the Button "save". 3.5.3. The menu the Titelleistenmenü apportions he in three subassemblies: 3.5.3.1. Project undoing with it able you an Konfigurationsdatei load. Attach with it can an Konfigurationsdatei on the consisting of Konfigurationsdatei appended become. Speichem as... Here able you an new Konfigurationsdatei conserve. Seeking here able you the list to a Dateityp rummage. Next put the quest on the actual position within the Datatypesliste forth. Over copyright and author from DefIcons is here show. Termination Schließt the DefIcons-Preferences. 3.5.3.2. Defaults on defaults here is all again on the defaults reset. Disfavour on at last it loads the file the at last store config. Stored on previous Setz all on the condition before the change. Condition 3.5.3.3. Icon info here able you the Infodialog of ausgewählten Dateityps invoice. Editing with this able you the Icon of gewählten Dateityps in the IconEdit load. 3.6. ASL-Preferences (off OS3.9) Ab OS3.9 is the Preferences for the ASL-Auswahldialoge foothold component of Betrievssystems. With the ASL-Preferences able you the bigness, position and sorting the ASL-Dialogwindow fix. Position default setting the has from OS defaulted. In window Zentriert the ASL-Dateiauswahl in the window of centers program, the she open has. On onscreen Zentriert the ASL-window on the Bildschrim. Centers Oben left in the it opens the ASL-window above-left in the window. Window Oben on the right on it opens the ASL-window above-left on the onscreen. Onscreen Mauszeiger it opens the ASL-window direct in Mauszeiger. Left corner The Randbreite for the left side (only bie "in window centers" and "Auf onscreen centers"). Waiter corner The Randbreite for the above lying edge (only by "in window centers" and "Auf onscreen centers"). Bigness default setting: how from OS defaulted. Relative breadth and height able with the Preferencesn free adjusted become. Breadth The breadth in % height The height in % with the folgeden three settings is the giving out within of Dateiauswahlwindows fixed: assortment to The giving out can to name, date and bigness assorted become. Directories here is the processing the directories fixed. Directories able "in beginning", "in end" or "einsortiert" personated become. Sortierreihenfolge The Sortierreihenfolge can "ascending" or "descending" is. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ Am best is it, the function "position" on "Mauszeiger" to stand, then this in most comfortable and fastest to attend is. 3.7. The Workbench-Preferences (off OS3.5) this Preferences serves to the Festlegen some kind of more fundamental parameter for the Workbench: The list "hid hardware" left in the window contains an itemization all physical drives on you calculator (i.e. Hard drive partitions, CD-ROM drives, etc.). When you the tick left from respective ones Laufwerksnamen set, so is this drive not on the Workbench displayed, stays but furthermore over the CLI, from Dateidialogwindown, etc. Obtainable. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ you able this option use, around e.g. Drives to hide, the only temporary data hold or on the you from the Workbench not seize will or. Must. To the example an Festplattenpartition of Mac-emulator. In section pictograms able you the following options adjust: no one when this option active is, so become neither NewIcon- Farbpiktogramme pictograms, still the Icon-data from OS3.5- pictograms uses, but the 8-coloured pictograms, the in OS3.1 and earlier versions standard were. No one NewIcons when this option active is, so become the NewIcon- data from pictograms older AmigaOS-versions ignored and instead of this the respective ones OS-standard- Icon uses, in case existing. MagicWB colors with these option become the first 8 coloured chalk with the (OS3.9) familiarize MagicWB colors vorbelegt, so that MagicWB pictograms in the correct colors displayed become. Quality this menu deposits fast, how the colors for the pictograms picked become shall. Ever superior the assurance level is, the you here choose, the better see the pictograms in the representation from, but stand simultaneous also few colors to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, the from applications programmes on the Workbench used become able. One detected this excessive Farbbelegung e.g. At it, that the IconEdit a own Screen at activating opens. Re design you the quality on "Schlecht" is he possibly again on the Workbench displayed become. Rahmengröße this menu deposits globally fast, which Rahmengröße pictograms use shall, or. That for pictograms generally no frame to use is. Please note you, that you pictograms produce able, the also by eingeschaltetem globalen frame self no frame have. Icon in to the selection stand here "graphic-" or "other (OS3.9) memory". With this lay you fast, if Piktogrammdaten so-called chip-Mem acknowledgement shall or in fasts-ram permit. Natural serves the whole only, when you an Grafikkarte installed have. With the use normally Amiga graphic on AGA or ECS chip- sentences has the attitude "Icon in other memory" no result. No one Titelleiste with this toggle you the Titelleiste the Workbench from (OS3.9) and the Hintegrundbild takes the complete height of Workbench-screen an. With click on the raked Maustaste appear the Titelleiste so you pressed hold. No one Ab oS3.5 became for Workbench Festplattenwindow the in Füllstandsanzeige lefthand windowrand disposed Füllstandsanzeige (OS3.9) pp of einführen. The option "no one Füllstandsanzeige" leaves you now the choice, if she displayed become shall or not. Pop stack- here able you the pop stack (Stack)-bigness for bigness program's fix, the without Icon from the Workbench from restarted become. With all other is the Stapelgröße in the respective ones Icon defined. Keyboard-selection- here able you the time in seconds fix, to delay the the buffer for the keyboard-controlled Piktogrammauswahl against depleted is and an Tastatureingabe as Neueingabe and not as Forsetzung of Piktogrammnamens considered is. 3.8. ReAction-Preferences (off OS3.5) ReAction is the graph surface off AmigaOS 3.5 and can with the accordingly Preferences yours request adapted become. To this stand the following options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: Refresh-kind here stand you an, to which method the Bildschirminhalt built up (refresh) become shall. In the attitude "smart" become blanketed windowteile, to the Nachvorne-Holen, very quick again picked up, for it is but the Speicherbedarf superior. In the attitude "simple" is few memory required, for it lasts the refreshing longer. Emergency- credit you in the font-Preferences a font font elective, the so great is, that appointed window not more on the onscreen fit würen, so attempted ReAction, the windowerneut under use this font to open. From diemes ground should you also a relative lower-case font as Fallback Zeichensatez auswälen. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ an click on the Default-button extinguishes the content of emergency-font field, so that the internal emergency-font from ReAction uses is. Hintergrundmuster in diemsem field able you the path to a image enter, the in the background from ReAction-window displayed qweswn aoll. Headings here stand you the font an, the for Gruppenüberschriften, how e.g. "Window", "group" and "look" in the ReAction-Preferences uses is. An click on the -button extinguishes the actual attitude, so that the standard-font for Gruppenüberschriften uses is. Adjustment those menu deposits fast, if Gruppentitel left adjusted, centered or right aligned placed become. 3D caption with these switch able you the stereoscopic look the Gruppenüberschriften on- and disable. Colour with these buttons able you the colour for the Gruppenüberschriften choose. When you on the Farbplatte the Workbench no one adjustments resolved to do have, are this black, white and blue. Style with these menu able you between different defaults for the look from ReAction-basierten program choose. Clearance in these field able you fix, how dense the separate elements from ReAction-uses along lie shall. It acts he herewith not around setier distances but around appointed Abstandsstufen, where less values less distances mean. 3D-Rollbalken when these switch active is, become the Rollbalken from wiles stereoscopic designed. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ test you easy the different styles from and settle you he for the, the you in best pleasing or with the you in best work able. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- The adjustments on these settings have only aftermath on program's, the on the Oberflächenbibliothek from ReAction base. All other program's are of it not affected. 3.9. CacheCDFS CacheCDFS is an strong CD-ROM-Filesystem, the it you allows, CD-rom the most different formats to read. It is with the OS3.9-Installer on you system installed, after this have you multifaceted possibilities, the intervention yours intrasystem on CD-ROM adjust and to optimalize. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- consider you please, that some the options and settings from CacheCDFS influence on the stability yours intrasystem have able. When you the effect one option or attitude on you system not exactly know, should you she unchanged leave. It follow now explanations to the most the verfügbaren options. Some options shall here not closer explained become, because she to special are. The not beschriebenen options are in the social intercourse also some censorious, hence should he only user with them concern, the an comprehensive knowledge over device driver and Dateisysteme possession. 3.9.1. The CacheCDFS-Preferences activating you now the CacheCDFS-Preferences "Prefs" on you boat- drive. Thereupon there opens he the following window: whole left in the window is he an list, in the the verfügbaren CD- ROM-drives listed become. It become only the CD-ROM-drives listed, the CacheCDFS as Filesystem use. Click you now on a entry (with great probability is he only an entry in the list. You become notice, that the options in the window, the before the click in sucked. "Geisterschrift" personated become, now normal personated become and so active and eligible are. The means, that the in the wider course from you vorgenommenen settings on the elective CD-ROM-drive work. Below the list is he an selection, the normally on "Multi-Session" switched is. CacheCDFS can as well as so. "Multiple-Session" as also "Multi-vom by von from"-CDs read. Multiple-Session beduetet, that the CD-ROM in several, from each other proper unconnectedly field created became. Stands the selection in CacheCDFS on "Multi-Session", become this "part" the CD-ROM on the Workbench so personated, as would it he around an sole, zusammenhängendes file-directory on the CD-ROM act. Normally finds he Multi-Session consideration by selbstgebrannten CD-rom, the to and to composed become, i.e. e.g. Became first an directory on the CD-R blazed, then the Session closed and later an further directory on the CD-R written etc. Normally must one hence between the Session switch, around on all contents the CD-ROM seize to able. With Multi-Session can one he the changeover save and on all contents the CD-ROM how usual seize. "Multiple-vom by von from" is an concept, that in very soon with partitions on one hard drive commensurable is. Indeed acts it he also here around more "Sessions", the but all defferent "names" carry, commensurable with the Diskettennamen. In "Multi-vom by von from"-mode appear this Sessions on the Workbench then every for he as own, virtual drive. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- please note you by the building one "Multi-vom by von from"-CD-ROM, that this from adereren Dateisystemen, e.g. Windows, in the rule not read become able. Those become e.g. Only on the first volume seize able. Right next to the list find he some switch ("BootPri" and under), the the speed and ah the stability yours intrasystem bias able. Normally needs no one the here incorporated values and no the options changed to become. The speed is during the installing from CacheCDFS already on you system optimized, the stabilitätsbeeinflussenden options on you system adapted. Consider you, that here frivolous resolved to do settings great problems cause able. Change you this options and values only, when you whole exactly know, what you do! As next follows the option "quest first to". Those selection is only by so-called "Hybrid-CDs" meaningful usable. "Crossbred-CDs"hold data in differently format, most known example is an CD, the as well as for PC as also for Mac usable is. On the PC are most only the data obtainable, the in the format "ISO-9660" on the CD discarded become. On a Mac however sees one only the content the CD, the in the Mac HFS-Fomat discarded became. With "quest first to" able you choose, on which part one Hybrid-CD you preferred seize want. "SCSI direct" - those option should you with care treat. You has strong only an, when problems at intervention on CD-ROM occur. Normally is this function switched off and needs in the most cases also not active become (the is hanging from use Host-adapter and of it driver-software). "Without Changelnt" affect the behavior at change from CDs. Shall you Amiga the change one CD not automatic recognize, should you this option plug. Acknowledges the Amiga the change then how from floppy usual, computer store you the attitude. Worse luck has the option the disadvantage, that the Systemperformance an little harmed is. Those option is normally only by very old Host-Adptern or more obsolete driver-software necessary. "Engine from", "Ruhib", those options determine, if the CD-drive to a read access the engine the arbor whole disable shall or only the speed of Spindelmotors lower shall. The most CD-ROM-drives more modern make react but not more on this options, then she already obversely mechanisms implemented have. The group "cover" serves there to, the advertisement and evaluation the so-called "cover-bits" globally to control. To the subject "cover-bits" should you in the "AmigaDOS"-guide on the AmigaOS-3.9-CD consult. There is then also the signification the cover-bits explains. The in CacheCDFS Prefs use cover-Bit-notations are with those in the AmigaDOS identical. "Files in lower case" worrys to activation for it, that by the advertisement of contents one CD the file names exclusive of in lower case displayed become, independent of it, how the file names on the CD discarded become. "Drives in lower case" serves how by "files in lower case", only become here the Diskettennamen (by "Multi-vom by von from"- CDs also the names the separate Sessions) in lower case displayed. "Konvertiere first sign" transforms capital letters in lower case and Amiga-foreign Zeichenkodierungen in obversely Amiga-Zeichenkodierungen. Those commutation follow only at first Ziechen of file names. The other sign bleilen unsolicited. CDs in a such format are but very seldom to encounter. "Automatic Kleinschreiben" - is an CD in the drive inlaid, the not in the special Amiga-format created became, become the sign all file names automatic by the advertisement in lower case converted. Is the CD in the Amiga-own format created been, become the file names exact so displayed, how she on the CD discarded are. "Little one RockRidge names" - then RockRidge-format is an special Amiga- format and can from other Computern not read become. "RockRidge grand-/use of small letters" - Erlabut the use from grand- and use of small letters in file names. "No one Joliet names" - the Joliet-format is an special Windows- format, the also long file names unterstütz. With the naming has Joliet, ever to standard, some austerities. "No one führenden Punke" - shall he on the one insert CD files find, whose names with a point begins, is by activation these option these point by all Zugriffsarten ignored. It is then so, as would the point in the file names not exist. "MSDOS file names permit" - MSDOS knows in the rule only the so-called 8+3 file names, i.e. 8 sign for the names plus 3 for the enhancement. "Mac HFS" - Mac HFS is an special macintosh-format. Whole back in the window find you from left to really still following switch: "Speichem" - The for the elective CD-ROM-drive vorgenommenen settings become saved and by a restart of intrasystem automatic for this drive again activates. "Use" - The vorgenommenen settings become for the elective drive activates but not saved. With the next restart of intrasystem worth again the settings, the at last saved been are. "Breaking off" - Verwift the vorgenommenen settings and schlißt the window from CacheCDFS. It worth the settings, the to a "Speichem" or "Benutzen" at last active were. 3.10. Font-Preferences (Font) with the font-Preferences (Font) able you font, -attribut and -size the fonts fix, the for the Benutzerschnittstelle of Amiga uses become. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ in unite uses are fast default fonts adjusted. The settings in the font-Preferences (Font) have then no aftermath on this fonts. With help the three field able you the to alter Textart choose. Workbench- font for the lettering from pictograms in Icon-text Workbench-window alter. Only for this Textart able text- and background color elective become. System-default- font for the advertisement from data, e.g. In the text Workbench-Ausgabewindow and in the mode "content list to names" alter. Onscreen-texts font alter, the for menu, Titelleisten and the most Dialogwindow uses is. Debit the font for more Textarten changes become, must you the fonts one after the other alter. To this must you however the window "font-Preferences (Font)" not leave. Ought the adjustments for the actual meeting and later meeting saved become, choose you to the clasps of window "font- Preferences (Font)" "save" from. With selection from "Benutzen" worth the adjustments only for the actual meeting. Towards selection one these options is the window closed, and the computer attempted, the Workbench automatic the Einsttellungen appropriate reset. You become requested, all project-, progam- and Shell-window to close. Disk- or Schubladenwindow able open remained. Choose you "breaking off" from, around the window "Ziechensatz-Preferences (Font)" without activate the adjustments to leave. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ The change of font for Workbench-Icon-text makes an clearance all pictograms in all geöffneten window needed. Choose you the menu item "Workbench/all update" from, around the previous position the pictograms wiederherzustellen. 3.10.1. Font-Auswahlwindow in the three font-Auswahlwindown become the verfügbaren fonts and character sizes (in point) as soon as the actual font for the picked Textart displayed. All Zeichansätze able for Workbench- and vdu display uses become. For standard-system-text must however an so-called "monospaced" font uses become, e.g. Topaz or Courier. With these fonts have all sign the same breadth. With help the Rolleiste or the Rollpfeile able you through the list the verfügbaren Zeichensätz browse. Show you to the sampling of sign on the wished font and click you him with the Auswahltaste on. Subsequent choose you an size of type from the aufgelisteten bulks from or give you the new bigness an. In font-Auswahlwindow for Workbench-pictograms-text able you with help of Blättersymbols "mode" the colour for text or. The colour for text and Zeichenhintergrund ("text + field") give: text: when you by "mode" the option "text" choose, is the text in the colour displayed, the in the accompanying field picked became. The background stays diaphanous. Text + field: with selection from "text + field" able you an colour for background give. When you this option choose, is the text independent from Hintergrundmuster of screen always legibly. Click you to the re design the text- and background color an colour in the display panel next to the field for "text" and "Hintergrd." On. Eighth you thereupon, that you two defferent colors choose. Otherwise is the text later not legibly. The number the verfügbaren colors is through the use Workbench- Bildschirmmodus fixed. The each use colors become over the colour-Preferences (palette) fixed. The for the Workbench use colors able only in the colour-Preferences "palette" changes become. 3.11. The IControl-Preferences with the IControl-Preferences able you Systemeinstellungen alter (e.g. The Sondertaste to the draw of screen and the filter for the Texteingabefeld). 3.11.1. Screen draw over the Auswahlfelder for "screen consider" able you next to or instead the -key other Sondertasten to the draw of screen give. Click you to the sampling one key the corresponding Auswahlfeld on. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ that commends he, when for instance in a user program the left Amiga-key and the Auswahltaste (mouse) other functions serve. In general is an change here not necessary. 3.11.2. Schirmversatz by menu those option is for user thought, the with screen work, the greater are as the reading area of monitor (virtueller Screen). In the rule appear the Workbench-menu left above on the onscreen. Is the left edge of screen not uncover and became "Schirmversatz by menu" activates, is the Workbench-onscreen at squeeze the Menütaste so deferred, that you on the menu seize able. The onscreen stays only so deferred, how the Menütaste pressed be expected to is. 3.11.3. Filter Texteingabefeld over the option "filter Texteingabefeld" is specified, if Steurzeichen in Texteingabefeldern as normal sign or as Editierbefehle interpreted become. Under a control character understands one an key combination (in the rule the key and an alphabetic key), with whose help normally an appointed function invoked is. The following Standardsteuerzeichen become to the input from text uses: Ctrl-M Dient derselbern function how the enter key. Ctrl-H Löscht the sign left next to the cursor (serves the same function how the Rücktaste). Ctrl-X Löscht an detailed row. Ctrl-r.p.m. Löscht all sign left next to the cursor. Ctrl-K Löscht all sign from cursor till to the Ender the row. Cursor to left put the cursor around an sign to left. Custor to on the right put the cursor around an sign to on the right. Ctrl-A Stellt the cursor on the Zeilenanfang. Ctrl-Z Stellt the cursor on the end of line. Is the option "filter Texteingabefeld" activates and is of these control character entered, when the cursor he in a nichtnumerischen field is, has the control character the above called function. Is the filter not activates, is the control character in the entered character string absorbed. On the onscreen appear control character as above-board rectangle or as other sign, the not to the standard-font character heard. Also independent from the attitude for "filter Texteingabefeld" able you anytime control character in an Texteingabefeld enter. Holding you there to the key and the -key pressed and press you the obversely alphabetic key. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ in window with several Texteingabefeldern able you the cursor through squeeze the skip key in the next field stand. In these window must you always the -key and the press, around an Tabulatorzeichen in an Texteingabefeld to enter. 3.11.4. Flickering Vermeiden through the option "flickering avoid" is hindered, that by a in the background existing onscreen the Zeilensprungdarstellung activates is, when an davorliegender onscreen how an Rollo to back pulled is. With default setting is this option activates. 3.11.5. Mode transfer through the option "mode adopt" is the Softwarefunktion to the Vermeiden the Zeilensprungdarstellung (eng. Software Deinterlacing Feature) controlled, the on Amiga-Computern with WATER-chip-setting to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stands. With selection from "mode adopt" able through uses open PAL- and NTSC-screens automatic so adapted become, that an flimmerfreier Bildschirmmodus uses is. With Videoarbeiten commends it he, this option to inactivate. Further informations to these subject find you in you original Workbench- guide in the chapter 7 or on the OS3.9-CD. 3.11.6. 1:1 Seitenverhältnis (OS3.9) those new functionality brings about, that the aggrandizement-symbol in the window frame now scöner and proporationaler Aussieht. On Grafikkarten was it often interfering, that the bottom Schieberegler in the window frame and the Vergrößenungs-symbol very flat with a Seitenverhältnis from 1:2 displayed became. The has the bottom mapping shows, sees it now essential gefälliger from. 3.12. Input-Preferences (Input) over the input-Preferences (Input) able you the Arbeitsgeschwindigkeit for the mouse and the keyboard alter un the keyboard assignment choose. 3.12.1. Mouse speed over the Schieberegler "Mausgeschwindigkeit" able you the relative speed of Mauspfeils on the onscreen in bezug on the speed give, with the the mouse on the table deferred is. Ever faster he the arrow on the onscreen animates, the few place and pains is at shift the mouse enforderlich. You able between three Mausgeschwindigkeiten choose: 1, 2 and 3. With it stands 1 for the lowest, 3 for the highest speed. Draw you to the re design the Schieberegler "Mausgeschwindigkeit", till the desired worth displayed is. The Mausgeschwindigkeit is forthwith by the attitude active, so that you the speed without quitting of editor try out able. The Standardwert is 3. 3.12.2. Mouse acceleration The function "Mausbeschleunigung" is uses, around the Mauspfeil quick over great screen areas postpone to able, the arrow but simultaneous by less distances exact ctrl to able. Ever faster the Mauspfeil deferred is, the superior is its speed. In the default setting is this option not activates. 3.12.3. Blueprint Doppelklick with the Schieberegler "blueprint Doppelklick" lay you fast, how quick the Doppelklicken the Auswahltaste happen must. You able values in the area from 1 till 200 enter. In field "Doppelklick demonstrate" is the period, the the ausgewählten worth complies, demonstrated, in that for the specified period an shade displayed is. The Standardwert is 75 (i.e. An blueprint from approx. 1 second). 3.12.4. Delay by Tastenwiederholung The most buttons ferfügen over an automated Wiederholungsfunktion, the abert first to one selectable Verzögerungszeit inserts. With help of Schiebereglers "delay" able you the delay for the Tastenwiederholung adjust. Next to the Schieberegler is the actual worth displayed. The range of values lies between 0.02 and 1.50 seconds. The Standardwert is 0,6 seconds. 3.12.5. Speed for Tastenwiederholung with help of Schiebereglers "speed" lay you the speed fast, with the buttons to the anfänglichen delay widerholt become. The range of values between 0,24 and 0 seconds. The Standardwert is 0,05 seconds. 3.12.6. Keyboard test with help of field "Tastaturtest" able you the settings for the delay or. Speed the Tastenwiederholung as soon as the keyboard assignment try out. Choose you "Tastaturtest" from and hold you an the alphabetischen buttons the keyboard pressed. In field "Tastaturtest" is the the key obversely sign the ausgewählten keyboard assignment appropriate zngezeigt. With it recognize you direct the actual settings for the delay/speed the Tastenwiederholung. 3.12.7. Keyboard assignment in the list "keyboard assignment" able you the for you landesspezifisches system convenient keyboard assignment choose. With selection the direct keyboard assignment complies this the lettering the separate buttons. That enables you a expeditious intervention on the landesspezifischen special character for your language. When you no USA-keyboard use, able you Akzenttasten for letters with Akzentzeichen use. In chapter 10.1.6 "KeyShow" the Workbench-hint find you informations to Akzenttasten. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when you no Standardbelegung for USA-keyboards use, must you the obversely keyboard assignment/keyboard activate. They are you not sure, which keyboard assignment/keyboard to use is, turn you he on yours trader. When you an appointed keyboard assignment choose, is the corresponding file in the drawer "Devs/Keymaps" (hardware/Tastaturbelegungen) activates. To the sampling one occupancy click you this in the input- Preferences (Input) on. In the following table are the Tastaturbelegungen and whose mark in the Tastaturbelegungsliste listed: keyboard assignment mark in list gb Britisch cdn Canadian Francais dk Dansk D german usa2 Dvorak e Espanol and following page Francais ignoring Italiana waiting Norsk po Portguês ch2 Switzerland ch1 Suisse braised Svenskt if the for you erfoderliche keyboard assignment not in the list hold is, means this, that the keyboard assignment in the drawer "Devs/Keymaps" not existing is. Fit you to the Beheben this problem the enforderliche keyboard assignment. Lead you there to following operation steps from: 1. Undoing you first of all the drawer "Storage" and adjacent the drawer "Keymaps" (Tastaturbelegungen). 2. Draw you the requisite Icon in the drawer "Devs/Keymaps" (hardware/Tastaturbelegungen). Subsequent able you the desired keyboard assignment in the input- Preferences (Input) activate. To the recitations the keyboard assignment able you the progam "KeyShow", the he in the drawer "tools" is, use. 3.13. National-Preferences (Locale) over the national-Preferences (Locale) able you the language choose, in the the texts for menu, dialogs and error reports on the AMIGA displayed become. The default setting is "USA English". Your landesspezifischen settings work he on following functions from: text over the national-Preferences (Locale) able you the language for following elements choose: Bildschirmtitel, windowtitel, menu, Dialogwindow and messages. Pocket calculator the Tastenblock for the pocket calculator complies the (Calculator) ausgewählten land and the accompanying language. The Dezimalzeichen can e.g. An comma or an point is. Clock the format the angegebenen time complies the lokalen standard for you land and the picked language. Date the format of angegebenen date complies the lokalen standard for you land and the picked language. Date/time in the the format the time and of date in directory Verzeichnislisten correspond to the standard for you land and the picked language. Quantitative the format from quantitative complies the standard for you land and the picked language. The Tausendertrennzeichen can e.g. An point or an blanks is. 3.13.1. Employ of national-Preferencess the national-Preferences (Locale) enables you the selection yours national, the time zone and the prefers languages. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ with the installing the software on the hard drive, able you an language only for the Installationsvorgang choose. As soon as you the computer new commence, is however for the Workbench again english as Standardsprache adjusted. Choose you in the window "national-Preferences (Locale)" the language from, the you by the täglichen work use want. Choose you during the installing the Workbench-software all languages from, the later uses become shall. When you however from fault an language forget, able you the absent language later with the installer from the CD install. In Auswahlfeld "Verfügbare languages" are the languages listed, the to the time on you computer installed are. Through Anklicken the respective ones language in the Auswahlfeld able you the languages give, the you preferred use. Each language, the you anklicken, appear in the field "favoured languages". Choose you the languages in the order the Verwendungshäufigkeit from. It appears the in häufigsten appropriated language not on first place in the field "favoured languages", choose you "languages clean" from. Subsequent choose you renewed your prefers languages from. Is no preferred language specified, is english as Standardsprache uses. Uses, the on the landesspezifischen functions of Amiga seize, take the field "favoured languages" the to appropriating language. Stands on you computer the first called language not to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, is the next (in the computer available) language from this list uses. Is no the aufgeführten languages installed, is the Standardsprache uses, most english. In field "land" able you you land choose. Your selection has aftermath on the format from Zeitangeben, date and quantitative. Over the selection in the field "land" become following parameter fixed: . Landesname . Landestelefonvorwahl . Telefonnummernformat . Units of measure . Combined/unconnectedly time-/specified date (Langform) . Combined/unconnectedly time-/specified date (short form) . Zahlenformat . Währungsformat (credit) . Währungsformat (debit) . Currency symbol . International currency symbol . Also the in OS3.9 new introduced Internet-Provider-list is hereof affected. With the Internet-installing is you so always aptly to you land also an Internet-Provider list offered. Click you to the tuning the time zone the correspond to area on the Weltkarte on. In accompanying display panel is the difference to the GMT-time (Greenwich Mean tIME) specified. Those attitude is where appropriate. From unite uses uses. From the Workbench is she however not considered. Choose you to the save the landesspezifischen settings "save" from. Ought the adjustments the landesspezifischen settings only for the actual meeting uses become, choose you "Benutzen" from. The Workbench-menu, the Titelleiste and the Disk-window become forthwith in the ausgewählten language displayed. Eventually gestarteten program's. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- program's how "Clock" (clock) and "IconEdit", the already restarted become, remained first of all in the original language. With it an progam, the landesspezifisch adapted become can, in the prefers language displayed wurd, must this language at undoing of program activates is. 3.14. Guard zone-Preferences (Overscan) over the "guard zone-Preferences" (Overscan) able you yours onscreen increase. With more corresponding attitude is the guard zone outside of actual Monitorbildschirms for the onscreen uses. The is particularly for Videoanwendungen interesting, where one a visible andersfarbigen frame around the actual reading area avoid want. In the list the monitor-kinds are the Monitortreiber listed, the to the time activates are. Monitor file in the drawer "DEVS:monitor" (hardware/monitors) become at system start automatic activates. Each monitor-kind serves to the control sucked. "Tty groups" (i.e. One row from Bildschirmmodi). When you the Ranbereichswerte for an appointed monitor-kind alter, necessary this change for all modes with these monitor-kind. Ought the Randbereichswerte for an monitor-kind changes become, choose you the monitor-kind from the shortlist from. The picked group is highlighted. Chapter 7 of original Workbench-manual page contains wiles with the admissive Maximalwerten for the guard zones by the separate Bildschirmmodi. The differently dimensions the screens become on the right in the window displayed. The bulks become in Bildpunkten specified. With it stands the first worth for the breadth, the second worth for the height of screen. With PAL- or NTSC-groups become the bulks for standard-HiRes- screens (modes with high resolution) specified. With selection from "Multiscan" appear the bulks for a fecundity-onscreen without Zeilensprungdarstellung. With other Bildschirmmodi within one Monitorgruppe work he the settings proportional to the angegebenen Bildschirmmodi from. The following Bildschirmabmessungen become displayed: Minimalgröße Standardgröße without guard zone Textgröße Aktuelle Textgröße with guard zone Grafikgröße Aktuelle Grafikgröße with guard zone Maximalgröße Maximal admissive bigness with guard zone (by text or graphics) 3.15. Colour-Preferences (palette) with help of colour-Preferencess (palette) able you the colors for the Workbench alter. With Amiga-Computern with WATER-chip-setting become on the lefthand side of window "colour-Preferences (palette)" the four or eight actual Workbench-colors in the Auswahlfeld displayed. Over it out appear an Farbrad with Helligkeitsanzeige and Schieberegler as soon as three colour- Schieberegler. Ever to attitude in the menu "colour-Schieberegler" follow over this Schieberegler an RGB-attitude (RGB: red, green, blue) or an FSH-attitude (FSH: tint, saturation, brightness). The default is RGB. In right part of colour-Preferencess (palette) is an Blättersymbol for the Farbmodus disposed. This has the both modes "Mehrfarbenmodus" and "4-colour-mode". The latter serves the attitude from only four Workbench- colors. The mode is the use Editoren and uses appropriate to select. The window "colour-Preferences (palette)" contains following nine Menüsymbole, for the you the colors separate choose able: . Background . Text . More important text . Brightness edges . Dark edges . Titelbalken acting window . Titltexte acting window . Menu-background . Menu-text below these list with Workbench-element is an Farbauswahlfeld with four or. Eight colors agezeigt. This field complies the Farbauswahlfeld upside of Farbrades. Ever to Bildschirmmodus, breadth and height, the over the Bildschirrmodus- Preferences (ScreenMode) adjusted become, is in the bottom area of window "colour-Preferences (palette)" an Beispielwindow displayed. In these window become the Farbänderungen immediate zngezeigt. Is the Beispielwindow not displayed, appear instead of of it the symbol "example show...". Click you this symbol on, around the Beispielwindow with the new ausgewählten colors to call. Through Anklicken able you in these Beispielwindow single elements choose, whose colors changes become shall. Click you the following on, around an colour or. An element for the change to select: . An Farbfeld in a the both Farbauswahlfelder . An element in the list with the Menüsymbolen . An element in the Beispielwindow with the following four components able you the colors or. Whose tint alter: . Farbschieberegler in the RGB-mode . Farbschieberegler in the FSH-mode . Farbrad . Schieberegler next to the Farbrad The change the settings for white and black can aftermath on the stereoscopic formation the Bildschirmsymbole have. The colors, through the black compensates is, must always darker is as the Ersatzfarben for white. Walk you to the re design one colour with help of Farbrades how follows before: 1. Click you with the Auswahltaste an colour in the Farbauswahlfeld upside of Farbrades or. Below the list with the Workbench- element on. 2. Show you on the Helligkeitsanzeige in the Farbrad (the highlighed point within of Farbrades). Holding you the Auswahltaste pressed. 3. When you the Mauspfeil move is the advertisement in the Farbrad mitbewegt, and the colors in the Auswahlfeld and in the Beispielwindow alter he appropriate. Letting you the Auswahltaste again loose, when the desired colour adjusted is. Walk you to the re design the brightness with the Schiberegler next to the Farbrad how follows before: 1. Click you with the Auswahltaste an colour in the Farbauswahlfeld upside of Farbrades or. Below the list with the Workbench- element on. 2. Goats you on the highlighed beam in the Schieberegler and hold you the Auswahltaste pressed. 3. When you the Mauspfeil to above or. Back consider is the colour brighter or. Darker. Walk you to the re design one colour in the RGB-mode how follows before: 1. Click you with the Auswahltaste an colour in the Farbauswahlfeld upside of Farbrades or. Below the list with the Workbench- element on. 2. Employ you to the re design these colour the Schieberegler. The colors in the Auswahlfeld un in the Beispielwindow alter he at draw of Schiebereglers. Walk you to the re design one colour in the FSH-mode how follows before: 1. Click you with the Auswahltaste an colour in the Farbauswahlfeld upside of Farbrades or. Below the list with the Workbench- element on. 2. Employ you to the re design these colour the Schieberegler. The colors in the Auswahlfeld un in the Beispielwindow alter he at draw of Schiebereglers. With the tint-Schieberegler is the tint, with the saturation- Schieberegler the intensity the colour and with the brightness- Schieberegler the brightness the colour adjusted. Next to the standard-Preferences-menu disposes the colour-Preferences (palette) in the menu "defaults" over the menu item "defaults", übner the more default Farbeinstellungen called up become able. Over it out able you over the menu item "settings" give, which kind "colour- Schieberegler" for the Farbänderung uses is. With Monochrom-monitors or when you in the Bildschirmmodus-Preferences (ScreenMode) as Farbanzahlt "2" choose, become in the colour-Preferences (palette) only RGB-Farbschieberegler displayed. 3.16. Mouse pointer-Preferences (Pointer) over the Mauspfeil-Preferences (Pointer) able you the colour, the bigness and the form of Mauspfeils and of Wartzeigers alter. On the lefthand side this Preferencess is he an Bearbeitungsfeld with the actual Mauspfeil. Left-hand next to these field see you less copies of Mauspfeils before the different use Workbench-colors. With the Blättersymbol "normal/wait" over the Bearbeitungsfeld able you to the editing the Mauspfeil or the Wartezeiger choose. The Mauspfeil disposes over three changeable colors on a not änderbaren background. Fields, in those the background color uses is, are diaphanous. Walk you to the re design the colour of existing Mauspfeil how follows before: 1. Choose you an colour in the Farbauswahlfeld from. 2. Re design you dit red- green- and Blauanteile through draw the accompanying Schieberegler. When you a complete new Mauspfeil create will, able you him pixel for pixel chart: 1. Choose you first of all the background color and adjacent "discharge" from, around the content of Bearbeitungsfelds to clean. 2. Choose you the desired colour from. 3. Show you in the Bearbeitungsfeld on an place, on the an pixel appear shall, and press you the Auswahltaste. Holding you the Auswahltaste pressed, around in the ausgewählten colour to chart. Widerholen you the operation steps 1 till 3, till the Mauspfeil complete designed is. 1. Choose you "point set" from and click you adjacent a the pixel within of arrow on, around the goal of Mauspfeils quote. 2. Click you to the Verwenden of Mauspfeils for the actual meeting "Benutzen" on. Debit these Mauspfeil also in späteren sessions uses become, click you "save" on. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ with selection from "test" able you the look of geänderten Mauspfeils and of it really bigness examine, without the Mauspfeil-Preferences (Pointer) to leave. When you "breaking off" choose, become all adjustments rescinded made and the window is closed. With selection from "discharge" is the content of Bearbeitungsfeldes with exception the background color excluded, around a new Mauspfeil chart to able. With the Blättersymbol on the right above able you between the settings "HiRes" and "LowRes" choose (only on Amigas with WATER-chip-setting). Through "HiRes" stand double so many pixel to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, so that you your drawing with major exactness create able. With help from "point set" choose you the point from, the later by the use the mouse on the wished elements steady become must. In Bearbeitungsfeld is these point in one other colour framed. Choose you "point set" from and click you the pixel on, the as goal uses become shall. With selection from "old colors" become the colors recovered, the at call of Preferences-editor displayed become. The menu "project" and "defaults" hold the menu items "undoing", "save as", "quitting", "Ausscheiden", "copying", "Einfügen", "discharge", "Rückgängig", "image load", "Auf defaults disfavour", "Auf at last savings" and "back on default". 3.17. Printer-Preferences (Printer) with help of printer-Preferencess (Printer) able you the from you appropriated Druckermodell give and settings for the printout carry out. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- older people AmigaOS-versions decreed over three unconnectedly Preferences for the printer: Printer, PrinterGfx and PrinterPS. The both erstgenannten are ever since AmigaOS 3.5 in the printer-Preferences (Printer) collected together. In window "printer-Preferences (Printer)" able you a printer driver, the printer connection and different text- and Grafikoptionen give. The vorgenommenen settings (this necessary also for the PostScript-Preferences PrinterPS) become as default values uses, when elsewhere no settings follow are. Uses how word processing program stand in the rule obversely own options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, the the data in Preferences atleast to the part out of power set. With "printer-Geräteinheit" is the oneness picked for the you the config fix. You able till to 10 chunks configure. The first oneness is from all program automatic used. In future become the program's extended around also another chunks choose to able. Next to it able you the oneness a names give. This name is from the program in future by the selection the oneness with displayed and relieved you the choice of correct print page. Example: Benennen you an config for a Netzdrukker "Netzdrucker", for a printer driver, the with help yours modems fax sends and feels "fax" etc. 3.17.1. Printer type Auf these side happen the generellen settings to the accessing of Drukkers. Under "printer type" is an list the verfügbaren printer driver displayed, the to the time in "DEVS:Printers" (hardware/printer) installed are. Show you to the sampling of printer driver on the accompanying names and click you him with the Auswahltaste on. The picked driver is highlighted. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when you a PostScript-printer driver choose, must you the text- and Grafikeinstellungen in the PostScript-Preferences (PrinterPS) carry out. Those settings assign the data of printer-Preferencess (Printer). All the same must you on these place a printer connection choose. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ be he neither in the drawer "DEVS:Printers" (hardware/printer) still in the drawer "Storage/Printers" (hoard/printer) an printer driver for yours printer (or a printer, the you printer emulieren can), choose you "Generic", the Standardtreiber, from. 3.17.1.1. Printer connection gives the kind of connection on, with the you printer bound is: serial or Parallel. With selection from "serial" must you examine, if the Übertragungseinstellungen in the serial-Preferences (Serial) you printer correspond to. 3.17.1.2. Strangers device driver (Use Custom Device) credit you the printer not on the internal parallel or serial interface connected, but on an interface one expansion card or over a Netzwerktreiber, so choose you this option on. You must then also a Treibernamen for the giving out and an oneness give. 3.17.1.3. Device driver (Port Device) Wählen you here the driver for the interface from. The Dateiauswahl shows you the directory "DEVS:", in that the most driver lie. Many a one expansion card have no Treiberdatei in "DEVS:" installed. Then must you the names in the documentation of driver look up. 3.17.1.4. Oneness (Port Unit) The oneness, the for the driver used become shall. The most expansion card bid more as only an additional interface on and use different chunks around the different interfaces to respond. 3.17.2. Page size & edges (footboy Size & Margins) Auf these side happen the settings, the influence on the Papiergröße, Papierränder and resolution have. 3.17.2.1. Paper type gives the kind of use paper on. The following options stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: "continuous" (over tractor pulled in paper) and "Einzelblatt" (eng. single sheet). 3.17.2.2. Paper size gives the bigness of use paper on. With selection from "Individuell" able difficulties at printing with matrix printer avoid become. When you "Individuell" choose, must you behind "Papierlänge (lines)" an Zeilenanzahl give, the the use paper size complies. 3.17.2.3. Character density gives the number the print character per custom (cpi = characters by inch) in level direction on. Ever superior the worth, the closer is listed. The following options are available: pica (10 cpi), elite (12 cpi) and Eng (15-17 cpi). 3.17.2.4. Line density gives the number the line of text per custom (lpi = lines by inch) in upright direction on. Choose you 36 lines/Zoll2 (lpi) or 38 lines/ Zoll2 (lpi) from. Ever superior the worth, the less is the distance between the separate lines. 3.17.2.5. Paper length (lines) gives the total number the on one side printables lines including upper and lower edge on. Example: 12-custom-paper (normal continuous paper) with 6 lines per custom yields 72 lines per side (US-format: 11 custom and 66 lines). Choose you to the re design of Standardwertz the field "Papierlänge (lines)" from. Discharge you the default worth and give you a new worth an. Squeeze you adjacent the enter key. 3.17.2.6. Left edge (lines) gives the breadth of lefthand edge on, i.e. The number the blanks from the lefthand edge of paper till to the place, on the the printer to print start shall. The Druckdichte (number the sign per custom in level direction) works he on the breadth of edge from. Was for instance as Druckdichte Pic (10 cpi) specified, yields he by one attitude of lefthand edge on 10 an 1 custom broader edge. Choose you to the re design of Standardwertz the corresponding field from. Discharge you the default worth and give you a new worth an. Squeeze you adjacent the enter key. 3.17.2.7. Right edge (lines) gives the breadth of right edge on, i.e. The number the sign from the lefthand edge of paper till to the place, on the the printer not more print shall. Choose you to the re design of Standardwerts the corresponding field from. Discharge you the default worth and give you a new worth an. Squeeze you adjacent the enter key. 3.17.2.8. Density over this option lay you the Druckdichte for graphics fast. Ever inferior to the worth, the faster is the image on printer listed, by those several Druckdichten available are. With selection one higher density leads the rise the Druckpunktanzahl to a schärferen image. Thereby is however the printing speed abates. Under the Druckdichte is the resolution displayed, the the printer for the picked Druckdichte used. Below the resolution can - ever to printer driver - also still an info over special attributes the ausgewählten Druckdichte happen. Many a one printer driver of use different Druckerdichten - by same resolution - around different settings, to carry out: Tintenmenge, compression the data etc. New printer driver give you an Kurzinformation over that. Right next to these options become you the ausgewählten settings on a example clarified: The know surface complies in yours relationship between breadth and height the ausgewählten paper size. The normally blue dargestellten Textränder are hanging from the ausgewählten character density, Zeilendichte, Papierlänge, right and lefthand edge. The normally black dargestellten Graphikränder are hanging from paper size, the density un the printer driver. Under the paper is the Papiergröße specified. The both values under are only for newly printer driver filling. You give the upper and lefthand edge on the paper on, the the printer from physical grounds not fall below can. With the most printer is these edge from 1 till 6 mm. An progam can this edges use, around the giving out exact on the paper to position. Lastly is the bedruckbare area displayed. That is the surface of paper, the through the Graphikränder enfold is. 3.17.3. Settings (Settings) those side contains options, the he on Druckqualität and -look cover. Especially this options become from many program overwritten. 3.17.3.1. Stress quality places the Druckqualität for the expression fast. With selection from "design" (eng. draft) is the Druckqualität in support of the printing speed reduced. With selection from "letter" (eng. (near) letter) yields he an slower printing speed but an high Druckqualität. 3.17.3.2. Shade with "shade" become pattern from verschiedenfarbigen points (or from Punktmustern differently blackening) listed, the how an Mischfarbe or Graustufe appear. Thereby yield he in the image smoother transition and the image appears more colors/Grauabstufungen to possession. For the Schattieren stand following options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: Geordnet that is the Standardverfahren to the Schattieren. The defferent Farbintensität yields he through an arranged Punktmuster. The points able verschiedenfarbig is, have but the same Druckdichte. You become in straight lines and chinks listed. Semitone The defferent Farbintensität is through the Variieren the spot size un -dense attains. Floyd-Steinberg with these process yields he the defferent Farbintensität through a komplexen (thereby zeitintensiven) algorithm. Through this process yields he an gleichmäßigere shade, then the Farbintensität of respective ones pixel on the working point, the these pixel form, as soon as on the adjoining points distributed is. New Druckertreibe able this shades however through own methods replace. In particular is the Floyd-Steinberg-shade not for all modern printer suitable. In unterstehenden mapping are the result the differently Schattierungsverfahren personated. The images become with a printer with one Aflösung from 300 dpi (dots by inch - points per custom) listed. Scaling under "scaling" understands one the maßstabsgetreue Größenänderung of picture. The final bigness of expression is over the attitude "limit" fixed. Following options stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: fraction The bigness of picture complies rough the under "limit" (braised.U's.) fest determine bigness. With it can it to distortions come. The pixel become the requirement appropriate belittles or enlarges. It commends he, this option to the printing from picture with many shades, but not for texts to use. Integer The number the Punke in the expression complies a ganzzahligen multiples the pixel on the onscreen. Has the on the onscreen displayed image an bigness from 320 x 200 Bildpunkten, can the typography an bigness from 320 x 200, 640 x 400, 960 x 600 points etc. Have. Those option should you use, when the to printing image thin vertical and horizontal lines (e.g. An grid or writing) contains. 3.17.3.3. Image those option deposits fast, if an image as "positive" or as "negative" listed is. You makes in the general only by black-white and Grauskala print sense. With selection from "positive" is the image so listed, how it on the onscreen personated is. When you "negative" choose, become the Bildschirmfarben in the expression inverse personated. Those option is with the negatives of photographs commensurable. 3.17.3.4. Image position over this option is the Druckrichtung for the image fixed. When "Horizontal" adjusted is, is the image so listed, how it on the onscreen displayed is. With selection from "Vertikal" is the image at printing around 90° revolved. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- consider you, that not every progam this attitude bolstered. 3.17.3.5. Coloration over the accompanying options able you the to druckenden colors choose. Those options become however not from all printer bolstered. The following options stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: black/white colors become either as black or as white listed. It follow no shade. Grauskala 1 colors become in different Graustufen represented. Grauskala 2 with deser option become maximally 4 Graustufen bolstered. Employ you this attitude to the printing from picture, the on a A2024-monitor created become. Colour colour become the screen display appropriate listed. Those option can only for color printer uses become. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- consider you, that new printer driver the coloration through own methods replace able, e.g. Could an driver for a printer without Farboption the coloration "colour" through a costlier Grauskala-stress replace. 3.17.3.6. Level over these worth become the on the onscreen angezeigten colors fixed, the in the expression as black or white appear. Those option works he so only by black/white-coloration from. Ever superior the level, the more colors become as black listed. With stress in Grauskala or colour use some printer driver these level in other wise man, mostly as level one Gammakorrektur. Especially in these fall is the level enormous weighty for the quality of expression. 3.17.3.7. Left corner/Linker edge over this option lay you the worth fast, around the the typography to on the right deferred is. That complies the attitude of lefthand edge. Is "image centers" activates, is the worth for "left corner" ignored. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when as Maßenheit "custom/10" displayed is, so is your national- attitude (Locale) not right. Choose you the "Locale"-Preferences in the "Prefs"-drawer and stand you the land e.g. On "Germany" an, then appear the details in mm (millimeter). 3.17.3.8. Image centers over this option is the typography in level direction centered. Is "image centers" activates, is the worth for "left corner" ignored. 3.17.3.9. Weichzeichnen those option serves to the polish diagonal lines, the normally dental or treppenförmig appear. Those option characterizes he in particular for program's, the Grafikausdrucke from text create. Is "Weichzeichnen" activates, can this to one retardation of print procedure lead. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- Floyd-Steinberg-shade and "Weichzeichnen" able not together uses become. 3.17.3.10. Colour correction those option leads to one disabuse ballot between the colors on the onscreen and the colors in the expression. You able this function for the colors red, green and blue as soon as combinations these colors use. Through Farbkorrektur is the number the printed colors abates. Is this option not activates, able color printer all on a Amiga- onscreen verfügbaren colors print. Is an colour corrected, go more Farbstufen these colour lost. 3.17.3.11. Limitations over this Blättersymbol lay you fast, how the boundary values for "breadth" and "height" in dependency from the attitude for "kind" interpreted become shall. The following options stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: Ignorieren The boundary values for breadth and height become ignored. The bigness of typography complies the from user program angeforderten bigness. With it can the breadth but following boundary value not overshoot: (right edge - left edge) + 1 / sign per custom or mm. The height is in the rule through the length of paper confined. A maximum of. Values The bigness of typography is through the boundary values for breadth and height fixed. Example: debit the typography an bigness from 100 x 130 mm have, give you for breadth and height the values 100 and 130 an. Absolute The boundary values for breadth and height become as absolute values interpreted. Example: debit the typography exact 100 x 130 mm great is, give you for breadth and height the values 100 and 130 an. Subsequent choose you "absolute" from. With these selection is the image these data appropriate scaled. That can to distortions lead. With use these option must you for "scaling" the option "fraction numbers" choose. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when as unit of measure "custom/10" displayed is, so is your national- attitude (Locale) not right. Choose you the "Locale"-Preferences in the "Prefs"-drawer and stand you the land e.g. On "Germany" an, then appear the details in mm (millimeter). With selection from "absolute" able you however also an typography with a normal Seitenverhältnis get, the an appointed breadth or height has. Places you there to the breadth or height on the wished worth an and give you for the each other boundary value naught an. Example when you the breadth on 100 mm adjust and the height on 0, is the height so accounts, that the correct Seintenverhältnis represented is. Formation both boundary values on naught adjusted, is the image with the maximum breadth and the for the correct Seitenverhältnis requisite height listed. Pixel The values for breadth and height become as Bildpunktanzahlen interpreted. Is one the both boundary values on naught steady, worth the same precepts how for the option "absolute". The expression has the specified breadth or. Height and the the correct Seitenverhältnis obversely height or. Breadth. Factors The breadth and height of Originalbilds is with the border evaluate for breadth or. Height multiplied. Example: Ist 2 as breadth and 4 as height specified, is the typography double so wide how the Originalbild (in Bildpunkten) and four times so high. Breadth/height over this field able you the measure of typography fix. The worth is ever to attitude in tenth custom or millimeter specified, so far not "pixel" or "factors" as "kind" picked become. Choose you to the input of worth the Texteingabefeld from. Discharge you the default worth and give you the correct worth an. Squeeze you adjacent the enter key. 3.17.3.12. Stress example in the right upper corner is he an example, how an small image (left) through the expression on the paper (on the right) appear. This example considered the settings for scaling, image, Bildlage, coloration, level (in as much he he on black-white-stress correlates), left edge, centering and limit. However can this example only a unsubtle impression over the really result the impression-setting wheel give. 3.17.4. Tips to acceleration of Druckvorganga for graphics --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ . Give you a low worth for "density" on. . Choose you for "Bildlage" the option "Horizontal" instead from "Vertikal" from. . When you dichroic images print, stand you "coloration" on "black/white" an. The expression follow faster as an Grauskala- or Farbausdruck. . Employ you the option "Weichzeichnen" only for the endgültigen expression, then he thereby the Druckzeit double can. . Employ you the Schattierungseinstellungen "Geordnet" or "semitone". With use from "Floyd-Steinberg" doubled he the Druckzeit likewise. 3.18. Graphic printer-Preferences (PrinterGfx) the Graphikdrucker-Preferences (PrinterGfx) exist only still to the compatibility with elders AmigaOS-versions. To the attitude of print page use you please the printer-Preferences (Printer). Shall an progam the Graphikdrucker-Preferences commence, so refer he on the printer-Preferences and opens these with one for the Graphikausdruck important Karteiseite. 3.19. PostScript-printer-Preferences (PrinterPS) with help of PostScript-printer-Preferencess (PrinterPS) able you data to the control the functions for PostScript-printer make. You able these Preferences only use, when an PostScript-printer on you Amiga connected is and "PostScript" in the window "printer- Preferences (Printer)" picked became. In menu "settings" of PostScript-printer-Preferencess (PrinterPS) stands additional the menu item "Maßsystem" to the zur ~ - at one's disposal. In accompanying submenu able you "centimetre", "custom" or "point" choose. The picked oneness is for the advertisement the settings for breadth, height and edges uses. The default setting is "custom". The window "PostScript-printer-Preferences" contains following field and symbols: 3.19.1. Driver mode with the Blättersymbol "Treibermodus" able you between "PostScript" and "reproducible copy" choose. With the PostScript-mode converted the driver all Textausgabedaten in PostScript-format and sends she adjacent on the printer, the in the printer-Preferences (Printer) picked became. With selection from "reproducible copy" become the data under bypass of PostScript- printer driver direct on the connection sent. Over the option "reproducible copy" is it program, the data self already in the PostScript- format issue, enables, the PostScript-data direct on the printer to broadcast. 3.19.2. Copies KUber this option able you the number the copies give, the from every one side listed become shall. You able a worth between 1 and 99 give. 3.19.3. Paper size with these option able you the bigness of use paper give: r.p.m..Page. Letter, r.p.m..Page. Kosher, DIN 44 and Individuell. As soon as you this Blättersymbol anklikken, become the values in the feathers "paper width" and "Papierlänge" the angegebenen format appropriate changes. 3.19.4. Paper width and Papierlänge in the field "paper width" and "Papierlänge" able you the exact measure for individuals Seitengrößen enter. Those both field become in Geisterschrift (few clear) displayed, when in the field "paper size" not "Individuell" picked is. 3.19.5. Horizontal DPI and Vertikal DPI in the field "Horizontal DPI" and "Vertikal DPI" able you the number the points per custom (dpi = dots by inch) for the expression give. The driver uses this resolution for all shade- and Verarbeitungsverfahren. When you not the for yours PostScript-printer vorgesehenen DPI-settings use, can this to distortions in the expression lead. Over the attitude-Blättersymbol on the right above able you options in four Einstellungsgruppen choose: text-options, text-settings, graphic-options and graphic-scaling. Ever to selection become appointed options displayed. 3.19.6. Text-settings font (Font) Wählen you the for the expression wished font from. With it acts it he around in the Drukker integrated fonts, the for the printing from write uses become. Character density Wählen you "normal", "Engschrift" or "wide font" from. Orientation Wählen you "Aufrecht" or "cross" from. To the pressing from envelopes use you the option "cross". Tab on these place give you an, around how much sign or. Custom the printed text through an Tabulatormarkierung deferred is. You have following choices: 4 sign, 8 sign, ¼ custom, ½ custom and 1 custom. With Proportionalzeichensätzen use you Zollangaben. 3.19.7. Edges-settings field to the give you the four edges for the auszudrukkenden text Randeinstellung an. The angegebenen edges stand for the distance to respective ones paper edge, where the breadth and length of paper ahead specified become must. Font-spot size give you the size of type of font (in point) on, the for the on the printer gesendeten data uses become shall. Line space give you the distance between the separate line of text on. That is the distance in point between the bottom edge one row and the upper edge the following row. Lines ever custom in these field is the rough number the lines per custom (lpi = lines by inch) displayed. This worth is from the for Font-spot size and line space angegebenen evaluate accounts. Lines ever side in these field is the rough number the printables lines per printed page displayed. This worth is from the evaluate for Font-spot size, line space, Papierlänge as soon as upper and lower edge accounts. 3.19.8. Graphic-settings Linker edge/ over this values is the print area to the print right edge/ from graphics fixed (confer. Randeinstellung for breadth/height Textausdruck). Image positive/negative. Coloration Wählen you an the verfügbaren options (black/white, Grauskala or colour) from. Shade Wählen you "default", "Gepunktet", "Vertikal" or "Horizontal" from, when you "Grauskala" as coloration activates have. "Default" complies one standardmäßigen Halbtonschattierung. The option "Gepunktet" is with the Halbtonschattierung commensurable. The points are however fundamental greater, whereby he special effects yield. With selection from "Grauskala" yield he the Graustufen through vertical or. Horizontal lines differently fatness, the in small distance disposed are. 3.19.9. Graphic-scaling in these Einstellungsgruppe able you the bigness, the Bildlage and the scale factor for the typography give. The aftermath the differently options are in the four Beispielskalierungen back on the right in the window forthwith to see. The shades expanses stand print area differently bigness and form there. With change the settings for the differently options alter he the Druckergebnisse for same Originalbild. Image position Wählen you to the printing from graphics "normal" or "cross" from. The where appropriate. Necessary rotation is before all other process at printing one graphic including scaling carried out. Skalierungsart Wählen you an the seven Skalierungsarten from. Over the Skalierungsarten is the representation of picture in the print area controlled, which over the. Field to the edge- and Größeneinstellung fixed became. With the selection one proportionalen Skalierungsart remained the Seitenverhältnisse get. With the Skalierungsarten to the adaption on the print area is this not the fall. The following Skalierungsarten stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: 1. No one. The image is without scaling listed. If the image not in the angegebenen print area goes, is it where appropriate. On the right and/or back cropped. 2. Proport.: Breadth. The breadth of picture is on the breadth of print area adapted and the height the Seitenverhältnis appropriate scaled. Is the image adjacent to high for the print area, is it on the right cropped. 3. Proport.: Height. The height of picture is on the height of print area adapted and the breadth the Seitenverhältnis appropriate scaled. Is the image adjacent to wide for the print area, is it on the right cropped. 4. Proport.: Both. The image wirt under retention of Seitenverhältnisses on the maximum bigness within of print area scaled. 5. Adaption breadth. The breadth of picture is on the breadth of print area adapted. Subsequent is the height scaled, till she the Seitenverhältnis complies or the height of print area attains is. In opposition to Skalierungsart 2 goes the image always in the print area and is never back cropped. 6. Adaption height. The height of picture is on the height of print area adapted. Subsequent we the breadth scaled, till she the Seitenverhältnis complies or the breadth of print area attains is. In opposition to Skalierungsart 3 goes the image always in the print area and is never on the right cropped. 7. Adaption both. The Bildhöhe and -wide become on the dimensions of print area scaled. With it is the Seitenverhältnis not considered. 8. Centering. Choose you "no one", "Horizontal", "Vertikal" or "both directions" from. The centering is the last procedure before the eingentlichen printout and follow to the scaling. 3.20. Screenmode-Preferences (ScreenMode) with help of Bildschirmmodus-Preferencess able you the Bildschirmmodus for yours Workbench-onscreen choose. Then the separate modes defferent attributes have and defferent hardware necessitate, read you the carrying out in these chapter and in chapter 7 of original Workbench-manual page. Subsequent choose you a Bildschirmmodus from, the in you system available is and yours requirement equitable is. On the lefthand side are the verfügbaren Bildschirmmodi listed. On the right side become the attributes of each augewählten mode displayed. 3.20.1. Announce mode Wählen you a the verfügbaren modes from the list "Anzeigemodus" from. With help the Rollsymbole able you through the list browse. In these list become all to the time activated Monitortreiber displayed. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ ought Anzeigemodi constant available is, stand you the accompanying Monitordateien in the drawer "Devs/monitor" (hardware/monitors). Click you to the sampling of Anzeigemodus the accordingly mode on. The picked mode is highlighted. Choose you "save" from, around the ausgewählten mode to use and as Standardmodus for later sessions to computer store. Choose you "Benutzen" from, when the mode only during the actual meeting uses become shall. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ will you different Anzeigemodi try out, choose you to the quitting of editor "Benutzen" and not "save" from. As soon as you the to verwendenden Anzeigemodus found have, computer store you him. With these strategy able you the original mode problem-free reconstitute, when you inadvertent a mode choose, the not to you monitor compatible is. With selection from "breaking off" is the Preferences without save the adjustments leave. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- Ist by the selection from "save" or "Benutzen" an use- or an Shell-window on the Workbench-onscreen open, become you requested, all geöffneten window with exception from Schubladenwindown to close. Towards clasps all use- and Shell-window is the Workbench-onscreen automatic rewound and the new Bildschirmmodus appropriate displayed. The picked Anzeigemodus necessary only for the Workbench-onscreen. Some uses open own screens. Informations to the from these uses espoused Bildschirmmodi find you in the each mitgelieferten documentation. 3.20.2. Mode attributes in display panel "Moduseigenschaften" are the attributes of ausgewählten mode listed. The field contains data to the bigness of screen, to the maximum number from colors as soon as to wider attributes. The screen size at ausgewählten mode is in Bildpunkten specified. The first number stands for the Bildschirmbreite, the second number for of it height. Observable bigness bigness of visible field of screen, the through the Randbereichseinstellungen for text fixed is. Fractional bigness Kleinste screen size, the from ausgewählten mode bolstered is. Maximally bigness Größte screen size, the from ausgewählten mode bolstered is. A another restriction yields he where appropriate. Through the capacity of verfügbaren chip-RAM. Maximally Maximale number from colors, the at ausgewählten mode Farbanzahl on the onscreen displayed become able. The following Moduseigenschaften become where appropriate. Displayed: Interlace/Zeilsp. Screenmode with Zeilensprungdarstellung (Interlace). Required ECS only available, when you Amiga atleast over a advanced chip-setting (ECS) disposes; this Moduseigenschaft is also by intersystem with WATER-chip-setting available. Supplementary the Bildschirmmodus bolstered the use from Genlock video-Genlock-device. Extractable with these Bildschirmmodus can the Workbench- onscreen to back pulled become, around other open screens behind uncover to make. 3.20.3. Breadth/height over the input fields "breadth" and "height" able you the bigness of Workbench-screen yours requirement appropriate alter. Give you a worth an, the between the Extremwerten lies or these complies. Towards input of worth is these independent from each ausgewählten Bildschirmmodus uses. With input from evaluate, the over the peak value or. Under the Minimalwert lie, is automatic the peak value or. The Minimalwert uses. Over the field "default" next to the respective ones input field able you the default setting for breadth/height choose. Those complies the bigness of on the Normalbildschirm visible field. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- you able for "breadth" and "height" values give, the the visible area essential overshoot. On these particularly size Workbench- onscreen able you greater and more window open (the he not interleave) as at normal Workbench-onscreen. Those function is only through the available chip-RAM confined. 3.20.4. Colors over the Schieberegler "colors" able you the number the on the onscreen anzeigbaren colors adjust. Ever few colors specified become, the faster become screens updated and the few Speicherkapazität is needed. 3.20.5. Car-roles with selection from "car-roles" is the onscreen automatic rolled, as soon as the Mauspfeil the edge of visible Bildschirmbereichs attains. The use these option commends he, when you for the onscreen an "breadth" or "height" defined have, by the only an part of screen in the reading area appear. 3.21. Serial-Preferences (Serial) over the serial-Preferences (serial) able you settings to the seriellen communicating in you system carry out. The seriellen data, the over modems and networks sent and receive become, must to the device compatible is with the you comunicate. The informations to the requisite settings find you in the documentation, the together with you seriellen device delivered became. 3.21.1. Baud-instalment The baud-instalment deposits fast, how many bits per second (bps = bits by second) over the serial interface transfer become able. With the seriellen communicating become the bits individual one after the other sent or. Receive. Then an sign in the rule from 10 bits (1 Starbit, 8 data bits and 1 Stoppbit) consists, able you the rough number the per second übertragenen sign (cps = characters by second) compute, in that you the baud-instalment through 10 divide. The picked baud-instalment must with the baud-instalment of device agree, with the you comunicate. Ever superior the worth, the faster become the data transfer. You able an the following baud-rates choose: 110, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 31250 baud. The actual attitude is next to the Schieberegler displayed. The Standardwert is 9600. 3.21.2. Input buffer size the input buffer is an storage area, the for the buffering incoming serieller data reserved is. You able an the following bulks choose: 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384, 32768 or 65536 byte. The actual bigness is left next to the Schieberegler displayed. Ever superior the adjusted baud-instalment and number the from Amiga carried out actions, the greater ought the input buffer is. The default setting is 512. 3.21.3. Journal over an journal is the data flow between the seriellen Schnitstelle and the connected device controlled. With it data transfer become able, must in the computer and in the angeschlossenen device same journal activates is. You able an the following options choose: XON/XOFF with it acts it he around the in häufigsten appropriated journal. In the between the device übertragenen data become the special character XON and XOFF inserted, over the the data flow controlled is. RTS/CTS the data flow is over separate control lines adjusted: RTS (Request up Send = Sendeaufforderung) and CTS (Clear up Send = Sendebereit). To this need you an duly engaged serial cable. No the journal is deactivated, i.e. The data flow follow without austerities and control. Walk you by the use these option very careful before. 3.21.4. Parity by means of the parity become transmission parity error discovered, in that the attitude the parities-bits supervised is. The Paritätsbit is additional transfer and so steady, that the number more set bits for an sign always on an straight (or. Odd) number complemented is. You able between following Paritätseinstellungen choose: no one all bits become for data uses. Is mostly uses, when "bits/sign" on 8 adjusted is. It follow no Paritätsüberprüfung. Straight The Gesamtanzahl the "1"-bits in every sign incl. Parity bit must always an straight number is. Odd The Gesamtanzahl the "1"-bits in every sign incl. Parity bit must always an odd number is. Bitwert 1 the Paritätsbit is always "1". Bitwert 0 the Paritätsbit is always "0". 3.21.5. Bits/Char under "bits/Char" give you the number the bits on, the over the serial interface transfer become, around an sign to broadcast. Simultaneous gives these worth the number the bits on, the for every received sign expected become. This worth must the attitude for the parity correspond to. Is parity on "straight", "Ungerade", "Bitwert 1" or "Bitwert 2" adjusted, stand you Bitz/sign rather on 7 an, then some system the eighth Bit to the Paritätsüberprüfung use. Is back parity "no one" adjusted, able you "bits/Char" on 8 adjust. When you however the full 8-Bit- font use and transfer will, must you also 8 choose. 3.21.6. Stop bits Stoppbits are additional bits, the in end of sign added become. Through this bits can the calculator the distance between words recognize and when the transfer of sign cancels is. That necessary for all over the serial interface gesendeten and received data. With computer with inferior to Verarbeitungsgeschwindigkeit are in the rule two Stoppbits needed. With computer, whose Datenübertragungsgeschwindigkeit by 300 baud or superior lies, is in the rule 1 Stoppbit insufficient. When eight data bits uses become, able you only an Stoppbit give, then otherwise by the data transfer data lost go. 3.21.7. Default-oneness when you system with several seriellen interfaces endowed is, able you an Standardeinhalt or. Default-oneness give, in that you in the Befehlszeit to the invocation "Serial" the option UNIT add or the attribute UNIT for the Programmpiktogramm give. Thereby is in the window "serial-Preferences (Serial)" the field "default-oneness" displayed. In this field give you the Einheitennummer the to verwendenden interface an, when no specific interface over an other method specified is. With it stand "0" and "1" for the serial interface the motherboard. In the rule contains the documentation to seriellen accessories the for the interfaces to verwendenden Einheitennummern. The in the serial-Preferences (Serial) vorgenommenen settings work he on all interfaces from. 3.22. Sound-Preferences with help of Sound-Preferencess able you the kind and the attributes of from Amiga outputted Warntons fix. To the hint on an Eingabeaufforderung of user program or of Verarbeitungsfehlers can the advertisement of Amiga flash and/or an tone issue. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- with it the Amiga or. The monitor tone issue can, must he with loudspeaker endowed is. The informations to the connection from loudspeaker find you in the Hardwaredokumentation or get you by you Amiga-trader. You able "tone issue", "advertisement flash" or an combination from both functions choose. It commends he not, both functions simultaneous to deactivate, then then no visual and acoustic signals more displayed become and Eingabeaufforderungen light leave out become. When you only "advertisement flash" choose, glares the advertisement, as soon as an Eingabeaufforderung or an error displayed is. With selection from "tone issue" stand following settings to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: kind of clay Wählen you "chirp" or "Digitalisierter Sound" from. "Chirp" stands for a simple tone. With selection from "Digitalisierter Sound" able you an file with a digitized Sound give. You able with help of Digitizers self an Sound-file create. In addition able you an digitized Sound-file load, whose data type in the system defined is. In addition are in the specialized trade ditialisierte Sound- files for the Amiga obtainable. Audibleness here stand you the Lautstärkewert an. Ever wider you the governor to on the right move, the clear is the rendition. Pitch here stand you the pitch an. Ever wider you the governor to on the right move, the superior is the tone. With the chirp steers these worth the really pitch (high or low frequency). With digitalisiertem Sound is over these worth the Abspielgeschwindigkeit (number the Abtastwerte per second) controlled, the he as well as on the pitch as also the Tondauer take. Piepslänge places you a worth between 6,4 ms and 0,6 braised an. Sound choose Wählen you "Sound choose" and adjacent a file names in the Dateiauswahlfeld from. With it able only digitized Sound-files specified become, for the the obversely data type in the system defined is (e.g. 8SVX). When you this settings computer store, must the file with the ausgewählten Sound by every boot/restart of computer on the hard drive to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stand. Towards selection from "chirp" or details of digitized Sounds able you the tone examine, around to guarantee, that he the from you wished attributes has. Choose you there to "tone test" (the loudspeaker-symbol on the right back) from. While this test are the field "save", "Benutzen" and "breaking off" inactivated. 3.23. Time-Preferences (tIME) with help of time-Preferencess (tIME) able you the date and the time om Ojrem system adjust. Walk you to the tuning of date how follows before: 1. Click you the Blättersymbol above on the right so often on, till the correct Monatsname displayed is. 2. Choose you the input field for the Jahresangabe from. Discharge you the false date and give you the correct data an. 3. Choose you in the calendar the correct day from. The picked day is highlighted. Walk you to the tuning the time how follows before: 1. Click you on the Schieberegler for hours or. Minutes. 2. Draw you the governor to the increase of worth to on the right or. To the Reduzieren to left. When the correct worth displayed is, leave you the Maustaste loose. Lead you this operation steps for both Schieberegler from. 3.24. Workbench-pattern-Preferences (WBPattern) with help of Workbench-pattern-Preferencess (WBPattern) able you the Hintergrundanzeige for the onscreen and the Workbench and whose window alter. With help of Blättersymbols behind "Plazierung" can the following as background picked become: Workbench Workbench-window, independent of it, if "Workbench as background" picked is. Window Disk- or Schubladenwindow, but no Shell- or Programmwindow. Screen Workbench-onscreen, when "Workbench as background" not picked is. With help of Blättersymbols behind "type" able you the following choose: pattern allowed the attitude of new or the use of default model for "Workbench", "window" or "screen". Image allowed the selection of picture for "Workbench", "window" or "screen". 3.24.1. Selection of Hintergrundmusters you able for not through window filling fields of screen an available Hintergrundmuster choose or an own pattern create. With default setting is no Hintergrundmuster uses. Walk you to the sampling of default model how follows before: 1. Choose you in the Blättersymbol "Plazierung" an the possibilities "Workbench", "window" or "screen" from. 2. Choose you "pattern" in the Blättersymbol "type" from. 3. Choose you of the 8 defaults-pattern from, the he direct under the Musteranzeige find. This pattern appear then in the darüberliegenden display panel. 4. You able additional choose. The pattern is then without quitting of Preferencess for the onscreen activates. Walk you to the Erstellen of own model how follows before: 1. Choose you in the Blättersymbol "Plazierung" an the possibilities "Workbench", "window" or "screen" from. 2. Choose you "pattern" in the Blättersymbol "type" from. 3. It appears in the Bearbeitungsfeld an pattern, choose you "discharge" (the Icon on the right outside in the first row the tools) from, whereby the field with the ausgewählten colour as background color filled is. 4. Choose you to the drawing of model an colour from the Farbauswahlfeld from. You able also an pattern from the field "defaults" choose and adjacent with the mouse edit. 5. Click you with the Auswahltaste the place in the Bearbeitungsfeld on, on the with the drawing begun become shall. On the position of Mauspfeils appear an pixel with the ausgewählten colour. When you the Auswahltaste pressed hold and the mouse postpone, able in bit more pixel designed become. If needed, choose you to the drawing other colors from. With the Erstellen of model in the Bearbeitungsfeld is the pattern simultaneous in the field over "defaults" in the real bigness displayed. This field shows you, how the pattern by of it copy in a greater area looks. When you at drawing an error unterläuft, choose you "Rückgängig" from, around the last with the mouse carried out action rescinded to make. When the pattern complete created became, choose you from, around the look of model on the onscreen to examine. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- since AmigaOS 3.5 gives it to the drawing the pattern some Malwerkzeuge and eight buttons with vorbelegten patterning. The vorbelegten pattern find he direct under the Zeichenfläche. Right next to find he the Malwerkzeuge. In the first row (from left to on the right) are: point paint, rectangle, circle, line, Undo and discharge. In the second realms are Freihandlinie, filled rectangle, more filled circle, colt and Redo. 3.24.2. Selection from picture you able for the background the Workbench, the window or of screen an image or an Grafikdatei choose. Images able with a Zeichenprogramm created become. You able also digitalsierte Bilddateien in the editor load. The images become on the colors of screen adapted. Walk you to the selection one Bilddatei how follows before: 1. Choose you "image" in the Blättersymbol "type" from. 2. Click you on the symbol "image choose..." (The symbol on the right next to Bilddateinamen). 3. Give you over the Dateiauswahlwindow the file names of wished picture on. 4. You able additional "test" choose. The pattern is then without quitting of Preferencess for the onscreen activates. 3.24.3. Layout (OS3.9) new added is the possibility images in the Hintegrund tiled, centered or scaled there-deliver. Is you onscreen e.g. 800*600 pixel great, you image but only 200*140 pixel, so able you with the attitude the following Festlegen: Zentriert the image is on the Bildschirmhintergrund in the centre with the Originalgröße from 200*140 pixel displayed. Tiles the image is horizontal and vertical several times repeatedly displayed, till the entire background filled is. Scaling the image is on the bigness from 800*600 hochgerechnet (so enlarges) personated. Better skalieren the image is likewise how by "scaling" scaled, but with better quality, what he seasonal clear noticeable makes. 3.24.4. Menu "defaults" the menu "defaults" of Workbench-pattern-Preferencess (WBPattern) contains menu items, over the you other Zeichenprogramme to the Erstellen and editing from patterning as soon as existing images from other sources use able. You able for instance to the Erstellen of model the Zeichenfunktionen of program "IconEdit" use and the pattern adjacent in the progam "WBPattern" (Workbench-pattern-Preferences) load. Clipboard Kopiert the contents of Bearbeitungsfeldes in the clipboard (Clipboard) and extinguishes the Nachfolgende. It remains only the background color in the Bearbeitungsfeld. Copying copying in the clipboard without re design of Bearbeitungsfelds. Integrate copying of IFF-picture from the clipboard in the Bearbeitungsfeld. With it is the actual content of field compensates. Images, the the bigness of Bearbeitungsfelds from 64 x 64 Bildpunkten overshoot, become back and on the right cropped. Discharge discharge of model in the Bearbeitungsfeld and set on the background color. Withdrawals (Undo) the last Bearbeitungsschritt is with it rescinded made. Reconstitute with this is the function "withdrawals (Undo)" again (Redo) taken back. Image load... Undoing of Dateiauswahlwindows, over the the name one Bilddatei entered become can, the as Hintergrundmuster uses is. On defaults Zurücksetzen of Workbench-model on the disfavour default settings (no pattern). On zeletzt Wiederherstellen the at last store savings settings. On previous Wiederherstellen the settings, the at undoing of condition Preferences-editor active were. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when you "save" or "Benutzen" choose, become all ausgewählten pattern or. Images saved and/or on the angegebenen place uses. With selection from "breaking off" become also over the field "test" appropriated pattern distant. 4. The tools the Workbench under "tools" become in these chapter not only the program's pp of verstehen, the he in the drawer "tools" find, Vielmehr are here also program's from the "system"-drawer how e.g. AmiDOCK represent. "Tools" is here so more of him signification equitable and contains the tools (eng. Tools), the in the AmigaOS hold are. AmiDOCK, the new Programmstarter from AmigaOS 3.9 is surely an god example for an very helpfully tool, even so the HDToolbox to the reduction from hard drives, the pictograms-editor IconEdit and the new IomegaTools. All this tools are very competent and it remunerates he with safety, she once particularly to view. 4.1. AmiDOCK AmiDOCK is an Commodity, on the you only still reluctant forego want, when you it first once tested have. Sure know you some tools, the an like function have, but hardly of is so easy and practical to handle how AmiDOCK. The in principle function from AmiDOCK is quick and short described: it stands you an so-called dock-window on the Workbench to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, the often required program's on Mausklick actuates. You need then not first in the depths your hard drive to particular program to seek, not first complicated a few Verzeichniswindow open and again schlißen, but able program's easy with a Mausklick commence. With it stays it but not, one can namely also files with the program, the he in the dock find, read in. Example: you have the EditPad in you AmiDOCK and will a text read in. Draw you then easy the Textpiktogramm direct on the EditPad-Icon in AmiDOCK. Now is the text direct with the EditPad read in and you able him edit. With it is long seeking in Auswahlwindown superfluous and you able all beautiful from the Workbench from edit. Those functions stand a few other tools also to the zur ~ - at one's disposal. AmiDOCK goes but some steps wider: where normally complicated config the docks necessary is, need you by AmiDOCK easy only an Icon over the dock to abandon (eng. "drag & drop"), around it to the dock to add. In the most cases is the already all, what you to the config yours personal docks do must. Simple and practical! --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when you an file between two pictograms fallenlassen, then is the file in the dock inserted; leaves one you over a Icon fall, then is the file from the those concerned progam edited (one can very good recognize, when an progam choosen became, because then changed he the Icon). That AmiDOCK in the normal case no one particular config need, means but not, that it hardly configurable is, in the converse. AmiDOCK leaves he on multifaceted wise man on your needs adjust. The most weighty possibilities stand we you here before. The Konfigurationswindow reach you over the AmiDOCK-menu or over the Titelleiste. The Konfigurationswindow is subdivided in three wiles (with accompanying board) and three functional groups, the the look and the behavior from AmiDOCK control. 4.1.1. Docks in these list find you all dock-ledges, the you till now arranged have. With the button "add" below the list able you an another dock-ledge add. With the button "remove" is the momentary choosen (shaded) dock from the list excluded. 4.1.2. Categories sure is you the small switch in the Ziehleiste from AmiDOCK struck. With these switch able you between the categories within one dock-ledge switch. Those list contains all till now defined categories. By means of "add" create you an new category. "Remove" extinguishes the momentary elective category from the list. Sense the categories is it, an one dock-ledge from the duty here related program's under a title summarize. You have with it quasi an "Multi"-dock. An example: you define an category "photographs" and lay in these category an Scan-progam, an image processing and an stress-progam off. Those three program's appear then always together, as soon as you with the switch in the dock the category "photographs" choose. You have with it the important program's for an duty forthwith in the intervention and need not long to every separate pictograms to seek - and place on the Workbench saves this method also still! 4.1.3. Pictograms those list contains all program's, the in the dock hold are. You able here program's from hand add and remove (what but seldom necessary is is). With "Auf" and "Ab" able you the order, in the the pictograms in the dock appear, change. With "assortment" able you the program's also alphabetic assort leave. 4.1.4. Backdrops you able pattern or images as background for Ziehleiste (left edge of dock) and Icon-area give. Test you an little around, actuate you he an little as surfaces-designer and embellish you your Workbench and AmiDOCK, how it you pleasing. 4.1.5. Dock-behavior with the option "Oriertierung" able you fix, if the dock vertical or horizontal laid against become shall. You able the orientation of docks anytime alter. "Icon-names" deposits fast, how many lines the names under the pictograms take permit. With "on Bildrand sew" come we to one the most interesting functions from AmiDOCK. You able AmiDOCK about this direct, he always on a selectable edge of the screen or one Bildschirmecke to stop. "Notebooks" is here by the way literal to take. Choose you e.g. "Left-hand", displaces he AmiDOCK forthwith on the lefthand edge of the screen and leaves he also not more from edge move. You able it to above or back postpone, but not to on the right. Credit you "left back" elective, sticks AmiDOCK in the lefthand bottom edge yours screen, and sure so long, till you under "on Bildrand sew" against some other choose. 4.1.6. General. Dock-behavior "Aufblitzende Icons" worrys for it, that the pictograms at Anklicken flash. "Featuring Griffleiste" brings about, that in edge, the the Ziehleiste gegenüberliegt, an Griffleiste strobed is. Those Griffleiste enables it, the bigness of docks with the mouse to change. Holding you the left Maustaste over the Griffleiste pressed, around the bigness of docks in horenzontaler and upright direction to change. AmiDOCK accommodates the apportionment the pictograms automatic on the new Drockgröße on. 4.1.7. Configurations save and shop as soon as you in the Konfigurationswindow on "save" press, become the vorgenommenen settings saved. Further possibilities to the shop and save the Konfigurationsdateien finds one in the Titelleisten-menu. Here is also the function "lastly saved", which the at last stored Konfiruation again invites. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ benefit you the possibilities, the the categories from AmiDOCK bid! In most cases become for an appointed duty more program's in one determine order invoked. The categories enable it, this program's in the dock summarize and in the appositely order to the invocation offer. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ benefit you the "on Bildrand sew"-function! Observanc you, which places on you onscreen at workings most free remained and sew you AmiDOCK there fast. So have you the dock always in the field of vision and able quick thereupon seize, without it constant to must. Then it then only still confined or at all not relocatable is, is the experiment also not so great, it by lack of space on the onscreen under a dozen window to bury. 4.2. Animated Icons "Animated Icons" are encouraged pictograms, with those one its Workbench embellish and interessanter fashion can. "Animated Icons" gives it only for the AmigaOS, hence should you this Features of use ;-) --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- the progam "AnimatedIcon" is he in the "system"-drawer. It has but no direct function, hence reacted it also not on Anklicken. The progam is over an special attribute (Tooltype) of Icon restarted. An "Animated Icon" is first once an whole normal Icon (the he even some "animates"). Is an Doppelklick thereupon carried out, is an window with following options open: shop it loads an new animation or a new Sound. Termination Entfernt the encouraged Icon. More shows general informations over the "Animated Icon" on, how e.g. The number the Animationsbilder, the momentary "images per second" etc. Breaking off Schließt the information-window. 4.2.1. Create one "Animated Icon" around self an "Animated Icon" to create, must you first once an GIF- or an so-called "transfer"-animation created have. To this able you e.g. The progam "GIFToolkit", "WhirlGIF" (both program's finds one in the Aminet) or "UltraConv" use. Around this Antimationen now as "Animated Icon" to declare, must you in the Infodatei (how in chapter "RAWBInfo" described; Icon anklicken and + press) the animation the Piktogrammtyp on "project" alter (in case it this still not happen is). After this go you in the submenu "Icon" and carry you as standard program "AnimatedIcons" an (the sees then in the rule how follows from: "SYS:utilities/AnimatedIcons"). Now able you still appointed tees for "Animated Icons" give: icon_X=XXX here is the X-position of "Animated Icon" in pixel specified. icon_Y=XXX here is the Y-position registered. FPS=XXX gives the speed (images per second) of "Animated Icon" on. 4.2.2. Optionally tees for "Transferanims" First=X,Y position of first picture in the streak. Delta=X,Y Relative position of Einzelbildes. That is the representation one "Transferanim" in MultiView. That is an GIF-animation in MultiView (am hint). --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when you an GIF-animation in MultiView show or in an Grafikprogramm invite, then is in the rule only the first image the animation personated. When you the Einzelbilder edit want, so must you before the animation in her Einzelbilder take apart. For this able you the progam "GIFToolkit" or "UltraConv" use. 4.3. BenchTrash - the clever garbage can "BenchTrash" is an Workbench-progam, the an new "garbage can"- Icon on the Workbench-surface arranges. Files, the on him flung become, become either on requirement direct excluded or in the "Trashcan"-formatters of disk drive shoved (the files become then not forthwith excluded, but first, when you this want). Additional able with BenchTrash also diskettes ejected become, when you drives this lean. For this must the diskettes-Icon on the garbage can consider. BenchTrash leaves he through tees "ToolTypes" or over a Preferences configure. 4.3.1. The Preferences from BenchTrash with this is adjusted, what BenchTrash with the files make shall, the in him flung become. With the buttons under can one between the following possibilities choose: clearance! Emptied the globalen garbage can manual. All files, the older as "MAXAGE" days are, become distant. That serves even then, in case the option for the globalen garbage can cut out became. With this able no the other garbage can-directories on other media emptied become. All clean all files, the in the garbage can flung become, become forthwith excluded. More mixed mode here become the files usually in the garbage can on the respective ones vehicle saved. Only in case these garbage can miss or he the files already in the garbage can find, become she excluded. Local garbage can The files become in an garbage can-directory on the respective ones vehicle deferred. Shall it missing, can it on enquire from BenchTrash created become. Global garbage can The files land in a globalen garbage can- directory, which he on your hard drive is. Löschprozeß shows the Löschprozeß graphical on. Safety query it asks before files entgültig excluded become. First copy, Spezifiziert, how BenchTrash files in the globalen later clean garbage can displaces. If abgehakt, is the complete record first complete copied and the originals become first later excluded. To this is more place on the Dateiträger required, but the Löschprozeß is safer. Selection it opens an Dateiauswahl for the globally garbage can- directory. You able the Dateipfad also manual in the input field on the right next to these button enter. You able only a garbage can choose, when the function "Globaler garbage can" activates is. Save Speichert the settings for the next boot from BenchTrash. Use The geänderten settings become off now uses, however not conserved. With the next boot from BenchTrash become again the at last store settings active. Breaking off The adjustments become ignored and the window closed, BenchTrash runs but wider. 4.3.2. Tees from BenchTrash the following tees (Tooltypes) able in the pictograms from BenchTrash registered become: MODE=deletemode with this is picked, how BenchTrash with in him geworfenen files to proceed has. MODE=DELETE The files become to query excluded. MODE=LOCAL The files become in the lokalen garbage can on the those concerned vehicle deferred. BenchTrash is possibly a garbage can lay against, in case no one existing is. You should but this Mülleimerverzeichnisse from time to time manual vacate. MODE=MIXED that is an mixture from both Arbeitsmodi. Here become only the files thrown away, for the no garbage can found became or the he already in the garbage can find - natural become you ahead around confirmation solicited. All wider files become in the garbage can-directories deferred. MODE=GLOBAL it is an global directory uses, around the garbage to computer store. Those directory can also time to time from BenchTrash automatic emptied become. The default is the "SYS:Trashcan" directory, this can also changes become. PROGRESSBAR=on/off BenchTash stands the delete process with a beam graphical there. An button to the breaking off is even so existing. With the clasps of window is the delete process cancels. If on "off" posed, is this function deactivated. ICONX= places the horizontal position of Icon fast, on the BenchTrash on the Workbench appear. That is usually the left edge of Workbench- screen. ICONY= places appropriate the vertical position (height) fast, on the the BenchTrash appear is. Voreingestellt is here the bottom edge of screen. MAXAGE= here able you an Tagesanzahl give to the the garbage can depleted is. EJECT Wählt more script to the Medienauswurf. More as an EJECT-argument can specified become. An argument sees by it how follows from: : i.e. Around an ZIP-diskette of Gerätenames ZIP auszuwerfen, must here EJECT ZIP:C:ZipTool >NIL: EJECT ZIP: entered become. The redirection the giving out on "NILE:" is not real necessary, constrained but an nervendes window. If you instead of this the Auswurfkommando to the Exec-device driver direct will, replace you please the double point through a oblique "/" and the Gerätenamen through the names of device driver, where the text "device" through the Gerätenummer compensates become must. The example above would in these second notation so look: EJECT oktagon.6/C:ZipTool >NIL: EJECT ZIP: where we assume, you ZIP is through the "oktagon.device" controlled and allocates the SCSI-ID 6. TRASHDIR=Pfad an directory, the BenchTrash as globalen garbage can use shall. Those function is only uses, in case the Löschmodus on "GLOBALLY" posed is. The default is "SYS:Trashcan". COPYFIRST=on/off if this codeword specified became, become first the complete data records copied and first later excluded. Dierzu must on your hard drive sure more place available is, but the operation is some safer. DONOTASK=on/off if DONOTASK on "on" stands asks BenchTrash before the emptying of garbage can not more, if he it real do shall. If DONOTASK on "off" stands asks BenchTrash before the Löscehn, if he it real do shall. 4.4. Calculator (pocket calculator) the pocket calculator offers the functions addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. Through undoing of accompanying Icon is the pocket calculator activates. He serves how an handelsüblicher pocket calculator. The Bildschirmfelder correspond to the "buttons", of pocket calculator, the he from Zifferntasten from 0 till 9 and function keys compose: APPROX discharge all earlier inputs (Clear all). The pocket calculator is on 0 rewound. CE discharge the actual input (Clear entry). x Multiplizieren. : Divide. + add. - Subtract. , Decimal point. « Discharge of at last eingegebenen sign. ± re design of sign for the actual entry. The positive quantitative become negative and reverse. = announcement of Rechenergebnisses. Click you to the "squeeze" one key of pocket calculator the corresponding field with the Auswahltaste on or press you the obversely key on the keyboard. You able by it the standard-keyboard-quantitative or the Zehnerblock use. With inputs over the keyboard correspond to the enter key and the key the Zehnertastatur the equality sign (=). The Rücktaste complies the Taschenrechnertaste «. On the pocket calculator appear where appropriate. The error reports "error:overflow!" And "division through naught". Choose you to the quitting of pocket calculator the Schließsymbol from. 4.4.1. Menu of pocket calculator in Taschenrechnerprogramm stand three menu to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: project, defaults and window. The menu "project" contains following menu items: input clean discharge the actual input. All clean discharge all inputs and resetting of pocket calculator on naught. Quitting clasps of pocket calculator. In menu "defaults" stand following menu items to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: Ausschneiden copying of actual entry in the buffer (Clipboard) with subsequent discharge the input. Copying copying of actual entry in the buffer without discharge. Integrate shop the actual data from the buffer in the pocket calculator. The menu "window" contains only the menu item "paper strip". With selection these option become the inputs and Rechenergebnisse in a own window how by a calculator with printed work displayed. The angezeigten data able copied become. Then however no menu for this action available is, must you the wished values through draw choose and through squeeze the key combination raked Amiga-key-C in the buffer copy. 4.5. EditPad EditPad is an smaller and faster editor. You able him to the editing all ASCII-files use (e.g. The "user-startup"-file). He offers only the basic functions of editor and is hence very easy to attend. Some functions able over Tastaturkürzel controlled become. A table for this find you in the chapter "Tastaturkürzel". The surface offers only three pictograms: Ausshneiden: Markieren you a area within of text and press on this key. The text is cut out and from onscreen excluded. He is he but still in the clipboard (Clipboard) and can with the succeeding functions again inserted become. Keyboard macros: +. Copying: Markieren you a area of text and press on this key. The text stays get and simultaneous is he in the clipboard copied. With the succeeding function can he against inserted become. Keyboard macros: +. Integrate: with these function able you a text, the he in the clipboard (Clipboard) is, on the actual Kursorposition again integrate. Keyboard macros: +. The most functions are over the menu "projects", "Bearbeiten", "navigation" and "settings" obtainable. 4.5.1. Project new new text file create. Undoing text file open. Integrate a other text file integrate. Save file save. Save as... File under specified names computer store. Printing text print. Over informations over the progam. Ikonifizieren Schließt the window and deposits an Icon on the Workbench-surface. Termination Beendet the progam. 4.5.2. Process Ausschneiden Schneidet the highlighting text block from (am above). Copying Kopiert the highlighting text block in the clipboard (am above). Integrate Fügt the text block from the clipboard an (am above). Discharge Löscht the angewählten text. Wirderrufen force the at last getätigten step rescinded. Reconstitute force an "withdrawals"-action again rückgàngig. 4.5.3. Navigation finding with this able you in the text to word etc. Seek. Find next shows the next search result on. Finding & substitution you able in the text to word etc. Seek and this through an other word replace leave. Go to row with this able you in an appointed row bounce. 4.5.4. Settings Erzeuge made for every with EditPad created text file an pictograms pictograms. Settings Speichert the settings. Computer store 4.6. HDToolbox HDToolbox (eng. For hard drives-Werkzeugkiste) unifies an plurality from functions to the control the hard drive. Walk you how follows before, around HDToolbox from the hard drive from to commence: 1. Undoing you the Partition "system" or "Workbench". 2. Undoing you the drawer "tools". 3. Click you the Icon "HDToolbox" double on. Then appear the onscreen "hard drives initialize and Partitionieren" (hardware Drive Preparation, Partitioning and Formatting). Over these first onscreen able you the following functions the HDToolbox invoice: . Partitionieren . Prepare one new hard drive . Configuring of Festplattentyps . Physical formatting the hard drive . Define the Dateisystemmerkmale . Add, discharge and re design from Dateisystemen . Shop and save of RDB and the Mount-list (am subsequent tip) in the wider cut off this chapter become this functions and whose use detailed explained. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ general information tips to hard drives save you frequent the RDB ("Rigid Disk block" your hard drive on a other data medium (e.g. An diskette) off. The RDB contains important basic settings. When he once through a handling error, an faulty software or at all a virus destroys is, have you no intervention more on the data your hard drive. The HDToolbox offers in the Titelleisten-menu a point "RDB computer store" on. The Genstück there to is then the function "RDB load". Save you by these contingency also alike the Mount-list off. Also this function is over a menu item offered. Please think you at it, the RDB and the Mount-list to every one change the hard drives-settings with the HDToolbox renewed to backup! With hard drives is sufficient it, at formatting the option "rapid" to choose. The Formatiervorgang runs then erhablich faster off. 4.6.1. The Hauptwindow Auf these onscreen is an list the on you system angeschlossenen hard drives displayed. Is you system with more Festplattenlaufwerken endowed as displayed become, able you this with help the on the right next to the list angeordneten Rolleiste or Rollpfeile show. For every physically drive become following data displayed: 4.6.1.1. Inferface type the hard drive. The Festplattentypen are SCSI and XT - latter is nowadays not more uses. Others Festplattentypen, e.g. IDE, become as SCSI displayed. 4.6.1.2. Adr worth between 0 and 6 (or. 0 and 13 for WEIT-SCSI), the you for the respective ones SCSI-device adjusted have. Over this address finds the calculator the separate drives. Every SCSI-device yours intrasystem must an unequivocally address have. The SCSI-controller is as device 7 adjusted. Acts it he by the delivered hard drive around an SCSI-device, complies the position the plug-in strap (Jumper) the oneness 6. The most hard drives are by delivery as device 0 configured, so that she without change ageschlossen become able. Formation another hard drives added, must this on new (not appropriated) addresses eingstellt become. Give the Steckbrückenpositionen for two hardware the same address on, become program's not duly carried out or the device become at all not recognized. Further informations to these subject, in particular Steckbrückenpositionen, find you in the documentation to the respective ones hard drive. With IDE-device is in the rule the as Master gejumperte device as oneness 0 and the as Slave gejumperte as oneness 1 displayed. 4.6.1.3. LUN logical Einheitennummer (LUN = Logical Unit Number) of disk drive. The worth lies between 0 and 7. The LUN-issue is an secondary address. You is uses, when an device more other hardware steers. A controller-card can for instance more hard drives ctrl, the each over an unequivocally LUN-issue dispose must (confer. Addresses for SCSI-hardware). In the rule is the LUN-issue of SCSI-Festplattenlaufwerks 0. In the documentation to the controller-card able you look up, if the controller more LUN-numbers bolstered and how this if necessary to alter are. 4.6.1.4. Drive (Drive) name of Laufwerkherstellers and version number. 4.6.1.5. Bigness gives the bigness of disk drive in GB on. --- ANNOTATION ------------------------------------------------------------ the name and the issue attune if necessary not with the data in the documentation to the drive überein. The name became the HDToolbox from drive sent. Is the drive with Laufwerkstyp "unknown" (Unknown) displayed, is it not partitioniert. In these fall must you the drive over the option "hard drive install" arrange. With SCSI-Bandlaufwerken (Tape-Streamer) is always the Laufwerkstyp "unknown" displayed, even so by the most CD-ROM-disk drive, when no CD inlaid is. Those hardware able from the HDToolBox not edited become. Over the verbleibenden symbols able you the functions the HDToolbox invoice, the in the wider cut off this chapter explained become. --- WARNING -------------------------------------------------------------- Erstellen you before use of program always an archival backup copy the on your entirety hard drive ingoing data, then by the most Funktionnen the HDToolbox the on the hard drive store data excluded become able. To this able you the progam HDToolbox use. When you the field "termination" (Cancel) choose, inverts the progam to the previous Einstellwindow back, without the adjustments of actual Einstellwindows to computer store. 4.6.2. Partitionieren one disk drive partitions are subdivisons of Festplattenbereichs. Each Partition yours intrasystem is through an Icon on the Workbench-onscreen personated. 4.6.2.1. Hard drive partitions The voluminous Speicherkapazität your hard drive can in less fields, sucked. Partitions, subdivided become. Thereby able you your work better organize. You able for instance the Systemdateien and other from calculator appropriated files from yours applications programmes and the accompanying data apart hold. With add of zusätzlichen operating system on you Amiga (e.g. MacOS, MS-DOS via emulator or UNIX) able you this in one from AmigaDOS unconnectedly Partition instellieren. HDToolbox disposes over an advertisement, with whose help you your hard drive problem-free partitionieren able. That is needed, when an new hard drive partitioniert or. An already existing hard drive new partitioniert become shall. The Partitionierung the hard drive follow u's.a. From following grounds: . Arbeitsorganisationen. Eventually computer store you the files in one particular Partition, around she more easily find. . Separation from AmigaDOS and a additional installed operating system (e.g. LINUX). . Aggrandizement the partitions. --- WARNING -------------------------------------------------------------- it commends he, the hard drive before whose use right to partitionieren. When you the hard drive later new partitionieren, become all data in the geänderten partitions excluded! Create you where appropriate. Before the Partitionierung one hard drive an archival backup copy the entirety data. To this able you an standard back up-progam use. On this wise man able the data to conclusion the Partitionierung recovered become. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ fore the Partitionieren ought one he exactly consider, how many partitions one arrange want and how great this is shall, because at späteren re design the Partitionsgröße go the data, the he on the betroffenen partitions find, lost. Hear user able with the HDToolbox additional following functions use: re design the number from sector-Pufferspeichern (cache), re design the Dateisysteme for partitions and tuning the boot-priority for boat-partitions. Those options become later in these chapter explained. Paging you to the Partitionieren the hard drive the point "hard drives initialize and Partitionieren" (hardware Drive Preparation, Partitionierung and Formatting) on and lead you following sections from: 1. Click you in the list the hard drives the hard drive on, the partitioniert become shall. The picked hard drive is highlighted. 2. Choose you "drive partitionieren" (Partition Drive) from. Then appear the Einstellwindow to the Partitionierung. The on the hard drive available Speicherkapazität is through an horizontal ledge (the Partitionierungsleiste) displayed. The issue of last coil erscheitn on the right above on the onscreen. With default setting the Workbench-Fabern is the actual (picked) Partition blue displayed. The capacity the Partition appear below this field. The wider partitions are shaded and through highlighed lines from each other apart. No appropriated area become monochrome gray personated. Employ you to the Erstellen the new partitions the Partitionierungsleiste and the mouse. Before you with the Partitionierung start, read you the data in following field of screen: Partitionsname Gerätename the ausgewählten Partition (eng. "Partition name"). Click you to the sampling the desired Partition in the Partitionierungsleiste on. File system Filesystem the ausgewählten Partition (eng. "File system"). Bootbar details, if the system from the ausgewählten Partition from restarted become can. The Standardangabe for the first Partition is, that she restarted become can ("bootbar" is with a tick provide), for all wider partitions, that she not restarted become able (no tick next to "Bootbar"). --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when an Partition "bootbar" made become shall, must on each fall the complete Partition (beginning and end) below the 4Gb-border lie. Reading you the following informations, around the partitions yours requirement appropriate adjust to able. 4.6.2.2. Adapt the bigness one Partition 1. Click you the blue triangle below the Partitionerungsleiste with the lefthand Maustaste on and hold you this pressed. 2. Relocating you the triangle on the new position and leave you the Maustaste loose. You able the triangle not in the area one other existing Partition postpone. The new bigness the Partition is below of triangle displayed. 4.6.2.3. Relocating from partitions within the Partitionierungsleiste you must possible. Partitions postpone, around place for new partitions to create or free fields summarize. You able partitions not over existing partitions postpone, but only over free fields the Partitionierungsleiste. 1. Click you the to displacing Partition with the Auswahltaste on and hold you this pressed. 2. Relocating you the Partition on the desired position and leave you the Auswahltaste loose. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ Ist an Partition so small, that she not problem-free angeklickt become can, able you also with help the lefthand or. The right Cursortaste from one Partition to the other alternate. 4.6.2.4. Add one new Partition you able no Partition in the area one already existing Partition create. Is the overall Festplattenkapazität uses (i.e. The overall Partitionierungsleiste is filling), must you first of all existing partitions decrease, around Kapizität for the new Partition provide (siehye chapter "adapt the bigness one Partition" wider above). Open air fields become monochrome gray displayed. 1. Relocating you the existing partitions, so that in the Partitionierungsleiste an contiguous grayer area for the new Partition entitled comes. 2. Choose you the field "new Partition" from. The field is highlighted. 3. Click you in the free area the Partitionierungsleiste the position on, on the the new Partition created become shall. The new Partition fills the till now free area from. In Texteingabefeld "Partitionname" (Partition name) appear an default mark, e.g. "IDH0:", the you if necessary alter able. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- The default mark for Festplattenpartitionen sets he from the first letters of manufacturer, e.g. "Ignoring" for IBM, "Q" for quantum etc., The mark "HD" and one consecutive issue together. 4.6.2.5. Rename one Partition 1. Click you in the Partitionierungsleiste the Partition on, the renamed become shall. Thereby is she to the actual Partition. 2. Click you the Texteingabefeld "Partitionsname" on, in the the name the actual Partition displayed is. 3. Discharge you the angezeigten names. Subsequent give you the new names an and press the enter key. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ it commends he, no blanks in the Partitionsnamen to use. 4.6.2.6. Discharge one Partition 1. Click you in the Partitionierungsleiste the Partition on, the excluded become shall. Thereby is she to the actual Partition. 2. Choose you the field "breeze Partition" (Delete Partition) from. 3. The picked Partition is excluded. The first Partition (left) in the Partitionierungsleiste is picked. 4.6.3. Standard configuration for drives make the manuellen Partitionierung able you he on for an the Standardkonfigurationen the HDToolbox settle: 1. Click you the field "standard attitude" (Default Setup) with the lefthand Maustaste on and hold you this pressed. It opens he an menu with the entries "automatic" as soon as "1" till "8". When you "automatic choose, is the Fesplatte, hanging from hers bigness, in an meaningful number gleichgroßer partitions divided, during "1" till "8" the plate in an till eight gleichgroße partitions aufteilt. 2. The first Partition given the names QDH0:, the second Partition the names QDH1:. With it stands Q for the first letters of Festplattenherstellers. Follow you to the Umbenennen the Partition the assignments in the accordingly chapter. 4.6.4. Save and formatting the new partitions when the new partitions yours presentations correspond to, must you the settings computer store. 1. Choose you the field "save" from. The new Partitionsdaten become on the hard drive saved. After this inverts program's to the onscreen "hard drives initialize un Partitionieren" back. 2. When the adjustments a restart of intrasystem needed make, so is the HDToolbox you abieten, these automatic carry out. Also when you this supply turn aside, should you the calculator new commence, because otherwise an unobjectionably function not guaranteed is. 3. Towards the restart is every Partition the hard drive through an Icon personated. Formatting you now the separate partitions, with it this uses become able. 4. Click you to the formatting the first Partition on the Workbench the corresponding Icon on. Choose you in the menu "pictograms" (Icons) the menu item "Disk reformat" from. With hard drives is sufficient it, "rapid" to choose. The Formatiervorgang runs then monumental faster off. 5. Click you the first new Partition on. Choose you in the menu "pictograms" the menu item "Umbenennen" from. Subsequent give you the new names for the Partition an. Repeat you the last both steps for every new Partition. 4.6.5. Options to the Partitionierung for Erfahrene user when you an erfahrener user are and exactly know, what you do, able you the parameter for the Festplattenpartitionen particularly give. Fore change of worth must you of it signification exactly know. The following options are for experienced user thought, the all parameter your partitions till in detail bias will. Those options find you likewise on the Einstellwindow for the Partitionierung: walk you to the re design the Texteingabefender how follows before: Klicken you the desired field on. Discharge you the existing number and give you the new worth an. Confirm you every input through squeeze the enter key. First Zyl issue of first coil (boot Cyl) the ausgewählten Partition. With it can it he with exception of last coil around each cyl the actual Partition or a any cyl in the free area before the actual Partition act. The field "sum Zyl" is appropriate changes. Last Zyl issue of last coil (- terminal Cyl) the ausgewählten Partition. With it can it he with exception of first coil around each cyl the actual Partition or a any cyl in the free area behind the actual Partition act. The field "sum Zyl" is appropriate changes. Sum Zyl total number the cyl (Total Cyl) in the ausgewählten Partition. The field "last Zyl" is appropriate changes. Buffer number the Pufferspeicher (cache) for the picked Partition. Buffer decrease the Festplattenzugriffszeit. Pros buffer are however 512 byte Speicherkapazität erfoderlich. The number the from you use buffer is only through the available Speicherkapazität confined. It commends he in the rule, per Partition ever to whose bigness, the number the on you ingoing files as soon as the existing memory 80-400 buffer to use. The bigness of proved storeroom computes he from the Pufferanzahl multiplied with the Blockgröße of Dateisystems (am chapter "KAndern from Dateisystemen"). Boat priority details, from which drive or. Which Partition from the system restarted is (boat Priority). This field is only for appropriate prepared, startfähige partitions valid. Debit the system from one Festplattenpartitionen from restarted become, must you ahead the AmigaOS-files on this Partition copy. The specified Priotätswert can between -127 and +128 lie. Ever superior the worth, the superior the priority. The Prioritätswer for the Amiga-floppy (DF0:) is 5. Give you for Festplattenpartitionen never a higher Prioritätswert as 5 an. Set you the worth for the boot-Partition on 1 and the worth for another partitions, from those from the system restarted become can, on 0. Bootbar details, if the system from the ausgewählten Partition from restarted become can. The Standardangabe for the first Partition is, that restarted become can (Bootable), for all wider partitions, that she not restarted become able (Non-Bootable). Through Anklicken of field able you between the data there- and herschalten. With it the system from one Partition from restarted become can, must you this Partition adjacent how follows prepair: formatting you the Partition. Fit you the AmigaOS-files on the Partition. Subsequent commence you you system new. After this able you the progam HDToolbox invoice. Paging you renewed the Einstellwindow to the Partitionierung on and choose you the field "Bootbar" from. Change... Invocation of Einstellwindows "tees of Dateisystems" (file system Characteristics). Over these Preferences able you the Filesystem the ausgewählen Partition alter (eng. "Chang..."). In addition/update... Invocation of Einstellwindows "Dateisystemverwaltung" (file system Maintenance). Over these Preferences able you Dateisysteme zinzufügen, clean and alter (eng. "Add/update..."). 4.6.6. Prepare single sculler new hard drive when you the available Festplattenspeicherkapazität not more is, able you you system around an new Festplattenlaufwerk broaden. After you the hard drive according to the assignments of Herstelllers connected have, use you HDToolbox, around you system with the new Festplattenspezifikationen to configure. Walk you to the prepare the hard drive how volgt before: 1. Click you the Icon "HDToolbox" double on. The Einstellwindow "Festplattern initialize and Partitionieren" (hardware Drive Preparation, Partitioning and Formatting) is displayed. The new hard drive has the names "unknown" (Unknown). 2. Choose you the drive "unknown" from. The drive is highlighted. 3. Choose you the field "hard drive install" (Install Drive) from. HDToolbox is you in front of it warn, that the content the plate destroys is. Squeeze you "OK". 4. You become now asked if an RDB generated become shall, press you "new". 5. An new window ought he now open. Squeeze you "harvest config" and the HDToolbox ought the data the hard drive choose. Now should fabricator, Festplattenname etc. Filling is. Squeeze you now still "fit". A fuller description of reduction one new hard drive find you wider in the front in the chapter "installing". 4.6.7. Re design from Dateisystemen an Filesystem steers the Datenorganisation on one hard drive. Amiga- system use the FastFileSystem (FFS). This efficient Filesystem saves time and Festplattenkapazität. The progam HDToolbox enables you, to a other Filesystem, e.g. One aktualisierten AmigaDOS-version or a benutzerdefinierten Filesystem, to alternate. You able new Dateisysteme in the list the verfügbaren Dateisysteme add. Dateisysteme from the list clean and existing Dateisysteme alter. --- ATTENTION -------------------------------------------------------------- those function became for experienced user developed. The change of Dateisystems for an Partition can the intervention on the before store data impossible make. Paging you to the re design of Dateisystems for an Partition the Einstellwindow "Fesplatten Initalisieren and Partitionieren" (hardware Disk Prepoaration, Partitioning and Formatting) on and lead you following operation steps from: 1. Choose you the field "hard drive partitionieren" (Partition Drive) from. The Einstellwindow to the Partitionierung is displayed. 2. Choose you the field "Verändern..." From. 3. The Einstellwindow for the Filesystem-settings (file system Characteristics) is displayed. The name the ausgewählten Partition appear above on the onscreen. Use you the Aufklappmenü "file system" (file system) around the desired Filesystem to select: standard Filesystem Ist this system elective, so stand still the following options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: . Fasts file system: employed the modern "fasts file"-system. You should these switch only deactivate, when you an consisting of Partition from one hard drive use want, the with one very old AmigaOS-version created became. . International mode: those option ought likewise always activates is, it be because, you know exactly, what you do. . Directory-cache: The use of directory-cache (directory cache) is for Festplattenlaufwerke not commended - only in exception ought this option activates become. Strangers Filesystem Dient to the installing from own Dateisystemen (Custom file system). Further installed Dateisysteme Auf the antecedently both choices follows an list the already in HDToolbox eingebundenen Fremd-Dateisysteme (am also chapter "Dateisystemverwaltung"). Those are through a DOS-type characterized: "SFS/01" stands in the rule for SmartFileSystem (am chapter "further program's) as soon as "PFS/03" for the for-sale Filesystem ProfessionalFilesystem 3. "UNICOLOURED/01" stands by it to the example for partitions, the for an UNIX-operating system reserved are. Towards sampling of Dateisystems must you the requisite values how follows enter: Klicken you the respective ones field on and clean you the therein ingoing data. Give you the new number an and press you the enter key (hexadecimal quantitative must with 0x start). Identification Hexadezimale number (code), the the appropriated Filesystem for AmigaDOS indents (narrow. "Identifier"). This worth ann only by use own Dateisysteme (Custom file system) changes become. Mask Hexadezimale number to the definition the storage area, on the by DMA (Direct Memory Access) accessed become can (eng. "Mask"). This field is only in union with "fasts file system" and "own Filesystem" available. Please read you in the documentation to yours hard drives- controller, which worth you here adjust should. For Zorro 3- or Turbokarten-Festplattencontroller is in the rule an worth from "0xFFFFFFFC" good suitable. MaxTransfer Hexadezimale number, with the the maximum Bytezahl for every DMA-transfer fixed is. "A maximum of transfer" is only in union with "fasts file system" and "own Filesystem" available. MaxTransfer can for modern SCSI-controller on "0xFFFFFF" steady become, by IDE-hard drives is however care necessary: self modern IDE-hard drives are often not in the position, blocks greater as 128 KByte in bit to transfer. Here is an worth from "0x1FE00" recommendable - by old IDE-hard drives flips it however from time to time only with "0xFE00". When MaxTransfer to high steady is, can it at copying from great files error give. Glockgröße Filesystem places the Blockgröße of Dateisystems fast (file system block size). Big values bring frequently a Geschwindigkeitsvorteil with he, have but also a certain Platzverlust to the follows, then every file always an ganzzahliges multiple the Blockgröße allocates. With one Blockgröße from 16384 would e.g. Every file at least 16384 bytes acknowledgement, an 16385 byte great file already 32768 bytes, etc. An good composition is it, an Blockgröße from 1024 or 2048 bytes to use. Larger Blockgrößen make only by very great files sense. Reserved blocks in beginning number the blocks in beginning the ausgewählten position, the for DOS reserved are (Reserved blocks at beginning). The Standardwert is 2. In the rule permit no less worth as 2 entered become. Reserved blocks in end number the blocks in end the ausgewählten Partition, the for DOS reserved are (Reserved blocks at week). The Standardwert is 0. In addition stand still following options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: Partition automatic announce places fast, if the Partition to the boot forthwith to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stands, or before the ertsten use with the "Mount"-comand declared become must (eng. "Automount this partition"). No automatic declared partitions able later manual declared become. Be own boat-code allowed the use of benutzerdefinierten Bootladers, e.g. Around the Linux-Bootmanager "Lilo" use to able (eng. "Use custom boot code"). Is this option activates, must you also the number the blocks enter, the the Bootlader uses. Number own boat-blocks see "Nutze own boat-code". When you these Preferences leave will, without the adjustments to save, then choose you "breaking off" (Cancel) from. To the save the new values for the Filesystem go you how follows before: 1. Choose you the field "OK" from. The progam inverts to the Preferences for the Partitionierung back. 2. Choose you there the field "save" (Save) from. The adjustments become on the drive saved. 3. The progam inverts to the Hauptwindow the HDToolbox back. 4.6.8. File system association with help of Einstellwindows to the Dateisystemverwaltung, the she over "Hinzu/update" reach, able you the list the verfügbaren Dateisysteme alter. In these chapter become following functions explained: . Add of new Dateisystems . Discharge of Dateisystems . Re design of existing Dateisystems paging you the Startblidschirm the HDToolbox on, around an the above genannten functions to carry out. Subsequent lead you following operation steps from: 1. Choose you the field "hard drive partitionieren" from. The Preferences to the Partitionierung is displayed. 2. Choose you the field "Hinzu/update..." From. The Preferences to the Dateisystemverwaltung is displayed. Above on the onscreen become the address and the LUN-issue of ausgewählten disk drive displayed. The under displayed list contains all Dateisysteme, the on the ausgewählten drive saved are. For every Filesystem are following data available: identification (hexadezimaler code), version, bigness in byte and Dateisystemname. 4.6.8.1. Add of new Dateisystems paging you the Einstellwindow to the Dateisystemverwaltung on and lead you following operation steps from: 1. Choose you the field "Filesystem add..." From. It opens he an Dateiauswahlwindow. 2. Give you the complete path for the new Filesystem an or. Use you the Dateiauswahlwindow, around the Filesystem to choose. Confirm you the Auswahlwindow with "OK". 3. The progam inverts to the window for the Dateisystemverwaltung back. Give you now under "identification" an convenient identification an. Typical values are: "0x444F5303" ("DOS/03") for FastFilesystem from AmigaOS, "0x50465303" ("PFS/03") for ProfessionalFilesystem and "0x53465301" ("SFS/01") for SmartFilesystem. Reading you please also the hint to yours Filesystem! 4. Choose you also here the field "OK" from. The progam inverts subsequently to the window for the Partitionierung back. 5. Choose you here the field "save" from. The adjustments become saved and the progam inverts to the Startbildschirm the HDToolbox back. 4.6.8.2. Discharge of Dateisystems paging you the Einstellwindow to the Dateisystemverwaltung on and lead you following operation steps from: 1. Choose you the Filesystem from, the excluded become shall. The picked Filesystem is highlighted. Click you to the sampling of other Dateisystems the desired on. 2. Choose you the field "Filesystem clean" from. The picked Filesystem appear not more on the onscreen. 3. Choose you now the field "OK" from. The progam inverts to the onscreen for the Partitionierung back. 4. Choose you on the onscreen to the Partitionierung the field "save" from. The adjustments become saved and the progam inverts to the Hauptbildschirm the HDToolbox back. 4.6.8.3. Update of existing Dateisystems paging you the Einstellwindow to the Dateisystemverwaltung on and lead you following operation steps from: 1. Choose you the field "Filesystem renew..." From. An small window is displayed. 2. Give you the complete path for the new version of Dateisystems an or. Use you the Dateiauswahlwindow, around the Filesystem to choose. Confirm you the Auswahlwindow with "OK". 3. The progam inverts to the onscreen for the Partitionierung züruck. Quitting you this with "OK". 4. The progam inverts to the window for the Partitionierung back. Choose you now the field "save" from. The adjustments become saved and the progam inverts to the Hauptwindow the HDToolbox back. 4.6.8.4. Error handling switching you the calculator from. Check you, if all cable and the hard drive/waiting duly on the AMIGA connected are. Symptom is the hard drive with help of program HDToolbox configured and the system before formatting of hard drive new restarted, appear the Festplattenpiktogramm where appropriate. Not on the onscreen "Workbench". Processing undoing you an Shell and give you the following for every Partition an: you Partitionsname: after this able you every Partition with help from AmigaDOS reformat. Symptom no one DOS-hard drive in drive 1. Oneness appear on onscreen "Workbench" as "no formated". Account hard drive is prepared, but not formated. Processing formatting you the hard drive from the "Workbench" or the "Shell" from. Symptom with the activating of intrasystem from the hard drive from is the data medium for the Workbench requisited. Processing squeeze you to the Neustarten of intrasystem following key combination: + . Is the Workbench furthermore requisited, must you where appropriate. The hard drive new base on. 4.7. The Icon-editor "IconEdit" (off OS3.5) IconEdit is an progam to the Erstellen and Bearbeiten from pictograms (Icons). With it able you the Workbench yours request appropriate fashion, in that you existing pictograms alter or new create. IconEdit was also already before OS3.5. Component the Workbench, however was the old version really umkomfortabel and offered hardly functions to the time. The window from IconEdit is dreigeteilt. In lefthand area is the Bearbeitungswindow in the one Pktogramme edit or new create can. In middle area are the display panels "normal" and "Ausgewählt", which the Icons in hers real bigness represent, over that find he the Malwerkzeuge (e.g. For circle, Rechtek, straight). In right part are the Farbtabelle and the FarbPreferences. The both display panels "normal" and "Ausgewählt" are so-called "AppWindows", so that you to the shop from files the accompanying pictograms in the field consider and he the use from menu save able. "AppWindows" become in chapter 3.3.2 of original-Workbench-manual page beschriben. When you the display panel "normal" aklicken, is there also the for the Icon picked image displayed, so you the Auswahltaste pressed hold. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- with IconEdit able you also every Icon an additional image allocate, the on computer uses is, the still not with AmigaOS 3.5 endowed are. For this serves the menu "OS3.5 Icon"/"old Icon", the he direct over the Zeichenfläche is. The under "OS3.5 Icon" defined image is on OS3.5-intersystem uses, the andeerer on intersystem with OS3.1 or elders versions of AmigaOS. 4.7.1. Processing field in these field able Sit with help the mouse pictograms chart. Squeeze you the Auswahltaste (left Maustaste), with it an pixel in the ausgewählten farbe appear. Holding you to the drawing the Auswahltaste pressed and postpone you the mouse. In Bearbeitungsfeld takes the Mauspfeil the form of reticles on. The new pixel appear in the centre of reticles. Below the Titelleiste above in the centre of window IconEdit appear the pixel-coordinates (e.g. "X:20, Y:24", which the relative position of reticles in bezug on the left upper corner show. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ draw you to the shop of Icon the desired Icon easy in the Bearbeitungsfeld. 4.7.1.1. Selection "normal"/"Ausgewählt" simple pictograms go through from only a ("normal") image. Many pictograms change but you look at sampling. To this needs one an second Icon, the here with "Ausgewählt" designates is. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- The selection "normal"/"Ausgewählt" certain, which the both images in the Bearbeitungswindow personated is. 4.7.2. Colour selection field here is the actual Zeichenfarbe picked. Except for the usual method the Farbauswahl (Anklicken the wished colour with the Auswahltaste) able you two colors simultaneous choose. Those colors become for the Füllmuster, filled circle and filled rectangles uses. Choose you to the use the Füllmuster first of all the first colour from. Holding you adjacent the shift key pressed and choose you the second colour from. The button bar with the different Füllmustern changes then appropriate the representation, so that the both gewählten colors to see are. Below of Farbauswahlfeldes is he the field "reproducible copy". The here incorporated colour is as transparent discusses. Thereby appears the respective ones Workbench-background through this places of Icons. Without transparency would be the Icons always rectangularly blocks. Around an appointed colour (mostly the colour, the in the Hindergrund of Icons lies) as diaphanous to determine click you first on the colour and then on the field next to "reproducible copy". An click on the "transparency"- field deactivated the transparency again. 4.7.3. The tools 4.7.3.1. Full pattern-symbols with these symbol able you the Füllmuster choose, the for getüllte rectangles, filled circle and the Füllwerkzeug uses is. 4.7.3.2. Freehand drawing-symbol The function (first Icon in the second row) is to the expeditious drawing or. To the set individual pixel thought. With the expeditious drawing are not unconditional all points bound. 4.7.3.3. Freehand lines-symbol those function (first Icon in the third row) complies the Freihandzeichnen, however become here all points bound. That can at expeditious time under circumstance to delays by the advertisement the line lead. 4.7.3.4. Circle-symbol walk you how follows before, around a circle or an Oval to chart: 1. Choose you the Kreissymbol from. 2. Show you in the Bearbeitungsfeld on the place, on the he the center the Ellpise find shall. Holding you the Auswahltaste (left Maustaste) gedrüvkt and postpone you the mouse. 3. Letting you the Auswahltaste loose, as soon as the desired bigness and form displayed is. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when you at mounting the elipse the shift key pressed hold, is an circle designed. 4.7.3.5. More filled circle-symbol those function complies the normal circle-function, however become the circle or. Ovals with the actual Füllmuster filled. 4.7.3.6. Rectangle-symbol walk you to the drawing of oblong how follows before: 1. Choose you the rectangle-symbol from. 2. Show you in the Bearbeitungsfeld on the place, on the he an corner of oblong find shall. Holding you the Auswahltaste pressed and postpone you the mouse. 3. Letting you the Auswahltaste loose, as soon as the rectangle the desired bigness and form attains has. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when you at mounting of oblong the shift key pressed hold, is an square designed. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when you 3D-rectangles chart will (e.g. The light elevated performing effect, the the Workbench uses), must you at drawing of oblong an the both -buttons pressed hold. The left and upper edge become then in the actual colour designed, the rights and the bottom edge in the colour, the at present as second colour for the Füllmuster elective is. 4.7.3.7. Filled rectangle-symbol sequels you the they strode for normal rectangles, around an filled rectangle or square to produce; by it is the actual Füllmuster uses. 4.7.3.8. Lines symbol walk you to the drawing one straight line how follows before: 1. Choose you the Liniensymbol from. 2. Show you in the Bearbeitungsfeld on the place, on the the line start shall. 3. Holding you the Auswahltaste pressed. 4. Relocating you the mouse, till the Mauspfeil the desired Liniendende attains. 5. Letting you the Auswahltaste loose. 4.7.3.9. Colt-symbol with this is an area of Bearbeitungsfelds with the ausgewählten colour fill. Choose you the colt-symbol from and click you in a area on. This is now with the actual colour filling. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- over the colt-symbol able you no already gemusterten expanses fill. With more corresponding Farbauswahl able she however uniform Farbbereiche with a the other Füllmuster fill. 4.7.3.10. Rescinded-symbol (Undo) with this is the last action rescinded made, the you with the mouse carried out have. 4.7.3.11. Reconstitute-symbol (Redo) those function brings about the converse the "Rückgängig"-function, stands so the old condition before the invocation again here. 4.7.3.12. Discharge-symbol with "discharge" able you the complete content of Bearbeitungsfeldes clean. The Bearbeitungsfeld is by it with the ausgewählten colour filling. 4.7.3.13. Pipettes-symbol with the "pipette" able you the colour of Bildpunktes to the actual colour make. Choose you the pipettes-function from and click you in the Bearbeitungswindow on the pixel, of it colour you to the actual Malfarbe make want. 4.7.3.14. Arrow-symbols with the arrow-symbol able you the image in the Bearbeitungsfeld in the respective ones direction postpone. With these function leave he screen content within of Bearbeitungswindows postpone around she better in the general view to place. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- Bildteile, the from the area of Bearbeitungsfeldes shoved become, go lost. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ squeeze you to the pixelweisen relocating of picture the obversely Cursortaste. 4.7.4. The menu 4.7.4.1. Menu "project" with help the menu items in the menu "project" able you Icon-files open and computer store. New it loads for the to the time picked Icon-kind the default-Icon. The Icon-kind is in the menu "kind" fixed. Were the adjustments in the window not saved, become you in a Dialogwindow asked, if she saved become will. Undoing it opens an existing pictograms-file. In a Dateiauswahl-window become you to the input of file names requested. In these Auswahlwindow become only the names the verfügbaren drawers and ".info"-files displayed. Widerherstellen it opens the at last stored version the Icon- file. Thereby go all adjustments lost, the ever since the last memory of Icon made become. Was the Icon still not saved, so leaves he these menu item also not invoice. Save Speichert an existing Piktogrammdatei. Files with the same names become überschieben. In these fall goes the ahead created Icon lost. Save as Dient to the details of new file names for the actual image. In a Dateiauswahlwindow become you to the input the Zieldatei for the edited Icon requested. On this wise man avoid you the overwriting one existing Piktogrammdatei. Save as Speichert the actual image as default-Icon for Vorgabepiktogramm the to the time picked Icon-kind. This image is as pattern for every new Icon or. Pseudo- Icon these kind uses and for all pictograms, the with help of menu item "new" in the menu "project" created become. Quitting Dient to the quitting of program IconEdit. Was the actual image not saved, become you a Dialogwindow asked, if the image before quitting of program saved become shall. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when you an drawers-Icon create and adjacent "save as Vorgabepiktogramm" choose, is this Icon by selection of Workbench-menu item "content show/all files" to the representation from drawers without own Icon uses. 4.7.4.2. Menu "Bearbeiten" The menu items in the menu "Bearbeiten" enable it you, IFF-ILBM-files from the clipboard (eng. "Clipboard") to import, the with other Zeichenprogrammen created become. Clipboard Löscht the image in the Bearbeitungsfeld and copied it in the clipboard. Copying Kopiert the image in the Bearbeitungsfeld in the clipboard. Integrate Kopiert an image from the clipboard out in the Bearbeitungsfeld. With it is the actual content of Bearbeitungsfeld compensates. Discharge Löscht the image in the Bearbeitungsfeld. Formation the data ahead not saved, become she final excluded. Withdrawals force the last procedure rescinded. Reconstitute Kehrt the function from "Wiederrufen" around and stands so the condition in front of it again here. Tie-clip open Kopiert an existing IFF-ILBM-file in the clipboard. In a Dateiauswahlwindow become you requested, the names the to öffnenden file to enter. Subsequent able you the menu item "Einfügen" use. Tie-clip computer store Speichert the actual content the clipboard in as... The specified file. Tie-clip show shows the content the clipboard on. With it is the progam "MultiView" uses. Stands the progam "MultiView" not to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, can this function not invoked become. 4.7.4.3. Menu "kind" over the menu items in the menu "kind" able you the kind of Icon give, the changes or. Created become shall. Disk Disk-pictograms, the in the Workbench-window displayed become. Drawer drawers-pictograms, the in a data medium- window displayed become, e.g. The drawers "utilities" (aid programs) and "tools" (program's). Progam progam-pictograms, e.g. Calculator (pocket calculator), Clock (clock) or IconEdit. Project project-pictograms for files, the with a progam created become, e.g. Pictograms, the he in the drawers of list "Storage" (hoard) find. Paperbasket Icon for the paperbasket. 4.7.4.4. Menu "emphasizing" over the points in the menu "emphasizing" able you the look from ausgewählten pictograms fix. Reverse with the Anklicken of Icon become all colors reverse personated. When you beispielweise the default Workbench-colors use and the Icon in an gray field skirted is, alternates the background color from grey to blue. Those option is only in the mode "old Icon" available. Except for background with the Anklicken of Icon become the colors of Icons, but not the background color, inverse. When you for instance the default Workbench- colors use and the Icon in an gray field skirted is, stays the background to selection of Icon gray. Those option is likewise only in the mode "old Icon" available. Alternative image allowed the use of second picture for the "ausgewählten" condition of Icon at sampling with the mouse. With the drawers-pictograms the Workbench acts it he e.g. Around such pictograms: with the Anklicken of drawers-symbol is the image one geöffneten only by "OS3.5 pictograms" possible. 4.7.4.5. Menu "images" over the points of menu "images" able you the images in the Anzeigefeldern "Noirmal" and "Ausgewählt" exchange and IFF-ILBM-images import, the with other Grafikprogrammen created become. Swapping Tauscht the images in the Anzeigefeldern "normal" and "Ausgewählt" together from. Copying The functionality these option hangs from ausgewählten Druckknopfsymbol off. Is "normal" adjusted, so is the "normal" image to "Ausgewählt" copied. Is "Ausgewählt" adjusted, so is the "picked" image to "normal" copied. Vorgabepiktogramm it loads an standard-Icon in the Bearbeitungsfeld. Subsequent able you the new Icon on basis this standard-Icon create. Shop it loads ahead stored images, without the names of to editierenden Icon to alter. As soon as you on the Mrnüpunkt "landing" show, is an submenu displayed (braised.U's.). Save as image Speichert an image as standard-IFF-ILBM-file, not as Icon. Widerherstellen Stellt the settings of window IconEdit again here, the by undoing of window or. Before selection from "new" or "undoing" defaulted were. The menu item "images/shop" contains following sub-dots: IFF-image it loads ever to activated symbol an with a other progam created IFF-ILBM-file in the display panel "normal" or "Ausgewählt". Norm image... It loads from angegebenen Icon the not "picked" image ever to activated stress knopfsymbol in the display panel "norm" or "Ausgewählt". That complies the draw of Icon in of the both field. Ausgewähltes it loads from angegebenen Icon the "picked" image image... Ever to activated tast in the display panel "norm" or "Ausgewählte". Both images... It loads from angegebenen Icon the "normal" and the "picked" image ind the accordingly field. 4.7.4.6. Menu "extras" with the points of menu "extras" able you another useful functions of rogramms IconEdit ctrl. Larger Vergrößert the Zeichenfläche from IconEdit, the already Zeichenfläche painted image stays by it unchanged and is he in the lefthand upper corner the amplified Zeichenfläche. Less Verkleinert the Zeichenfläche from IconEdit. With it is Zeichenfläche the surface from on the right and back here belittles. Shall through the invocation this menu item the Zeichenfläche so small become, that no place more for the at present edited Icon existing would, so opens he an Dialogwindow, that around confirmation or breaking-off of process begs. Fractional Verkleinert the Zeichenfläche, so that the raked and Zeichenfläche bottom edge of Icon each with the right and bottom edge the Zeichenfläche coincide. Automat. Above Verschiebt the image in the upper left corner of left Bearbeitungsfeldes. Glüheffekt this menu item provides the Icon automatic add with a Glüheffekt, how he by the standard- pictograms from OS3.5 uses is. Frameless when you these menu item activate, so is the Icon without edge conserved. 4.7.4.7. Menu "options" with help the menu items in the menu "options" able you different settings for the progam IconEdit give. Grid use? With selection these option is every one pixel in the Bearbeitungsfeld individual displayed and is with the background color skirted. Is this option not activates, become the pixel übergangslos displayed. With default setting is the option aktivieirt. Optimized with selection these option is the Transparenzfarbe computer store to possibility the Farbnummer naught allocated and all not use colors become from the palette distant. Pictograms with selection these option is an Icon for every produce? IFF-Pinseldatei saved, the with the menu item "save as image" created is. Is this option not activates, is no Icon saved. With default setting become pictograms saved. Farbmodell in these submenu able you auswahlen, if the Farbregler to the tuning the colors the RGB- or the HSB-Farbmodell use shall. Options computer store Speichert all actual settings, including the bigness and position of Icon Edit- and Dateiauswahl- window as soon as all settings from menu items. 4.7.5. Tees (Tooltypes) some Eingenschaften of IconEdit leave he already at activating activate. Around this adjust choose you the IconEdit-Icon on and choose in the Workbench-menu "pictograms" the point "informations show". Exchange you now on the Karteireiter "Icon", then able you the tees direct in the field "tees" fill out. The following tees become from progam IconEdit bolstered: PUBSCREEN= gives because öffentlichen onscreen (eng. "Oeffentlich screen") on, on the IconEdit is window open shall. TEMPLATE= the path to the pictograms, the from the function "stencil use" charged become. HSB for the Farbregler is the HSB-Farbmodell uses. OPTIMIZE with the securing the pictograms is the palette optimized. CLIPUNIT= gives the to appropriating clipboard-oneness on. The Standardwert is 0. XMAG= Verbreitert the Bearbeitungsfeld. You able values between 4 and 16 enter. The Standardwert is 4. YMAG= it leads to one greater height of Bearbeitungsfeldes. You able values between 4 and 16 enter. The Standardwert is 4. LEFTEDGE= gives the position the lefthand edge of Editorwindows on. TOPEDGE= gives the position the upper edge of Editorwindows on. SHOWCLIP= gives the complete path to the auxiliary routine on, the to the announcement the clipboard serves. The Standardpfad is "SYS:utilities/Multiview". NOICONS Deaktiviert the building from pictograms at save from files, e.g. At save one file as IFF-Pinseldatei. NOGRID Deaktiviert the grid in the Bearbeitungsfeld. ICONDRAWER= gives the Standardschublade on, the in Dateiauswahlwindown displayed is, the to selection the menu items "undoing" and "save as" in the menu "project" appear. ILBMDRAWER= gives the Standardschublade on, the in Dateiauswahlwindown displayed is, the to selection the menu items "shop" and "save" in the menu "images" appear. CLIPDRAWER= gives the Standardschublade on, the Dateiauswahlwindown displayed is, the to selection the menu items "undoing tie-clip" and "save tie-clip as" in the menu "Bearbeiten" appear. ALTDRAWER= gives the Standardschublade on, the in Dateiauswahlwindown displayed is, the to selection the menu item "shop" in the menu "images" appear. 4.8. IomegaTools "IomegaTools" is an progam to the accociation from ZIP- and JAZ-disk drive the firm Iomega. "IomegaTools" offers under other following functions: . Set or remove of Schreibschutzes of medium . Ejection of medium . Formatting of medium . Informations over drive and ein inserted vehicle . Re design the disk drive-config "IomegaTools" bolstered complete the SCSI-versions following Iomega- drives, where all familiarize SCSI-Hostadapter also from "IomegaTools" bolstered become. . ZIP 100 . ZIP 250 . JAZ 1Gb . JAZ 2Gb ATAPI-and Parallelport-versions the above aufgeführten Iomega-drives become on principle also bolstered, when the driver of use Inferfacve-adapter (IDE-Hostadapter or Parallelport- Schnittstellenkarte) the HDSCSICMD-Betriebssytstem-interface bolstered or emulated. They are you he not sure, if the by you inferface-adapter the fall is turn you he on the fabricator of adapter. A guarantee for the function with ATAPI- or Parallelport- disk drive can but in not fall given become. "IomegaTools" bolstered and acknowledges all Amiga-Dateisystems, the conformist programmed become, e.g. FAT95, CrossDOS, CrossMAC etc. 4.8.1. The installing IomegaTools is by the installing from AmigaOS 3.9 mitinstalliert. With it attempted the installing-script, the config of interface driver un of disk drive independent carry out. Worse luck gives it SCSI-Hostadapter, by those the automated config must you the installing-script an little "on the bounds help". You must then the names of interfaces-driver (Device, e.g. "1230scsi.device") and the disk drive-issue (Unit, e.g. "5") from hand enter. In general is sufficient it but, the vorgeshlagene configurations to accepting. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- shall you the manual config Vorziehen or the automated config in spite of your support the drive not configure able, fesen you please in the "IomegaTools"-Guide on the "AmigaOS 3.9"-CD the section "installing". There find you onward informations to the config and support by Konfigurationsproblemen. 4.8.2. The handling The Iomega-tools find he in the directory "tools". Towards the activating appear the "IomegaTools"-window on the Workbench. In these window find you the control elements from "IomegaTools". When you the window again again close, stays "IomegaTools" furthermore active. You able the "IomegaTools"-window anytime with one key combination again open. Standard is for it the combination "++" adjusted. Those key combination is free definable ("IomegaTools" is an "Commodity", info over that find you in the chapter "Commodities"). --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when the "IomegaTools"-window not by every restart yours arithmetician on the Workbench appear shall, licken you once in the title-ledge of "IomegaTools"-window and choose you from the menu "settings" the menu item "Programmeinstellungen". Remove you the tick before "with the boot appear". You should "IomegaTools" but not from the directory "WBStartup" remove, around the window not more on the Workbench to have, then "IomegaTools" to every restart yours intrasystem the from you gewählten Laufwerkseinstellungen to the drive transmits (am "settings" in these hint). The Programmwindow contains nine switch and an list the verfügbaren Iomega-drives. Possibly are some the switch in "Geisterschrift" personated. In these fall is in the gewählten drive no vehicle inlaid. As soon as you in this drive an vehicle inserting, become the switch normal personated and are then unsuitable. 4.8.3. Ver-/unlock it opens he an window with the title "media ver-/unbolt", the you following options offer: "write protection" - Aktiviert the write protection for the one insert vehicle, like the write protection-quarter-wave contact piston the herkömmlichen diskette. You able electively an keyword give, that by a späteren pick up of Schreibschutzes again entered become must. On this wise man able you the vehicle in front of it protect, from meddlers with data described to become. Trespasser user able on this vehicle then only still reading seize. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- objections you but, that you self likewise only still from these vehicle read and not thereupon computer store able, when you the keyword forget should! "Harvest- and write protection" - Aktiviert sowohol the write protection as also a Leseschutz. The vehicle appear then as "BATH" on the Workbench and it can in no one wise man thereupon accessed become, till the harvest-/ write protection temporary abrogated is (am back) or the cover complete distant is. The details of keyword is here unconditional needed, around these cover to activate (even so natural by the distance of protection, equal if temporary or final. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- objections you also here: without the keyword is an such deschütztes vehicle in no one wise man more usable! The cover leaves he in the fall, that you the keyword forget have, only still through an formatting of medium again remove, where then but all on the vehicle store data get lost! "Transient unbolt" - credit you the "write protection" with or without keyword or the "harvest-/write protection" for the inlaid vehicle activates, can the obversely cover, to input of keyword, with these function temporary abrogated become. The respective ones cover of medium is then so long deactivated, how he the vehicle in the drive is. Is the vehicle ejected (by "IomegaTools" or manual), is the respective ones cover of medium at the moment again active! "Vehicle unbolt" - Entfernt the "write protection" or "harvest-/ write protection" everlasting from vehicle. You have thereafter again full intervention on the vehicle (reading and writing), also when the vehicle from the drive ejected is. Credit you "harvest-/write protection" or "write protection" with keyword on the vehicle activates, must you natural here the keyword with give, around the cover to lift. "Keyword alter" - Ist the one insert vehicle with a keyword protected, the you gladly alter want, able you an new keyword enter. At first must you the momentary valid keyword for the vehicle enter and thereafter then the new keyword. When the vehicle with "write protection" with keyword secured is, and you the "write protection" without keyword activate want, leave you the input line for the new keyword easy empty. 4.8.4. Diskettes formatting here able you the one insert vehicle in the gewählten Iomega-drive reformat. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ attention: with these procedure go all on the vehicle store data irrevocable lost! Convince you he, the no for you important data on the one insert vehicle saved are! Then the media for ZIP-/JAZ-drives only for PC or Mac preformats extradited become, is it necessary, an "ladenfrisches" vehicle first with the Amiga new to reformat. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ shall you "CrossDOS" or an alike PC-format-compatible Filesystem on you Amiga installed have, able you the new vehicle also without Neuformatierung use. Here gives it but an small restriction: ever to employed Filesystem can the length the file names on 8 sign plus 3 sign for the sucked. "Extension" confined is. Shall you "CrossMAC" or an other macintosh-compatible Filesystem installed have, able you for macintosh preformatted media likewise without Neuformatierung use. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- objections you but, that an exchange such media with a other Amiga-owner to difficulties lead can, when these no corresponding Filesystem on its Amiga installed has! Normally should you new media hence first once new reformat, before you data with other user exchange. "Newer Diskettenname" - here able you a names for the vehicle enter. The name is also from operating system required, around by several resemble disk drive the one insert media from each other distinguish to able. Might assign you hence if possible unique and meaningful names for the media. The names able also you by the order and Archivierung your data useful is. "Dos type" - you able the one insert vehicle with a Filesystem your choice reformat. Those list offers you the on you Amiga installed Dateisysteme to the selection on. In normal case is "FFS Intl." The correct choice and for the verschiedensten purpose complete insufficient. Shall you more Partition on the vehicle lay against will, read you please in the "IomegaTools"-Guide the section "formatting". There find you going on informations to the themes "Dateisysteme", "partitions" and also informations to possible. Existing austerities by the formatting. "Garbage can lay against" - fault you this option with a tick, around to the formatting an "garbage can"-directory on the vehicle lay against to leave (am also Workbench-guide, chapter "formatting"). "Schnellformatierung" - those kind the formatting serves only by preformatted media. The formatting is here essential faster carried out, as by the other kinds the formatting. Severe taken is only the Verzeichnisstruktur excluded and the Diskettenname changes. With a new vehicle is the Schnellformatierung insufficient, then the media already preformats extradited become. "Formatting without checking" - the one insert vehicle is complete formated. It is not supervised, if the formatting all sectors of medium error-free follow is. The formatting without checking goes some faster as with checking, then every one formatted sector not still once to the checking read in is. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- shall one the formatted sectors but uncommitted is, get you over that no error message! You should this kind the formatting hence only then choose, when you he sure are, that the one insert vehicle no surfaces-error show. Objections you also, that by a uncommitted formatted vehicle your data possibly changed become able, also when you at Schreibvorgang no error message get! From these ground should you only "formatting with checking" choose. "Formatting with checking" - the one insert vehicle is complete formated and the formatting the separate sectors supervised. Shall one the sectors uncommitted formated been is, get you an error message with the possibility, the procedure for these sector to repeat. Was the sector to a or several wider attempts faultless formated, carts "IomegaTools" with the formatting the by the way sectors independent forth. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- shall the formatting of sector whole fail, ought you the vehicle not more use! Your data able on a such vehicle, in spite of successful formatting the other sectors of medium, complete unforeseeable changed become or even whole lost go! Those kind the formatting lasts longer as the formatting without checking, then every one sector of medium to the formatting still once read in is. 4.8.5. Settings in these window able you different settings for you ZIP-/JAZ- drive carry out and everlasting computer store. "Writing with checking" - with every Schreibvorgang is supervised, if the data correct on the vehicle saved become. Then herewith the data to the eingentlichen Schreibvorgang to the checking still einaml read in become, lasts the Schreibvorgang altogether longer. The (relative small) delay should you your data but worth is. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- to the time serves this option reliable only with JAZ-disk drive. On ZIP-drives has this option at present no Enfluß. "Drive park in..." - With these Schieberegler able you the time adjust, to the the elective drive in the "Standby"-mode deactivates. Is from the drive for the duration the eingestellten time not accessed, is the rotation of medium stopped and the authoring-/ Leseköpfe become in the park-position go. In these condition used up the drive an bit few stream and the life from vehicle and drive is lengthened. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ Normalerweise runs the drive independent again on, when thereupon accessed is. Dependent from use Hostadapter and Laufwerkstyp can it but come forward, that the drive not independent again starts. In these fall use you please the switch "drive commence" in the "IomegaTools"-Hauptwindow. "Save", "Benutzen", "breaking off" - you able the vorgenommenen settings computer store, use (without to computer store) or the attitude abbort (it worth then the previous settings again). --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- consider you, that the settings not on the vehicle or in the drive saved become, but on the boat-drives yours intrasystem (e.g. Hard drive) discarded become. From these ground ought "IomegaTools" also by every restart automatic restarted become, then it the on you boat- drive off place settings for the Iomega-drives at boot ausliest and on the respective ones drives transmits. 4.8.6. Pose with these switch is the vehicle direct from the in the list gewählten drive ejected. 4.8.7. Diskettes status an window is open, the different informations over the one insert vehicle displayed. In separate are the following informations: "capacity" - The total capacity of one insert medium in block. An block (sector) of ZIP-/JAZ-medium contains normally 512 bytes. Is here e.g. "196608 blocks" displayed, has the vehicle so an total capacity from 96Mb. "Diskettenbelegung" - to the time on the vehicle off place data in percent the total capacity. Is here e.g. 56% displayed, are as much percent the total capacity of vehicle already described and you able still 44% the total capacity of medium on data on the vehicle computer store. "Current issue" - a Identifikationsnummer of medium, the by the formatting of medium be taken is. "Diskettentyp" - it is specified, which vehicle to the time in the gewählten drive inlaid is. Interesting is this info particularly then, when you e.g. An ZIP 250-drive possession and next to the 250Mb-media also still older 100Mb-media substitute. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ credit you forget, which kind from vehicle you inlaid have, need you it not auszuwerfen and renewed einzulegen, around the kind of medium to find. Letting you he easy the Diskettenstatus show! "Dos type" - here is the name of on the vehicle use Dateisystems displayed, e.g. "FFS Intl." Or "MS-DOS MSH" etc. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ is an ein inserted vehicle on the Workbench with "BATH" or "????" Displayed, so able you with help the informations of "Diskettenstatus" ascertain, if the vehicle überhaupft formated is or with which Filesystem it formated became. "Present condition", "lingering lifetime" - those announcement give an rough presentation of it, how long the one insert vehicle still usable is. The advertisement "Jetziger condition" gives information over that, how many the sectors (in percent the total number the sectors of medium) from drive self as uncommitted recognized become and by Schreibvorgängen not more used become. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- those defective sectors have not unconditional some with defective sectors to do, the by one formatting of medium as uncommitted displayed become. The Iomega-drives have, like how hard drives, the ability, faulty sectors independent to recognize. Those sectors become in an sucked. "Bath block"-list registered and from drive not more accessed. The Filesystem yours Amiga gets from alledem nothing with and goes from a fehlerfreien vehicle from. In normal firm works he the also not on the data integrity from, then the drive self all grips on this defective sectors suppresses. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- The advertisement "lingering lifetime" shows real only very coarse on, how long the vehicle to thought from Iomega still einwandrei serves. The computation the life follow on base the till now recognized defective sectors in bezug on the past time ever since the last Low-levels-formatting. In general hold the media by good storage and more careful processing very long. 4.8.8. Drive status "fabricator", "Laufwerkstyp", "ROM version", "ROM date" - here become details to the gewählten drive displayed. Normally are this informations not from signification for the operator and only in the fall from physical Schwierigkeitem with the drive from benefit (e.g. Garantiefall, repair etc.). "AmigaOS driver" - here find you the names of driver yours Hostadapters (e.g. "1230scsi.device"). "AmigaOS oneness" - an SCSI-Hostadapter can till to 7 drives head on, the with help the "Unit number" (oneness-issue) discriminated become. Here could by a ZIP-drive e.g. "5" or "6" stand, then an this both numbers in ZIP-drive adjustable is. The momentary in drive adjusted issue is here displayed. "Treiberversion" - The version number of driver for yours Hostadapter. "Selftest commence" - with these switch able you the eingebauten Sebsttest yours ZIP-/JAZ-disk drive commence. You get to conclusion this process an report over issue or washout of test. 4.8.9. Drive activating with these switch able you an ZIP-/JAZ-drive, that he in the "Standby"-mode is, again "arouse". The vehicle is again in rotation put and the authoring-/Leseköpfe over the vehicle go. It can a instant last, till the drive again ready is. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ this switch must you also actuate, when the drive to the eingestellten time under "drive park in..." Self in the "Standby"- mode gechaltet has and by a authoring-/read access not independent again starts. 4.8.10. Drive parking with these switch able you the elective drive "from hand" in the "Standby"-mode toggle. The function is alike the "drive park in...", Has but immediate effect. The rotation of medium is forthwith stopped and the authoring-/Leseköpfe in the Parkposition go. 4.8.11. Help with these switch able you the Online-help from "IomegaTools" in the AmigaGuide-format invoice. Here find itself also onward informations to "IomegaTools" and ZIP-/JAZ-disk drive, e.g. Partitionierung from media, austerities the use Dateisysteme, tips and artifices in the social intercourse with the Iomega-disk drive on different SCSI- Hostadaptern etc. 4.8.12. The menu from "IomegaTools" the Hauptwindow from "IomegaTools" offers you self-evident also an menu with different options. It follows an recital the separate menu and an clarification the menu items. 4.8.12.1. Menu "project" "SCSI hardware comb" - it starts an quest to the in SCSI-Hostadapter ageschlossenen device. Displayed become all gefundenen ZIP-/JAZ- drives. Useful is these menu item particularly then, when you first an new drive connected have and of it oneness-issue not know. "Laufwerksliste comb" - lists all ZIP-/JAZ-drives on, the on you SCSI-Hostadapter connected are. "Settings new load" - with this able you the at last store settings again load, e.g. After you chops and changes on the time till to the parking carried out have, the attitude to the Ausprobieren "used" have and then however rather again the previous attitude use want. "Ikonifizieren" - the Programmwindow is belittles and as Icon on the Workbench discarded. Through a Doppelklick on this Icon able you the window from "IomegaTools" again open. "Conceal" - the Programmwindow is closed. "IomegaTools" stays but furthermore active and can with help the from you gewählten or the standard default key combination again open become. "Termination" - Beendet "IomegaTools" final. You able the angeschlossenen Iomega-drives self-evident furthermore use how usual, but able you no settings on the disk drive carry out, so "IomegaTools" not again restarted is. 4.8.12.2. Menu "window" here find you all switch of Hauptwindows still once as menu items. The functions these menu items distinguish he not from those the switch, hence become we here thereupon forego, the separate points still once to explain. 4.8.12.3. Menu "settings" this menu bestitzt only a only one menu item, and sure the point "Programmeinstellungen". Here opens he an further window, in the you programmspezifische settings for "IomegaTools" carry out able, e.g. The behavior of Hauptwindows at run (undoing or Verbergen) and some more. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- some the options able he on the behavior of program in the compatibility with drive and SCSI-Hostadapter very negative take! The special functions become here from these ground not discusses. Shall you despite that some the "dangerous" settings change will, schalgen you please in the "IomegaTools"-Guide on the AmigaOS 3.9-CD in the Kapiutel "Programmeinstellungen" to, around more over this options and her effect to hear. "Premonitions show" - when you an function accomplish want, the he possibly adverse on your data take can, is an warning displayed, the you over existing ventures by the realisation the gewählten function aufklärt. With these switch able you this premonitions on- or deactivate. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- you should the premonitions only then deactivate, when you whole exactly know, how the separate functions from "IomegaTools" work! Many a one these functions able he immediate on the integrity your data take and should hence with Bedacht used become! "As Icon open" - this switch affect the behavior from "IomegaTools" at first boot of program, like how "with the boot appear". "IomegaTools" is, when "as Icon open" with a tick provide is, direct to the boot "Ikonifiziert" and appear then as Icon on the Workbench. You able then the Programmwindow, how above already explains, with a Doppelklick on the Icon open. "Onscreen" - here able you the names of so-called "öffenlichen screen" (Public Screen) give, on the the window from "IomegaTools" open become shall. Reading you there to also in the Workbench- guide the chapter over screens on the Amiga. There is in the individuals explains, what public screens are and how one she arranges. "Auswurfverzögerung" - here able you an space of time in 50stel seconds give, the from "IomegaTools" bided is, around you Iomega- drive time to the ejection of medium to give. With the most SCSI- Hostadapter-drive-combinations ought proper also an "0" suffice, but one can never careful enough is. When the emission the media for you to long lasts, try you it with a low worth in these input line. "Startverzögerung", "Schreibverzögerung", "Sperrverzögerung" - here necessary the same how by the "Auswurfverzögerung". "Left edge", "waiter edge" - here able you the position of "IomegaTools"-window on the onscreen give. An worth "-1" in these input line brings about, that he "IomegaTools" self an advantageous position for is window on the onscreen seeks. The position of window is in Bildpunkten, outgoing from the lefthand upper corner of screen specified. "Icon X position", "Icon Y position" - The same function how at Hauptwindow from "IomegaTools", where you here but the position of Icon give able, the to invocation from "Verbergen" in the menu "project" on the Workbench appear. Also here brings about the input from "-1" in both input line, that he "IomegaTools" self an advantageous position for the Icon seeks. "With the boot appear" - with these switch able you fix, if the window from "IomegaTools" at boot open become shall, or if he "IomegaTools" direct to the boot in the "foothills"-mode happens. Is here an tick to see, appear the Programmwindow to the first boot from "IomegaTools" on the Workbench or the from you gewählten öffentlichen onscreen. Remove you the tick, when you the "IomegaTools"-window rather by need with the key combination (CX Tastenbefehl) open want. "CX priority" - here ought an "0" stand. It brings in the general no advantages, the here standing worth to change. "CX key combination" - here able you the key combination define, the the "IomegaTools"-window opens, when he "IomegaTools" in the "Verbergen"-condition is. The already incorporated standard- key combination "++ means, that you the - key", the -key and the key simultaneous press must, around the Programmwindow from "IomegaTools" to open. "Save", "Benutzen", "breaking off" - the has usual able you the here vorgenommenen settings everlasting computer store, easy only use (without to computer store), or the settings quash and again to the Hauptwindow return. 4.9. XAD-Entpacker the XAD-Entpacker can files, the with LHA, LZX, DMS and ZIP gotta are, again extracting. The whole happens by it complete in the Hintegrund. When you in future on an archive Doppelklicken, so is automatic the XAD-Entpacker restarted and it opens he an Dateiauswahl, in the you the goal-directory for the extracting files give able. When you an selection hit and on "OK" gelickt have, then find you in briefness in the Zielverzeichnis the entpackten files before. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- the XAD-Entpacker consists in the kernel from one Library ("xad.library"). Those is from XAD-Entpacker uses, the again over DefIcons in system linked is. 5. ViNCEd - the new Super-Shell ViNCEd is in first line an strong advanced Shell. He grants hence the input from AmigaDOS-ordering, with those one e.g. Data medium and files copy, files rename or Befehlssequenzen accomplish can. ViNCEd offers besides possibilities, the wide over the publicly known functions the standard-Shell of AMIGA go out. An survey these possibilities gives following list: . Histroy-function: when more text in the ViNCEd-window stands, as in the visible area goes, then become Rollbalken added, around the entire text also furthermore in the intervention to have. . Adjustable Tab-Ergänzugen: through simple or double squeeze the -key can ViNCEd inputs complete. Z.B's. Is the input "ed braised:sta" to "ed braised:startup-sequence". When ViNCEd more as an possibility finds, is an Dateiauswahl open and you able the correct file choose. . Window-buttons: ViNCEd has, next to the publicly known Amiga Shell-buttons another in upper right windowrand. The third button from left is to the Ikonifizieren of Shell-window. Left-hand hereof are two text- buttons, the macros invoice. "Settings" opens the ViNCEd- Preferences and "help" opens the help-file. . Menu, e.g. With the function, with the window to the next onscreen zy bounce or the text in the window to computer store. . Tastatursteuerung: each key can an particular, free configurable signification have. Standard are the following buttons allocates: function keys: carry out from macros. Help: it calls the "help"-macro. Shift-arrow cursor bounces the half side in the direction of combination: arrow. Ctrl-arrow cursor bounces on the extreme windowgrenzen. Combination: Ctrl-a: Kursor pringt to the beginning the row. Ctrl-c: Beendet the current progam. Further clues to the key layout find you in the englischsprachigen hint. . Shell/bracket-Handler: through ViNCEd have you direct intervention on all AmigaDOS-comands. ViNCEd is free configurable, so that you self determine able, how your Shell-window work shall. 5.1. ViNCEd menu ViNCEd can as "normal" Shell uses become, i.e. You able AmigaDOS-comands enter, the to squeeze the input-key carried out become. Then ViNCEd but much stronger is, has he also an extensive menu. In following are all entries, the by "Leichte config" switched off are, with (*) marked. Project new window it opens an new Shell-window. (+) undoing it opens an Dateiauswahl and you able an ahead stored file in the Shell-window load. (+) History open it opens an Dateiauswahl and you able an ahead stored History-file in ViNCEd load. The History tps of umfassen all comands, the you in the Shell entered have. Save under... It opens an Dateiauswahl and you able the actual text computer store. (+) History computer store it opens an Dateiauswahl and you able the actual History computer store. Maximally bigness Bringt the ViNCEd window to in the front and enlarges it, so that it the entire onscreen fill. (+<+>) Minimale bigness Verkleinert ViNCEd on the least feasible bigness. (+<->) Auf original Bringt the ViNCEd-window back on the bigness and position position, how it open became. (+) Nächster Bringt the next onscreen to in the front. Onscreen to (+<.>) in the front Iconifizieren Ikonifiziert the ViNCEd-window. (+) Auf the next Bringt the next "öffentlichen" onscreen to screen in the front and placed ViNCEd on this screen. (+) help... It opens the help-file. Settings... It opens the SetVNC-Prefs-progam, with it you the settings edit able. Over ViNCEd gives info over ViNCEd from. Window close Schließt ViNCEd. (+) Edieren Ausschneiden Schneidet the with the Mauspfeil aufgezogenen Textbereich from and copied him in the clipboard (Clipboard). (+) copying Kopiert the selektierten Textbereich in the clipboard. (+) Blockmarke clean Deselektiert selected texts. (+) Einfügen Kopiert the content the clipboard in the ViNCED- window. Care, Zeilenumbrüche become herewith so discusses, as become you the cr-key actuate. The preceding text is then from the Shell as comand recognized and carried out. (+

) all Selektieren Selektiert the entirety windowinhalt. (+) window clean Löscht the complete windowinhalt. (+) Bis Pufferende Löscht all texts from the cursor position till to the end clean of Eingabepuffers. (+) terminal put the terminal on the Ursprungszustand back. The disfavour is then necessary, when about through the versehendliche announcement one Binärdatei by means of "letter" the soft copy jumbles get is ought. (+) quest forwards Durchsucht the History to elders inputs with the in the command line eingegebenen Suchmuster. (+) quest backwards Durchsucht the History to new inputs. (+) macros in "macro"-menu find you the ViNCEd-macros; this macros able you e.g. With the Preferences or by means of "macros clipboard" the own request acclimatize. (R-Amiga-0 till R-Amiga-9). Macros around an macro auszuschneiden, give you first the clipboard Makrotext in ViNCEd an. Select you now the just now eingegebenen text and choose you in the submenu "macros clipboard" that macro from, which you through the selektierten text replace will. Settings in settings-menu find you some frequently uses settings from SetVNC. Reading you more over this settings under "SetVNC:ViNCEd settings" or in the Online-help-file. Around the first three menu-options: Buffergröße, under row and waiter row adjust, give you in ViNCEd an, how great an buffer is shall, and select these number. Now are this menu-options activates; when you the accordingly menu item choose, is it the entered number clipboard and in the presettings transfer. All other options work as on/From-switch. 5.2. ViNCEd settings through Anklicken from "Settings" in the ViNCEd-window or through the activating of program "SetVNC" in the "Prefs"-directory commence you the Einstell- progam for ViNCEd. Here able you many functions so define, that the Shell just the same reacted, how you it he wish. SetVNC is in eight fields subdivided, the he how Karteireiter in upper edge of window find. Every one these fields has another undersides, the with the buttons and gated become able. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- towards the fit is he SetVNC in the standard-mode, in the only the functions uncover are, the one in the normal case needs. When one intervention on all options want, so must one on the second side of "over"-Menküs the option "Leichte config" deactivate. In following are all entries, the by "Leichte config" switched off are, with (*) marked. Over (side 1) afore gsp. It opens the at last stored Einstellungsdatei. Benutzten employed the at last benutzten settings. Window Übernimmt the settings from (Shell)window, from the SetVNC restarted been is. Standard Stellt the settings on the standard-ViNCEd- settings. Over... It opens the help-file. Over (side 2) Leichte if choosen, is only that part the config config offered, the real from the plural the user uses is. Hereby not available configurations are in the following text with a asterisk (*) provide and must so first duch remove this Häckchens available made become. Save under... It opens the Dateiauswahl - you able now your settings name and computer store. Ark it opens the Dateiauswahl - you able now an ahead settings... Stored Einstellungsdatei load. Macros (side 1 and 2) here are the macros defined, the Sim in ViNCEd-macros-menu find able and the with the Tastaturkürzel +<0> till <9> invoice able. Macros in ViNCEd are Zeichenreihen, the, so how she defined are, in the Shell-window "how with the keyboard typed" entered become. Hereby able you frequently used functions quick invoice. Give you e.g. By macro 0 an: "ViNCEd is class!", Click you on the "in the window"-button, around the settings to adopt, and use you +<0>, around to see, how the serves. Macros (side 3) here are the macros defined, the in the ViNCEd-Titelleiste as switch to see are. Click you "back" or "forward" around the previous or. Next macro new to define. With "Einfügen" or "remove" able you another macros add, or not more required remove. More over macros hear you in the help-file. Keyboard (*) here able you Tastaturkürzel define, the ViNCEd-functions accomplish. On side 1 define you the macros and on side 2 give you them an function. Around an Tastaturkürzel to define, give you this in the field on the right above on side one an, choose you the with the key to drückenden Erweiterungstasten and go you then on side 2, around the desired function to select. More there to finds he wider back. From the there angebotenen list choose you an function from and click then on "transfer". Keyboard (side 1) (*) ASCII code is the ASCII-code for the key used or the Tastecode? When "ASCII code" selected is, is an "z" with on one German keyboard (Keymap) defined, also still an "z" with one englischen Keymap is, although the key he on one other place is. It is meaningful, "ASCII code" always selected to have. Objections you herewith however, that the buttons "ß", "ö", "ä" and "ü" on the most no- German-Keymaps not come forward. Shift left till Qualifier-buttons, i.e. The selected key must Amiga on the right together with the Qualifier-key pressed become. It is always meaningful an these options to select, then you otherwise the gewählten letters not more to the writing in the Shell use können(!). Only with NumLock The picked key serves only, when "NumLock" activates is. Key in input field "key" able you an key enter. Keyboard (side 2) in the list able you an function choose, then click you on "Benutzen" around the picked key to activate. With "back" and "next" able you they buttons leafed, the an on the right choosen functions accomplish. Diredit (side 1) Uneingeschränkte when selected, ignored ViNCEd by the Cusorbewegung Cursorbewegung (*) and at discharge and Einfügen from text the difference between Benutzereingaben and Programmausdrucken. No in the edge when selected, able you the cursor not from the scrollen text scrollen. Cursor movements when selected, is the cursor not mitrollen, when how in the XTerm/CON you the ViNCEd-Rollbalken use. More inflexible XTerm- when selected, able you the cursor not through cursor Klicken with the mouse place. Cursorsteuerung when selected, able you the buttons of Ziffernblock through Ziffernblock use around the cursor to place. You able then but the buttons <0> till <9> of Ziffernblocks not for the text entries use. Diredit (side 2) underline-cursor when selected, used ViNCEd a "underline"- cursor, otherwise a "block"-cursor. Flashing-cursor cursor blinks. Printed text when selected, is at copying from text in the not in the clipboard only the from operator entered text clipboard (*) saved, Programmausgaben become ignored. Highlighting text when selected, is the highlighting text forthwith in the forthwith in the clipboard undertaken, without the you for it an menu clipboard or an key use must. Mean Maustaste when selected, is the -function not use to the copying from text from the clipboard not used. Here for serves then +. Diredit (side 3) ANSI-colors as when selected used ViNCEd the ANSI-colors (know presettings letters on scharzem underground). The colors become with it also independent from the Farbgestaltung the Workbench. Inverse ANSI- when selected, and "ANSI-colors as default" colors active is, revolves ViNCEd the ANSI-colors black and white around, you have then black letters on white underground. No Sondermodus when not selected, yields the input from for CR in in Zeilenanfang an vacuously row. Zeilenanfang (*) backspace in backspace in Zeilenafang is ignored, when not Zeilenanfang selected, is with it this row with the ignore (*) vorangehenden joined. Text assign when selected, is the old text by the input (*) assign, otherwise is the new text on the cursor position inserted. Those function can one also with the "Ins" = "alto 0" key on the Ziffernblock switch. Diredit (side 4) Asynchroner when selected, is the entered text first then Tastaturbuffer (*) displayed, when an progam thereafter asks, otherwise remain she in the Tastaturbuffer. Lowest row in when selected, is the lowest row in lower edge deliver edge justified, when you an ViNCEd-window (*) increase. Shell (side 1) macro to the when selected, calls ViNCEd in the Shell-mode an macro windowschließen on when you the window close. This macro calls then typically "EndCLI" on. Versehentliches when selected, able you the window not with the windowschließen Close-Gadget left above in the window close, when more as an Shell-case active is. Close-Requester when selected, and versehentliches "windowschließen" plug (*) prevent" active is, then brings ViNCEd at windowschließen an safety query. Shell-mode as when selected, opens he ViNCEd always in the Shell- default mode and activates with it the menu and the TAB- completion. Only EOF broadcast, when selected, is an EndOfFile only notified, when in case all all in the window current litigations wait. (Very litigations wait technical and ought only from experts changed (*) become.) Shell (side 2) Kommandobuffer is when selected, is the Kommandopuffer cyclic. The cyclic is, when you with the arrow the next command choose, and you are at last command arrived, catches ViNCEd again with the first on. Identical lines when selected, is an input line also then in in the History the History absorbed, when she identical to the last receive eingegebenen row is. Scroller also in the when selected, able you also then the Scroll- ROH mode functions use, when the in the Shell current plug (*) progam the Vollbildschirm-editor may interrupt. (For experts: when the window in an ROH:-window changed is). Bigness of TAB- ViNCEd hold TAB-Extensions in a cache; here able cache you enter, how much directories in these cache absorbed become shall (1-256). Shell (side 3) Tab-Ergänzugen those settings is on an/more (*) pages settings distributed, where every an appointed kind the TAB- completion with regard to. Dual-TAB when selected, opens an zweifaches squeeze from Dateirequester within one appointed time (am "timing") an Dateiauswahl. First TAB complemented towards the first TAB gives ViNCEd instead of one enhancement complete of Suchmusters a complete file names from. Requester, in case if more possibilities to the completion be there, completion not opens ViNCEd an Dateiauswahl. Of one meaning ViNCEd supplements when selected, shows ViNCEd in the Dateiauswahl not in the Requester only the selected directory, but also all other possibilities. Files the he on other Geräteträgern or other list find become even so displayed how files in the aktivien directory. Shell (side 4) (*) sign behind if active, is the text behind the cursor-position cursor ignore by the TAB-enhancement not as part of Suchmusters (*): considered. Supplements in the with this is the Dateirequester through a simple bracket print expression the possible supplements in the Shell-window (*): compensates. Shell (side 5) (*) TAB-supplements here able you the priority from files, formatters, priorities (*): hardware, etc. Set. Files with a higher priority become first considered. Drops the priority one completion under -127, so is this at all not considered. You able so appointed Suchpfade from obverse herein draw out. Shell (side 6) (*) when you an Ikon on an Shell-window consider, is normally the complete path inserted. When you the key under "only names integrate" pressed hold, is only the filename inserted. When you the key under "only path integrate" pressed hold, is the path inserted, the filename self however not. Shell (side 7) (*) TAB amplifications- here able you adjust, on which place the Requesterposition Dateiauswahl positioned is, and how great the (*) window is shall. When "Dateirequester not position" selected is, become the settings ignored and instead of this the attitude of "ASL"- Eintellers uses. Window (side 1) bigness the History give you here on, how much command-lines in the buffer remain shall. Waiter lines give you here on, how much lines over the visible text at Scrollen in the buffer remained shall. Under lines give you here on, how much lines in the window and below of windowrandes in the buffer be expected to become shall. Monitor (*) here able you yours Standardmonitor choose. Writing (*) here able you an font for your ViNCEd-window choose. Window (side 2) Auf these side able you Farbregister set, the used become, when ViNCEd a own onscreen opens. Around an colour to edit, choose you first if you the register set or ANSI-colors define will. The colour-quarter-wave contact piston are now active and you able this Farbregister edit. With "back" and "forward" browse you through the available colors. "Cc." (Left from colour 0) is the cursor-colour. Window (side 3) Close-Gadget only when selected, is no Schließsymbol (Close-Gadget) on enquire generated, it be because, you commence an ViNCEd-window produce (*) with the Tooltype "WINDOW=VNC:CLOSE". That complies the behavior of usual "CON:" driver. Iconifizierungs- when selected, is no Iconifierungs-symbol Gadget only on generated, it be because, you commence an ViNCEd window enquire (*) with the Tooltype "WINDOW=VNC:ICONIFY". No one horizontal with this able you the horizontal or. The vertikalen Scroller and Scroller to wish deactivate. No vertikalen Scroller timing (*) all timing-values are in milliseconds specified. Cursor-Blinkzeit here able you adjust, how quick the cursor (in ms) (*) blinks (only when you under "Edit" the function "Blinkender cursor" steady have). Barrier for with this control you the Toleranzschranke the Scrollzeit (*) Scrollgeschwindigkeit, off the ViNCEd begins, the Bildschirmaufbau for the purpose of Geschwindigkeitserhöhung not more uncover to make. Time till gives on how long ViNCEd to Unterdrükkung of reconstruction (*) Bildschirmaufbaus waits, till the Schirminhalt again corrected is. Dual-TAB here able you adjust, in which period the Zeitinterval (*) double squeeze from still as dual-TAB saw is. Verzögert if activates permit ViNCEd the soft copy reconstruction (*) thereby accelerate, in that expenditure only still in a buffer flit, but not more uncover made become. Precise Timingvorgaben become through the quarter-wave contact piston above checked. System (side 1) ViNCEd help-file give you here the path to the ViNCEd.Guide help-file an. Fehlerumgehung for when selected, is the cursor, as soon as he in right line break (*) windowrand is, an row to back placed. That is an Fehlerumgehung for some UNIX-tools, in case ViNCEd as bracket uses is. (Only for experts!) line break in when selected, become lines in right windowrand windowrand umgebrochen and not in end of from ViNCEd gesetzten worth. No level when selected, scrollt ViNCEd the window-inhalt Scrolling through not by expenditure. As soon as you with the inputting the DOS (*) begin, bounces the cursor to the correct place. VT-220 when selected, collaborates ViNCEd in the VT-220- compatibility- Kompatibilitätsmodus. More zierzu find you in the modus (*) ViNCEd.Guide-file. Consider you, that this mode not compatible to the Shell is! System (side 2) (*) --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- please note you, that re design the settings on these side to Kompatibilitätsprobleme lead able! Change you here only the inputs, whose effect you overlook! DEL and BS clean when selected, clean the DEL (Delete) and BS at expression (*) (Backpacke Kontrollcodes) by the giving out sign. Otherwise bewwegt BS only the cursor backwards, and DEL prints an Schmierzeichen. Enfügemodus for when selected, complies ViNCEd DOS-expenditure in window DOS expenditure (*) an, instead of existing text to assign. Dough command on when selected, is at "Einfügen" not the text DOS send (*) from the Clipboard inserted, but the "Paste"- command is on the DOS clever and the progam must self the "Paste-action" accomplish. Attention: no compatible to the Shell! No in the edge with "Delete x row" and "Füge x row an", is the in integrate bottom buffer (the part of text the under the (*) bottom windowrand stands), out of eight disregarded. Kompatibilitätsschalter for some UNIX- Terminalwendungen. System (side 3) (*) here become system-macros defined, the from ViNCEd internal used become. End Shell (*) this macro is invoked when you the Shell close. End Progr. (*) this macro is invoked when you ViNCEd close, but straight an other progam out of the Shell active is. New window (*) this macro is invoked when you in the menu "project" "new window" choose. That opens an new ViNCEd-window. Shell produce (*) this macro is invoked when you + drükken. That opens an new CLI in the resemble ViNCEd- window. Help invoice (*) this macro is invoked when you the -key press. That opens the ViNCEd.guide-file. System (side 4) settings (*) this macro is invoked when you in the project-Menu "settings..." Choose. Iconpfad here able you a path to a Icon engeben, the at Ikonifizieren used become shall. The appendix ".info" one Icon-file need you not to enter. IconTitel here able you a name enter, the the Icon by Ikonfizieren have shall. Standardpfad (*) when ViNCEd without arguments, so e.g. As "VNC:" invoked is, is instead of this these Standardpfad used. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- (*) those options are by the attitude "Leichte config" (am second side of "over"-menu) not uncover! 6. Commodities - the "peewees" helper 6.1. Prelude The drawer the "Commodities" is he in the drawer "tools" and contains an whole special kind from program - the sogennanten "Commodities". That are small aid programs, the in the background run off and special jobs how e.g. Application keypad mode, screen saver, the Hervorholen of window at Doppelklicken on the windowtitel adopt. Commodities become in the rule in the drawer "WBStartup" (SYS:WBStartup) discarded and then at start of AMIGA restarted. Over the progam "Exchange" able the current Commodities checked and cancels become. The following list shows Commodities, the dum scope of delivery from 3.5 or. 3.9 belong to : AutoPoint Aktiviert automatic the window, the he under the Mauszeiger is. Blanker when an appointed for some time no Tastatureingaben or. Mausbewegungen happen, then is an so-called "screen saver" (Screenblanker) activates. With it is however not the onscreen switched off, but an small progam restarted, the colourful lines over a black background animates. ClickToFront Holt an window in the foreground, as soon as you it double anklicken. CrossDOS Steuert text-options for CrossDOS-drives. CrossDOS is enables the reading from MS-DOS-diskettes and the conversion from Textdateien. It bolstered however not the reach file names, the with Windows95 pp of einführen become. Further informations to CrossDOS find you in chapter 11 of original-Workbench-manual page. Exchange Überwacht and steers all Commodity-program's. Find fast seek to file names or in files. Fkey Ordnet function keys special functions to. Mouse Blanker Blendet the Mauszeiger by one Tastatureingabe from. NoCapsLock it leads to one vorübergehenden deactivation the key "only capital letters". WB Clock a comfortable analogous-clock for the Workbench. 6.2. General information tees (Tooltypes) from all Commodity-program is an standard-attribute uses: CX_Priority= Weist Commodity-program Prioritätswerte to. The standard-Prioritätswert for all program's is 0. When you in the attribute for an particular progam a higher Priotätswert enter, is this progam before all other Commodity-program with lower Prioritätswert carried out. Example: you work with two Commodities, with those you function keys appointed functions assign able. When both program's the function key an appointed function assign, barricades the progam with the higher priority this function key for the intervention through other Commodity-program's. Two another tees worth only for program's, through the window open become able: CX_POPUP with details from CX_POPUP=NO is at undoing of progam-Icon no Programmwindow open. The progam is sure to Doppelklicken on the Icon activates, but it appear no window. The default setting is CX_POPUP=YES. CX_POPKEY places the Tastenbefehl for an Commodity-progam fast. As soon as the for the Tastenbefehlt requisite key (or. Key combination) pressed is, appear the Programmwindow automatic in the foreground of screen. When the window "hidden" is, is it open. Over this Tastenbefehle able you no program's commence. The syntax to the details from Tastenbefehlen is: CX_POPKEY=. With the details from Tastenkombinationen must you each an blanks between the buttons integrate. Example: CX_POPKEY=F9 CX_POPKEY=Shift F4 CX_POPKEY=LShift LAlt LAmiga X 6.3. Tastenkombinationen with the input from key combination for an Commodity-progam able you the function keys (F1 till F10) and buttons the keyboard give (quantitative, letters, Soinderzeichen etc.). Every one key must however at least an identification for an Sondertaste prefixed become. The following identifications for Sondertasten are allowable: identification key alto an the -buttons RAlt raked -key LAlt left -key Shift an the shift key RShift LShift LAmiga -key RAmiga -key CTRL Numericpad gives an key the Zehnertastatur on. Rightbutton Gedrückthalten the Menütaste (raked Maustaste) Leftbutton Gedrückthalten the Auswahltaste (left Maustaste) Middlebutton Gedrückthalten the middle Maustaste (by three buttons) those Sondertasten able also in union with function keys specified become. That is but not needed. You able an any combination from Sondertasten give, so far in end an functional- or Standardtaste specified is. With it become several times entered identifications only once recognized: LAlt RAmiga LAlt F10 complies LAlt RAmiga F10 The following list contains valid Tastenkombinationen: alto F64 LAmiga 8 Ctrl LShift Y Leftbutton Ctrl CapsLock = (*) Numericpad 8 (**) (*) holding you the Auswahltaste (left Maustaste) pressed and press you the key combination +<"only capital letters">- . (**) squeeze you the key <8> the Zehnertastatur and not the <8> the "normal" keyboard. 6.4. AutoPoint (Autoaktivierung) the progam "AutoPoint" enables you the selection from window, without the Auswazhltaste (left Maustaste) press to must. Of the progam "AutoPoint" is automatic the window activates, the he below of Mauszeigers is. Click you to the activating from "AutoPoint" the corresponding Icon double on. The progam is forthwith active and it is no window open. To the Deaktivieren from "AutoPoint" click you the corresponding Icon renewed double on. You able also the progam "Exchange" open, "AutoPoint" choose and adjacent "remove" press. 6.5. Blanker (screen saver) when the progam "Blanker" activates is, is the onscreen automatic ausgeblendet, when over a before fest determine period no inputs over keyboard or mouse vergenommen become. In window "Blanker" able you the period (in seconds) enter, to the the onscreen ausgeblendet is. The default setting is 60 seconds. Is during this period neither an key pressed still the mouse deferred, is the screen saver activates. The onscreen is then in the simplest fall black or become (colourful) lines over a black onscreen-background animates. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- with elders monitors inhibited the shutdown of picture an baking in the Monitorröhre, because then could one the image also still by ausgeschaltem monitor shadowy see. With new monitors step these effect but not more on. The progam "Blanker" has two another options: animation when this option steady is, is an beautiful Linienanimation as screen saver personated. Through colors those option is only available, when "animation" active browse is. The Linienanimation gets then continuous colors. When you the "Blanker" disable will, so open you the progam "Exchange". Choose you "Blanker" and deducible "remove" from. The able the progam also over the menu item "termination" in the menu "project" of Programmwindows leave. The Tastenbefehl for the progam "Blanker" is ++. "Blanker" bolstered following tees: SECONDS=60 period in seconds without keyboard-/Mausaktivität, to which the onscreen ausgeblendet is. The Standardwert is 60. ANIMATION=YES gives on, if the progam "Blanker" Spline-curves show shall. The default setting is "YES" (yes). CYCLECOLORS=YES gives on, if the progam "Blanker" a Farbzyklus travers shall. The default setting is "YES" (yes). 6.6. ClickToFront with help of program "ClickToFront" able you an window in the foreground call, without the fore-/Hintergrundsymbol to use. Debit an window with the progam "ClickToFront" in the foreground brought become, hold you the -key pressed and click you the desired window double on. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ place the -key can over "tees" also some other elective become. Often is it practical, when you the window direct through the Doppelklick in the foreground bring able. Click you there to on the "ClickToFront"-Icon and choose you "info show". Under the rubric "Icon" able you by "tees" the point with the "Qualifier" exclude: (QUALIFIER=Left_Alt) Klicken you to the activating of program "ClickToFront" the corresponding Icon double on. For this progam is no window open. To the Deaktivieren of program "ClickToFront" open you the window "Exchange" and choose "ClickToFront" (under "Verfügbare Commodities") and adjacent "remove" from. To the Deaktivieren able you also the corresponding progam-Icon renewed double anklicken. ClickToFront bolstered the tees QUALIFIER. This attribute enables you the details one Sondertaste, the at Doppelklicken in a window pressed be expected to become must, around the window in the foreground to call. You able following seven Sondertasten give: Lalt -key (standard) Left_Alt -key Ralt -key Right_Alt -key CTRL STEUERN None no Sondertaste example: when you QUALIFIER=CTRL specified have and "ClickToFront" activates is, hold you the key pressed and click the window, the in the foreground fetched become shall, double on. 6.7. CrossDOS (Konvertieren from DOS-write) the progam "CrossDOS" steers the Textkonvertierungsoptionen for active CrossDOS-drives. In window "CrossDOS" become the verfügbaren drives displayed. In addition able you "Textfilter" and "Textkonvertierung" for the separate drives adjust. Tastenbefehl: ++. In the shortlist on the lefthand side are the Gerätenamen all to the time angemeldeten (activated) CrossDOS-drives listed. Choose you to the call the accompanying settings the desired drive from. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- The options (right area) are only for the straight highlighting CrossDOS- drive valid! Eighth you hence unconditional thereupon, that the drive, the you to the conversion use will also real, in the list on the lefthand side, choosen is. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ Wählen you the options "Textfilter" and "Textkonvertierung" only then from, when with help from CrossDOS Textdateien converted become shall. Deactivate you the options, when font-, graphic- or other Binärdateien (program's) copied become, around adjustments on the data to avoid! Textfilter Am end of line from MS-DOS-Textdateien find he in the rule control character for carriage return (CR) and linefeed (LF). In Amiga- Textdateien are only linefeed-sign needed. Over it out become no end of file-sign (EOF) uses. From the fact must by the transfer from MS-DOS-files to the Amiga, or. From Amiga-files to MS-DOS this sign distant or. Added become. Textkonvertierung over this option is the conversion of Amiga-font in the MS-DOS-font controlled. In unite MS-DOS-files is for appointed ASCII-sign an eighth Bit (high Bit) steady, around the sign an new signification (e.g. By mutate) to give. Such umlauts must at Amiga on other Codenummern converted become. When you "ASCII-7" as Konvertierungsart (am back) choose, is the text the file in standard-ASCII-text converted. Those kind the Textkonvertierung follow only at reading the file from the MS-DOS-diskette. That means, that the eighth Bit sure at reading the file herausgefiltert (excluded) is, but at writing the file on the MS-DOS-diskette not again steady is. With the Textkonvertierung stand you two options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: complete ought as well as the file names as also the content the conversion files filtrated become, choose you to the complete conversion "Textkonvertierung" and adjacent an option in the Blättersymbol "Konvertierungsart" from. Only file names debit only file names filtrated become, permit you the option "Textkonvertierung" not choose. You must however over the Blättersymbol "Konvertierungsart" an selection strike. Konvertierungsarten over the Blättersymbol able you an the following options for the Textfilter or. The Textkonvertierung choose: ASCII-7 Paßt diue file on standard-ASCII-text on. INTL Bewahrt the international sign (e.g. ü, ç, ê). (International) DANSK Filtert danish Textdateien. MAC Filtert Apple macintosh ASCII-files, the on an MS-DOS-Disk transfer become. Detailliertere informations to "CrossDOS" find you in chapter 11 of original-Workbench-manual page. 6.8. Exchange (Commodities-accociation) over the progam "Exchange" become the in the background current Commodity-program's administered. "Exchange" can with the key combination ++ invoked become. In window "Exchange" are all Commodity-program's listed, the to the time charged are. Choose you an progam through Anklicken in the list from, around in the right window informations displayed to get and an the following actions thereupon apply: active voice with these Blättersymbol able you an progam activate and again deactivate. Remove Dient to the remove of Commodity-program. Advertisement uncover it calls the window of Commodity-program on, so far of existing is. Subsequent able you appointed settings for this progam carry out. Advertisement hidden Schließt the window of Commodity-program, without it to discontinue. 6.9. Find (fast seeking) "Find" is an fast and leistunsstarkes Suchprogramm for the AmigaOS. It is direct in the Workbench (over the "workbench.library") linked. You able "Find" with the key combination + commence or it in the Workbench-menu "window/seeking..." Invoice. The window from "Find" contains only few elements: pattern in this field is the search key entered. That can also only an part of word wein. Will you e.g. To files with one particular extension seek, so give you easy ".iff" an. Filename/content with "filename" is to files sought, the the "pattern" correspond to. Very interesting and often also very helpful is the quest within from files. That goes with the option "content". Natural lasts this option some time, but she can very useful is! Partitions-list in the partitions-list able you the partitions choose on those the files sought become shall. Options in menu from "Find" are special options eligible. When you to a exact file names seek will, must you "Exakte file names-quest?" Hitch on. If you also still under consideration the eingetippten grand- and Kleinschreiung seek will, activate you "grand/use of small letters?". With "settings computer store" able you this settings conserve. Around the quest to commence, must you press. The search result is in a wider window displayed. When you by a search result the obversely directory open will, in the he the searched file is, press you either + or choose in the menu "drawer open..." From. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ you able also the complete path of program in the clipboard copy, in that you the wished Suchergebnisse dial and entwerder + press or in the menu "filename in Clipboard" choose. The complete path able you now with + e.g. In the Shell or the EditPad integrate. 6.10. Fkey (application keypad mode) with help of program "Fkey" able you buttons appointed functions assign. Thereby save you he e.g. The reiterated input always recurring texts. In Auswahlfeld are the to the time defined Tastenfolgen listed. With help from "new key" and "key clean" able you Tastenfolgen add or. Clean. In Blättersymbol under "comand" able you a comand for the actual Tastenfolge choose. The following comands stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: through window Holt the rearmost window one use in the browse foreground of Workbench-screen and chooses it from. Through screens Holt the rearmost onscreen in the foreground of browse reading area. Window increase Vergrößert the actual window on maximum bigness. With it become the Bilschirmränder considered. Window miniaturizing the augewählte window on minimal bigness. Decrease windowgröße this comand has the same function how the selection of switch Zoom-symbol. The comand is also by window carried out, the only over an Zoom-symbol and not over an Größensymbol dispose. Text integrate with input the Tastenfolge is the specified character string in an Konsolenwindow or. An Texteingabefeld inserted. This comand has no aftermath, when no component picked is, the inputs over the keyboard accepted. Give you the einzufügenden text in the field "Befehlsargumente" an. Progam commence with input the angegebenen Tastenfolge is an progam restarted. Give you the program names and the accompanying arguments in the field "Befehlsargumente" an. ARexx-script with input the angegebenen Tastenfolge is an ARexx- commence script restarted. Give you the script-names and the accompanying arguments in the field "Befehlsargumente" an. Is the script-name in quotation mark steady, is the script in an ARexx-Zeichenkettendatei converted. In the Texteingabefeld "Befehlsargumente" able you arguments for the last three these comands enter. Debit e.g. The key combination + to the activating of program "MultiView" serve, go you how follows before: 1. Choose you "new key" from. 2. Give you + in the field for the Tastenfolge an ( and must through an blanks apart is). 3. Choose you in the Blättersymbol under "comand" the option "progam commence" from. 4. Give you the path for the progam "MultiView" (SYS:utilities/ MultiView) in the Texteingabefeld "Befehlsargumente" an. 6.11. Mouse Blanker (Mauspfeil blind out) with the progam "Mouse Blanker" is the Mauspfeil ausgeblendet, when you over the keyboard data enter. The Mauspfeil appear again, when you the mouse move. You call the progam "Mouse Blanker" on, in that you the corresponding Icon double anklicken. You able the progam discontinue, in that you the Icon once more double anklicken or in that you the window "Exchange" open, from the list "Mouse Blanker" and then "remove" choose. 6.12. NoCapsLock over this progam is the key "only capital letters" (by the typewriter also "Feststelltaste" gennant) deactivated. The Funktionweise the shift key changes he not, but by versehentlichem squeeze has the key "only capital letters" no aftermath. Click you to the activating of program "NoCapsLock" the corresponding Icon double on. For this progam is no window open. Click you to the Deaktivieren from "NoCapsLock" the corresponding pictograms renewed double on. You able also the window "Exchange" open, under "Verfügbare Commodities", "NoCapsLock" and adjacent "remove" choose. 6.13. RAWBInfo RAWBInfo is an newer info-dialog, the by the selection from "info show..." In the Icon-menu your Workbench uses is. In these info-dialog become the status-informations of augewählten Icon displayed. In addition able you here also different Eingenschaften of Icon alter. Keyboard macros: +. Right unscheinbar sees he from, the new information-Preferences, however the functions stick in the detail. Some the Highlights are: . Advertisement the bigness from list (easy on the beam click, then is durchgezählt) . Pictograms exchange (easy an other darauffallen leave) . Icon create (in case the file still neither has) . An new default-Icon create (the actual Icon the file is to the standard) . Pictograms in MagicWB-, OS2.1 or GlowIcons convert . Alternative- or. OS2.1-Icon remove . Comments to the file enter . And lot more... 6.13.1. The RAWBInfo-Preferences the following informations become always displayed: Titelleiste shows the path of Icon on. Image shows the image of Icon. Is here an Icon from one other file abandoned, is the Icon the other file assumed. 6.13.1.1. The file-Preferences in the menu file become following informations prepared: name here is the name of Icon and in braces of it kind displayed (data medium, drawer (directory), progam, project and paperbasket). Version here is the version number and in braces the date of Icon displayed. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ then this info not by every Icon available is, is she also standard not displayed. Will you this info inquire, must you either the deplete beam next to the lettering anklicken or on the keyboard press. Last change here is the creation date or. The Änderungsdatum with weekday and time displayed. Bigness here is the bigness the file or of list in bytes and behind in braces in block specified. With list is the bigness first at stress on the ledge next to the lettering accounts. With disk drive how hard drives, CD-rom and floppies become over that out still the device, the driver (Handler), the used and free area, the Blockgröße and the status (am back) displayed. With drawers, the paperbasket, project and program able you following Schutzbits set or. Remove, in that you the corresponding Auswahlfeld anklicken: Lesbar is this Bit steady, can the file read become. Is it not steady, is an Preogramm not carried out and the project can not over the standard-progam charged become. This Bit is standard steady. Schreibbar if this Bit steady is can the file written become. Is it not steady, can one the file not more alter. This Bit is standard steady. Archive this Schutzbit is from Sicherungsprogrammen steady. It gives on, that the file or the directory archived (secured) became. Erasable Ist the Bit steady, can the drawer, the project or the progam from data medium excluded become. Is it not steady can one the file not clean. Feasible if steady, is the file an progam or script, the from the Workbench or the Shell from invoked become can. Is it not steady can one it not more from the Shell out invoice. Script this Bit is only by files steady the an script are (how e.g. DOS-comands in one text file). From the Shell can one she how an progam aurfrufen. Comment in these field able you a till to 79 sign reach comment enter. Many program's carry here also automatic appointed informations an. Z.B's. Carry many a browser in the comment the heruntergeladenen files the Internetadresse an, with it one the parentage still follow can. 6.13.1.2. The Icon-Preferences in menu Icon gives it following informations: standard program is only by a project specified. This field contains the path to the progam, with the the project created became or with which progam the project open become shall. With the undoing of project is to of it processing simultaneous the standard program open. Stapelgröße Speicherkapazität, the as more temporary storage space for an progam reserved is. Priority gives the priority of progam-task on. The Standardwert is 0. A negatives Priotät means, that this progam by the ration from cPU time not so strong considered is. The Priotität ought but also not superior as 5 lie, because then could the overall system negative affect become. Boot through here able you choose whereby the file restarted become shall. It gives three different Startmöglichkeiten: Workbench, Shell and ARexx. Tees in field "tees" become different Startoptionen for files specified. 6.13.2. The RAWBInfo-menu items in the menu in the Workbenchleiste gives it again four submenu: 6.13.2.1. The project-menu next shall more Infowindow open is, can one with these function to the next Infowindow toggle. Previous here able you to the previous Infowindow switch back. Version... The difference to the Versionsabfrage in the window is, the here still the author and (many a time) the Prozessorversion displayed is. Save Speichert the Icon off. Vorgabepiktogramm replaced the actual Icon through the load Vorgabepiktogramm. As Speichert the Icon the actual file as Vorgabepiktogramm Vorgabepiktogramm. Computer store Icon clean Löscht the Icon. Over here stand the copyrights, the author and the version number. Quitting the dialog is closed. 6.13.2.2. The type-menu here able you the type of Icon alter. Five different kinds stand by it to zur ~ - at one's disposal: "data medium", "directory", "progam", "project" and "garbage can". 6.13.2.3. The images-menu default it loads the voreingestellte Icon, the by DefIcons adjusted is. Those function is then useful, when you e.g. A text without Icon-file have. Choose you these menu item, so is the text file the default- Icon given and you able the text from now on over the Workbench show. Copying Kopiert the actually choosen Icon in the clipboard. Integrate replaced the actually choosen Icon through the Icon in the clipboard. Reconstitute Stellt the previous Icon again here. To the Farbpiktogramm Erlaubt the conversion of Icon in the konvert. MagicWB-, standard- or to the GlowIcons-type. Extras Stellt you three options to zur ~ - at one's disposal: Umfärben 1.3/2.0 Ändert the colors from 4-colour-OS1.3- in the OS2.0-colour- style. Image2Icon Ist the augewählte file an image can one with these function this image in an Icon convert. Alternative image remove here able you the second image, the by the selection of Icon show is, clean leave. Then is easy the first taken and abgedunkelt. Featuring shows the clipboard on. Clipboard IconEdit it loads the actual Icon (Icon) direct in the IconEdit. Shop it loads an Icon an. Save Speichert the Icon off. Frameless Entfernt the frame, the the Icon (under circumstance) encompasses. No one Newicons Konvertiert the "NewIcon" at save in the OS3.5- computer store Iconformat. No one planaren The "GlowIcons" become always with a Icon in the old data computer store OS2.0-style saved. When you this additional Icon not will or need (because you the file not on intersystem with AmigaOS2.1 or older use will), then able you this Icon clean. That abates the Ladezeit of Icons. The Merkale-menu discharge Löscht all tees. Assortment Sortiert all tees to the alphabet. All deactivate Deaktiviert all tees. All activate Aktiviert all tees. Exchange Wechselt the actual condition the tees in the converse, i.e. The entries, the eliminated are (with "(" and ")") become bracketed and reverse. Reconstitute Stellt the previous condition the tees again here. Choose you to the save the adjustments in the window "info" "save" (left back) from. 6.14. WB Clock "WB Clock" is an progam, with the you the date and the time on your Workbench show leave able. Is the clock gerstartet, appear she on you Workbench-background. Is the time not right adjusted, able you the time over the progam "tIME" in the drawer "Prefs" alter. Further info to these subject find you in the chapter "Prefs" under "tIME." Around the settings the clock to change, Doppelklicken you on the clock- Icon on you Workbench-background. The "WB Clock"-Preferences offers four functional groups on: 6.14.1. Hand Zeigertyp Bestimmt the kind the hand. Zeigerbreite gives the fatness the hand on. Shade with it leaves he the shade an- and deactivate. Length gives the Zeigerlänge in percent on. 6.14.2. Dial background here able you the background the clock define. It gives the selection between "reproducible copy" (transparent), "image", "translucent image", "translucent skaliertes image", "skaliertes image" and "colour". On wish leaves he also still an frame plug. Choose you the option "image" from, is in the field under the path of picture specified. Hand here is the oneness for the Ziffernblätter adjusted. Hereby leaves he from "nothing" (no Ziffernblätter) till "minutes" all adjust. It can besides still fixed become, if the Ziffernblätter "Oval" or "normal" personated become shall. Date Auf wish can one also the date and the kind the Datumsdarstellung show leave. A font and "Outline" able also still for the date defined become. Breadth gives the breadth the clock in pixel on. Height gives the height in pixel on. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ especially beautiful is the clock, when one e.g. An round image in the background deposits. The image ought there to but just the same great is, how the later clock (am settings for breadth and height at dial the clock), because only then is the result real good. The possibility "skaliertes image" brings often not so good result. The Hintergrundbild ought besides outside of him form as "diaphanous" defined is. To this must the background with a Malprogramm with the colour issue 0 filling become. As option for the background chooses one then "translucent image". 6.14.3. Colors here able you the colors for background, second hand, Minutenanzeiger, Minutenzeigerrand, hour hand, Stundenzeigerrand, Zeigerschatten etc. Adjust. 6.14.4. Noises here able you every hour, every half hour and/or every viertel hour a tone issue leave. With the "test"-button, on the right next to the path-Preferences, check you the tone. Around the settings to computer store go you in the Titelleistenmenü under "settings backup". Will you the clock discontinue, so actuate you easy the "termination"-button in the Einstellungswindow. Around the position the clock to determine, is how by pictograms proceed. You lay the clock on the wished place and fix this (with "Fixieren" in the Workbench-menu "pictograms"). 7. The Neuen multimedia-tools the catchword "multimedia" is in the last years very in fashion came and is today for nearly all uses, what with Computern to do has. The AMIGA has one with safety as the first multimedia-computer denote, because already by of him presentation 1985 had he so good how all suppositions for it. No whole "grown-up-date" is but the decor on multimedia- software, the the AmigaOS the AMIGA-operator "from house from" mitliefert. With AmisOS 3.9 are hence some new program's added, the these fact calculation carry will. With the "bare essentials" is it now possible MP3 (MPEG)-, AIFF/MAUD- and WAV-audio-files abzuspielen. Moreover able the video-formats Apple Quicktime and AVI displayed become. 7.1. Action - the video-Player Action is an faster and light to bediendender video-Abspieler for the formats AVI and Apple Quicktime (QT). He used up besides very little resources, what straight in the area video very weighty is. The greatest challenge at playback from videos is it, also on AMIGA-Computern with really weaker hardware-decor, an if possible ruckelfreie and fluent representation to reach. Action has hence an row from options, around if possible the fat from your hardware to get out. Action offers for it optimized video-Dekoder (for PicassoII/PIV, CV64 & CV64/3D, CVPPC, BVPPC, Spectrum/Piccolo, RetinaZ3, domino, Merlin u's.a.) and a special Abspielmodus for Zorro-2-Grafikkarten, around higher celerities to reach (for PicassoII, PicassoIV or CV64/3D in the Zorro-2-mode). He bolstered also the video-overlay the CV64/3D-, PicassoIV- and CV/BVPPC-cards. Furthermore offers he direct support for CyberGFX and Picasso96, full AGA-support (256 colors, HAM8, 18-bit and expeditious 18-bit STORM Dithering) and runs even on the old ECS-intersystem. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- if you Grafikfehler at playback from videos on one CVPPC/BVPPC in the overlay-mode get, lies the probable on CyberGFX. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when you problems with Action at exchange of screen (Screens) have ()Action retypes other screens or alike), then use you in best CyberGFX V4 or Picasso96. 7.1.1. The surface The surface from Action is very easy be expected to. Above left is he the Abspiel-/blueprint-button. Right next to is the Positionsregler, the the position of videos to the overall length specifies. Right next to is the number the images per second specified. Those leaves he with the both in right edge befinlichen buttons adjust. In the second row, whole left is the button, with the one to the previous video alternate can. The button next to bounces then to the next video. After this follows the audibleness- and the Helligkeitsregler. In right bottom edge is then still the button for the Endloswiederholung (Tastaturkürzel ) and for Frameskip (Tastaturkürzel ). Action has still three functions, the only over keyboard obtainable are: Stellt "images per second" again on the default settings of videos zurückzustellen. quitting of program. Wechselt between playback and blueprint. 7.1.2. Requirements Action needs at least a Amiga with 68020 or schnellerer CPU, AGA- graphic (for Farbmodus till 256 colors and HAM8), ESC/OCS-graphic (then are only 16 Graustufen possible) or an Grafikkarte, as soon as approx. 1Mb free memory. Moreover is the "asyncio.library" (V39 or newer) required. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ for an fluid playback from videos, before all also in the Vollbildmodus, commends it he, a AMIGA with 68040 or 060-CPU, an Grafikkarte with CyberGFX- or Picasso96-Treibersoftware) and if possible much RAM to use. 7.1.3. Supplementary video-formats and Codecs worse luck gives it sure only few video-standard, but for it more video- and audio-Komprimierungsverfahren, the "natural" not associate compatible are. Action bolstered an entire row these formats and ought hence in the position is, the most Quicktime- and AVI-videos abzuspielen. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- shall you at playback of videos problems have, then is this with high safety at it lie, that an special Komprimierungsverfahren uses became, the from Action not bolstered is. Even so relates it he, when you the video sure see, but not hear able, because also here gives it again innumerable formats. Worse luck gives it in both cases no possibility, the problem to repair and you able only try, the video in a other format to take care of. 7.1.3.1. AVI-Videoformat AccuPak (PalomAVI) (CLJR) 24 bit Intel Raw (YUV9) 16 bit Intel Raw (YUV9) 24 bit microsoft RGB (RGB) 8 bit microsoft RGB (RGB) 16 bit microsoft RGB (RGB) 24 bit microsoft video 1 (CRAM/MSVC) 8 bit microsoft video 1 (CRAM/MSVC) 16 bit radius Cinepak (CVID) 16 bit (+) radius Cinepak (CVID) 24 bit (+) radius Cinepak (CVID) 32 bit (+) Run Length Encoded (RLE) 8 bit 7.1.3.2. Supplementary audio-Codecs from AVI PCM MONO/STEREO 8/16 bit MS-ADPCM MONO/STEREO 4 bit (16 bit) DVI-ADPCM MONO/STEREO 4 bit (16 bit) 7.1.3.3. QuickTime (.mov, .qt) Apple animation (RLE) 8 bit (color/gray) Apple Graphics (SMC) 8 bit (color/gray) Apple video (RPZA) 16 bit radius Cinepak (CVID) 16 bit radius Cinepak (CVID) 24 bit radius Cinepak (CVID) 32 bit 7.1.3.4. Supplementary audio-codes from QuickTime ROH MONO/STEREO 8/16 bit TWOS MONO/STEREO 8/16 bit IMA-ADPCM MONO/STEREO 4 bit (16 bit) MACE 6:1 MONO/STEREO 8 bit MACE 3:1 MONO/STEREO 8 bit 7.1.4. The tees from Action Action can over an row from feature (Tooltypes) controlled become. Choose you there to the Icon from "Action" on and choose you then the menu item "pictograms/informations show..." There find you under the rubric "Icon" the field for the tees. The following tees able by Action specified become: 7.1.4.1. FILES gives on which video you play back will. When you no video give is the Dateiauswahl appear. 7.1.4.2. DITHER here able you a Dither-mode choose. The following options stand to the selection, the to the pattern "DITHER=DITHER ECS" entered become able: . DITHER HAM8 with AGA-graphic is the HAM8-Dither-mode for 15/24-Bit-videos uses (these is really slow). . DITHER GRAY or GREY with AGA-graphic is the video on 256 Graustufen converted. . DITHER ECS 16-shaded Graustufen. The single feasible mode on ECS/OCS- Amigas without Grafikkarte. . DITHER 18BIT Super-Hires AGA HAM8 (very beautiful colors, but regrettably really slow). . DITHER STORM Hires AGA HAM8-mode (beautiful colors and also very quick). . DITHER p96 Picasso96 8bit/hi/truecolor . DITHER CGFX CyberGraphics 8bit/hi/truecolor . DITHER OVERLAY or DITHER PIP those option activates the playback in the overlay- or PIP (Picture in Picture = image in the image)-mode. The following cards and system become till now bolstered: . With the CV64/3d (P96 v2.0+, CGX) must under CGFX the function MULTIMEDIAMEM steady is. . CVPPC and BVPPC owner under CGX must the following attribute in yours monitor-driver set: VLAYER=DESTRUCTIVE. The "cgxvideo.library" must in LIBS: existing is. 7.1.4.3. MODEID here able you the Hexdezimalzahl the wished screen resolution give. When you "MODEID ?" Fill out opens he the selection for the Bildschirmmodus. 7.1.4.4. NOSOUND Stellt the playback from Sound in the video off. 7.1.4.5. NOSKIP Stellt the "FrameSkip" from. With the "FrameSkip" become images flashed, when the film otherwise not fluent played become could. Is "FrameSkip" cut out, so become all images of videos displayed. It is commended this function not switch off, then Action over very good "FrameSkip"-algorithms disposes. 7.1.4.6. FPS here able you the images per second adjust. Those function should you on the Standardwert leave, then he Action these worth direct from the video fetches. 7.1.4.7. LOOPED when this function ageschaltet is repeatedly Action the choosen video in one Endlosschleife. 7.1.4.8. VERBOSE with activation these function shows Action informations over the video on. 7.1.4.9. NOCENTER Stellt the Zentrieren of window on the onscreen from. 7.1.4.10. WINDOWPLAY or WINP Aktiviert the playback in a window on a onscreen or the Workbench. 7.1.4.11. FORCE16 Zwingt the "Chunky"-converter each 16 pixel on once to edit. Those conversion is for 020/030-processors commended. 7.1.4.12. AKIKO or WRITECHUNKYPIXELS those function activates the use the Akiko-chips of CD32. 7.1.4.13. SDBL or DOUBLEHEIGHT those option doubled the height of screen around small videos in the Vollbildschirm-mode abzuspielen. Around beispielweise an 160x120-animation in the PAL-Vollbildmodus on a AGA-Amiga abzuspielen, gives one the following on: MooVId DITHER 18BIT SDBL to the expeditious playback can one also the following try: MooVId DITHER STORM LO SDBL 7.1.4.14. NOVIDEO Deaktiviert the Dekodieren of videos and only the Sound is played. 7.1.4.15. MONITOR parameter . PAL,NTSC,VGA=MULTISCAN,EURO36 . EURO72,SUPER72=SUP72,DBLPAL,DBLNTSC those parameter are for the direct selection of video-mode. Additional parameter for the selection the Ausflösung: . LORES=LO,HIRES=HI,SHIRES=SHI 7.1.4.16. NOGUI it switches the surface from Action off. That can a lower-case Geschwindigkeitsvorteil bring. 7.1.4.17. PUBSCREEN or PS set you these parameter around the "öffentlichen onscreen" (PublicScreen) for Action to set. 7.1.4.18. WINX and WINY with these parameter able you the X- and Y-position of Action-window give. 7.1.4.19. MABFIX Behebt the faulty giving out from with MainActor Broadcast erstellten AVIs. 7.1.4.20. NOSURROUNDMONO or NSM it switches the Mono-Surround-function off. When you problems with the Soundausgabe have (echoes, metallischer Sound...) activate you this function again. 7.1.4.21. ZORRO2 or ZORRO2GFXBOARD those function accelerated the playback by Zorro 2-Grafikkarten. 7.1.4.22. AUTOPLAY or AP Aktiviert the automated activating of videos. 7.1.4.23. NOAUTOEXIT or NAE those function brings about, that he Action to the end of videos not from self cancels. 7.1.4.24. GRAPHICBOARDSCREENWIDTH or GBSW with this able you an appointed breadth of screen fix. 7.1.4.25. GRAPHICBOARDSCREENHEIGHT or GBSH with this be able you an appointed height of screen fix. 7.1.4.26. BUFSIZE here able you the buffer size for Action fix. 7.1.4.27. DEFAULTPATH here able you the standard-path to yours videos set. 7.1.4.28. COLORKEY with these function able you the "Colorkey" in the overlay-mode appoint. Standard is this function cut out (then problems with Grafikkarten under CyberGFX occured are). 7.2. AMPlifier AMPlifier is in first line an convenient Abspielprogramm for MP3 (MPEG)-audio, he can but also verschiedenste 16-bit-Sound-format (AIFF, MAUD, WAV, ROH) play back. AMPlifier bolstered as well as hardware- resting upon MPEG audio-Dekoder as also Softwaredekodierung by means of MPEGA.library. Especially interesting is it, that the graph look the surface from operator changes become can, because AMPlifier used an so-called "Skin"-system. Skins (eng. For skin, basin, clothing) are graphics, the easy over the surface laid become. Those graphics can one either self draw up, or one can she he from the Internet download. With it is it an advantage from AMPlifier, that he the self Skin-system how WinAMP used and it hence hundreds or at all thousands from Skins gives. Further informations to the Skin-system find you wider behind by the description of menu item "advertisement". AMPlifier bolstered as well as DSP-resting upon Dekoder-cards (Melody Z2, Melody1200+/per, Peggy+, CD32 FMV) as also an Softwaredekodierung (by means of mpega.library and AHI or X-audio). For the Softwaredekodierung is the "mpega.library" from Stephan Tavenard required. With hardware based decoding must the obversely MPEG-device adjusted become. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- AMPlifier owns also a ARexx-Port. With it is it possible, the functions from a other progam from to of use and quasi fernzusteuern. 7.2.1. The Abspieler ("Player") AMPlifier can from the Workbench or one Shell from restarted become. The surface consists from three unabhängigen division: the Abspieler (Player), the Equalizier and the Abspielliste. Equalizer and Abspielliste able individual an- and ausgeblendet become. Moreover able she in Player- window angedockt is or apart on the onscreen placed become. Through draw on the right bottom corner the window, can one whose bigness alter. The Abspieler is the center part of AMPlifiers. In upper fields is left the advertisement for the (expired) playtime, the with a click to the Restanzeige is. Right next to is he the Titelanzeige with wider informations to the actual Song. With MP3-files become here the informations of ID3-entry displayed. Under it is he the advertisement for the Samplerate (in kbps) and the Samplefrequenz (in kHz). Under it is the Positionsanzeige, the the actual place within of Songs announce. With the button within of actually kittenishly Songs bounce. Right of it find you the Balance-governor and the switch for the Equalizer and the Song-list. The in principle handling of Players is the of CD-Players vicarious. The Haptbedienleiste contains hence buttons for "playback" (Play), "freeze", "blueprint" as soon as for the "Überspringen" from title and "retrogradation" to the before gespielten Song. Right next to these block is he the key to the Einladen of new title. The switch next to are for the accidental ("Shuffle") and unending playback the title the list. The to kittenishly title leave he by means of Dateiauswahl choose (e.g. With the button in the centre the Hauptbedienleiste), where also the Mehrfachauswahl (Multiselect) bolstered is. It is besides possible an whole directory to select, in that one by the Dateiauswahl no file, but only the directory select. The fastest and simplest method, title abzuspielen, is files or entire directories by "Drag-and-Drop" on the Player-window to abandon. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ data unavowedly format become in principle not played. One can this through a Tooltype toleranter fashion, around ROH-Samples (formats how e.g. Big-Endian, MSB-ridge, Motorola) abzuspielen. 7.2.2. The Abspielliste in the Abspielliste become the to kittenishly Songs listed, where each title and playtime displayed become. With MP3-files with ID3- informations become this instead of title displayed. To the editing the Abspielliste find he on the top side of window the necessary functions. It able an or more files by means of Dateiauswahl elective and with it to the derzeitigen list added become. A Mehrfachauswahl is also here possible. It gives buttons to the add (ADD), remove (REM), to the Selektieren (SEL) and to the assortment (MISC) and Verwalten (WILE OPTED) the list. The buttons have by it another subfunctions, the by daraufklicken ausklappen. For so long the Player directories recursive rummages (drive or. Directory, subdirectories, of it subdirectories etc.) is on the right back an "breaking-off"-button displayed. Shall the quest to long last, can she herewith broken off become. The button disappears, as soon as the complete Verzeichnisbaum read in became. Already played entries is from Fettauf on standard font changed. 7.2.3. The Equalizer the Equalizer to the preemphasis or lowering individual Frequenzbänder can electively connected become (switch "ON"). - aft the button "PRESETS" is he the accociation from presettings, the created, saved and charged become able. The left Schieberegler ("PREAMP") collaborates quasi as attenuator. The ten governor on the right next to are for the different Frequenzbänder able and one can he here the sound the rendition individual adjust. 7.2.4. Menu items The most functions the surface able also over a menu item invoked become. The menu hold but also points, the not over the surface callable are. It gives two Hauptmenüs: "project" and "settings". 7.2.4.1. Project undoing... Over the Dateiauswahl become the Songtitel picked. Add... It opens an Dateiauswahl around more title to the Abspielliste to add. Abspielliste... It opens the window with the Abspielliste. Abspielliste it loads an ahead conserved Abspielliste. Load... Abspielliste Speichert the actual Abspielliste. Computer store... Over informations over the author and the progam. Conceal with these "Commodity"-ability is it possible, the surface of Players vanish to leave. With the progam "Exchange" can one the Player again produce. Key combination: ++ termination termination of program. 7.2.4.2. Settings config... It opens the window with the settings (am wider back). Accident with activation this point become the title in one accidental order played. Repetition towards playback of last title begins the "Player" again in the front in the list. Elapsing time shows the played time of title on. Lingering time shows the still lingering time (Restzeit) of title on. Skin choose... It opens an window with the existing Skins around the Player an new look to get. Onscreen... Here can one a own onscreen (Public Screen) choose, on the the surface of AMPlifier personated is. Fix with this become the position and bigness of Player- window and the Abspielliste for the next run saved. 7.2.5. Config the menu item "settings/config" is very extensive and grants individuals Einstellugen of AMPlifiers. Those become in the following section envisaged. 7.2.5.1. Audio I/O since AMPlifier 2 gives it an new modulares Plugin-system for different input- and giving out-module. Those module are for the Gateityp-identification and the respective ones data stream able. Thereby yields he, that every input-module an own Dateiinfo-window ready provided. The MPEG-audio-Player offers beispielweise the familiarize ID3-day-editor. Every module owns possibly also an own config-window, in the another settings resolved to do become able. The following module are to the time available: . Input-module: MP3 (MPEG)-audio-Player, AIFF/MAUD-Player, WAV-Player . Giving out-module: X-audio/AHI-module 7.2.5.2. MP3-Audioplayer ID3 Title the ID3-day is an hangs Infoblock for MP3- files. There become informations how title, interpreter, Musikrichtung etc. Discarded. It can adjusted become if AMPlifier the advanced data evaluate shall. With one Konfigurationszeile leaves he the Anzeigeformat define. Decoder here become the MP3-settings for the hardware- and software-decoding resolved to do. Those can apart for MPEG-audio-Layer I/II and for Layer III active and configured become. MPEG-driver here is the MPEG-Ausgabetreiber (Device) and the Unit (hardware)-issue adjusted. That is at Betreib several of these cards necessary, e.g. At firm from two on top of each other gesteckten Melody 1200-cards. For the Melody is the driver "melodympeg.device", Peggy-owner carry here appropriate "peggympeg.device" an. Buffersize here is the bigness of file-buffer adjusted. Blocksize The Blockgröße gives on, in how great blocks the buffer subdivided is. The file-transfer happens then in the angegebenen Glockgröße. Attention: with Peggy permit the worth not greater as 5 kB amount to. 7.2.5.3. X-audio/AHI-giving out Device here is the Ausgabetreiber and the Unit (hardware)- issue adjusted. X-audio the name of audio-Devices (e.g. "melodyaudio.device"). AHI Who no "Melody"-card uses toggle here on AHI-giving out around. You able also more authorities from AMPlifier commence and simultaneous over AHI the giving out merge. Buffering here is the audio-buffer adjusted. The buffer size is in seconds adjusted. Around at beginning of title or to the seeks of Schiebereglers temporary dropout to avoid is the "Vorpuffern"-attitude necessary. Here is specified, how much percent of audio-buffer filled is must till the playback begins. In addition can the priority of audio-task adjusted become. 7.2.5.4. Options proof Dateityp initiated AMPlifier already at shop to check, if the at shop files abspielbar are. Fore the playback is in every fall the Dateityp checked. Air directory the standard air-directory. Titellisten standard Titellisten-directory. Directory boot file here can an title or an directory specified become, which at run restarted or. Read in is. File pattern with this leaves he the seeking to spielbaren title abridge. It become only files heeds, the the pattern correspond to. Start playback the input can ever to data pool very long last. AMPlifier can hence already intermediate with the play back begin, during the data medium still to spielbaren title rummages become. The time, how long bided become shall, is in seconds adjustable. 7.2.5.5. Advertisement Skins AMPlifier can next to the traditionellen surface also the so-called Skins of on PCs diffused Players WinAMP use. Those gemalten surfaces are regrettably oftentimes heavy to recognize and possession not the ability free vergrößerbar to is. You are bedienungstechnisch confined but beautiful variegated. It is even an matter of taste. With use the Skin surface leaves he an visual advertisement in form of vom by von from meter, Oscilloscope or of Spectrum Analyzers plug. (When an Melody1200 with MPEG hardware-support existing is, so is the special hardware for the graphiche advertisement unused!) in these rubric can the directory elective become, in the he the Skins find. The from the PC-world stammenden Skins are in Echtfarben implemented. On a Amiga with little colors see she so where appropriate. Some bad from. It be on farbreduzierte conversions referred. Shall it problems with the representation give, is the "picture.Datatype" too old and possibly also too slow. They are the Skins activates, appear an newer menu item in the Pull-Down-menu settings, about this picked become able. Skins directory directory, in the the separate Skind to find are. Skin current Skin. windowinhalt at AMPlifier 2 bolstered the relocating the window in relocating Echtzeit. The window follow so the respective ones show Mausposition automatic. The window able by the way on any place where he no switch is angefaßt become (so not only in the Titelliste). windowinhalt Ist this option powered, so "dock" the window bind by nn automatic together on, when this a distance from Pixeln nn Pixeln fallen below have. 7.3. Multiview - the all purpose-indicator Multiview is an all purpose-Anzeigeprogramm, the all formats from picture, write, Sounds and Animationen bolstered, so for it a Datatype (Datatype) available is. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- those formats must in the directory "devs/Datatypess" and in the directory "classes/Datatypess" existing is, with it MultiView she use can. Around MultiView to commence, go you please in the directory "utilities" on your Systemfestplatte and click there the "Multiview"-Icon double on. Now opens he an Auswahl window, with the content your Systemfestplatte. Give you now in the directory, in the your images, Sounds or Animationen lie. You have now following possibilities: image show Wählen you the Bilddatei from and press then on "undoing". Text show Wählen you an text file and press then on "undoing". Sound play back Wählen you the Sounddatei from and actuate you "undoing". Short thereafter opens he an small window with a Icon. When you once on the Icon click is the Sound played. Animation Wählen you the desired animation from the ASL-window play back and press then on "undoing". Now appear an window with control element. Around the animation to activating, press you on the Abspiel-button (Play) in the centre. With the Buttons left and on the right next to the Abspiel-button able she the animation fore- and Zurückspulen. Right next to the control element is then still the status indicator, the the momentary position the animation specifies. The Titelmenü from MultiView apportions he in four submenu "project", "Bearbeiten", "window" and "settings". 7.3.1. Project undoing with it able you an new image, a new Sound or an new animation load. Save as... With it able you the images, Sounds and Animationen on one other place conserve. Printing it prints the actually picked image. Over gives informations over MultiView and over the picked project from. Termination Schließt the progam MultiView. 7.3.2. Process Markieren with it able you a particular area from a image mark, the you computer store want. Copying Kopiert the picked file in the clipboard. All choose Wählt all in one text file from. Selection clean Löscht the Ausgewählte. 7.3.3. Window own screen here is an image, an text or an animation not open direct on the Workbench show, but direct on a own onscreen open. Fractional Skaliert the window on the smallest possible bigness. Normal Paßt the window the image or the animation on. Maximally Skaliert the window on the maximum windowgröße. Settings here able you the settings computer store. 7.4. The new "Picture Datatype" on these place still an short annotation to the new "Picture Datatype", because these also from MultiView used is. The "Picture Datatype" takes possession e.g. The conversion the Farbanzahl by the advertisement of 24-Bit- images on a HAM8-onscreen. He calls again the respective ones loader (Datatypes) for the Bildformate, how e.g. IFF, JPEG, PNG on. The "Picture Datatype" lies off AmigaOS 3.9 in one vollwertigen PowerPC-version before, whereby the advertisement from picture very strong accelerated become can. The new data type can now also images in different assurance level skalieren, so far this from the program so requisited is. Also this function profits strong from the PPC-support. 7.5. PlayCD PlayCD is an progam, with the one audio CDs play back can. Around PlayCD to commence, go you please in the directory "tools" and Doppelklicken the PlayCD-Icon. The following functions have the control elements left back: Play/blueprint Spielt or. Stops the picked air. Air back Wechselt to the previous title. In air Spult in the title to behind. zurückspulen in air fast forward Spult in the title to in the front. Next air Wechselt to the next title. Freeze put all again on normal, i.e. An defined Programmfolge is excluded or the CD is in the basic status go. The control elements on the right side have following function: emission Wirft the CD from the CD-ROM-drive from. Audibleness Stellt the audibleness an. Program it can an special Titelreihenfolge programmed become. Will you e.g., That to the first title not the second follows, but the third, then must you first on the Programmknopf press and then the order through the squeeze the blue quantitative in the display fix. Random The title become to the Zufallsprinzip picked. Repeat repeated the CD or the programmed Titelfolge always again. Power Beendet the PlayCD-progam. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ PlayCD acknowledges automatic an available CD-ROM-drive. They are more CD-ROM-drives on you Amiga connected, so must you the drive, the you to the playback from music-CDs use will in a attribute (Tooltype) of PlayCD-Icon enter. When you drive the mark "CD0" has, then carry you as attribute "DOSDEV=CD0" an. The mark is by use from CacheCDFS to the strapping one music-CD in the Piktogrammnamen on the Workbench displayed. 8. Further program's 8.1. Warp3D already 1998 existed on the Amiga three different Grafikkarten, the over an hardware 3D-acceleration decreed: The CyberVision 3D, CyberVision PPC and BlizzardVision PPC. Worse luck existed to these date still no uniform interface, the it developer allows would have, independent from the use hardware to program. In addition offered neither the existing system an PowerPC-support. The Warp3D-Team formed up he with the intention, this situation to ameliorate... Warp3D is ever since to the "Quasi-standard" avanciert. It offers the programmer an uniform Programmierschnittstelle, with whose help he the hardware use can, without he around details worry to must. For the operator means this, that program's also on of him hardware work, although possibly an other hardware from developer unused became. Through the modularen architecture can an progam even hardware lean, the first to a späteren date available is. The Warp3D-system consists from three components: The Warp3D.library (or. Warp3DPPC.library) stands the unified interface there. Under it find he each an driver for the appropriated Grafikkartensystem (to the time CyberGraphics or Piccaso96) and the driver for the 3D- hardware. 8.1.1. Installing The installing from Warp3D runs over an Installer-script. An easier Doppelblick on the obversely Icon ought be enough. The Installer reports he first with the challenge, the kind the installing to choose: "Install" (fit), or "Uninstall" (remove). An click on "Install" actuates the actual procedure. Towards the Installer-usual question to the Erfahrungsstand of customer (beginner, Erfahren, Fortgeschritten) is to a existing WarpUP sought and the option necessary, the PPC-version from Warp3D to install. When an PowerPC and the WarpUP-system existing are ought one this option on each fall of use. The next decision is the of Grafikkartensystems: Warp3D bolstered to the time Picasso96 and the CyberGraphics-versions 3 and 4. General is it possible, both Warp3D-driver simultaneous to install. It is however commended, only the the use graphics system accordingly driver to use. Is Warp3D on a CyberGraphics-system installed is an another decision due: ever after, which combination from Grafikkarte and Cybergraphics-version installed is must the obversely driver elective become. In connection is to the existing hardware asked. Those is through click on the obversely option elective. Also herewith become ever to more chosen hardware still additional informations requested. As last is still the possibility given, the demos and the documentation to install. Of it ought one on each fall use make, because the demos bid an simple possibility, the correcting action from Warp3D to examine. 8.1.2. Directory structure Warp3D installed two libraries direct in "Libs:"-directory, and some another in a subdirectories with names "libs:Warp3D". The overall hierarchy sees so from: in Libs: Warp3D.library Hauptbibliothek Warp3DPPC.library Hauptbibliothek (PPC) in Libs:Warp3D/GFXdrivers W3D_CyberGFX. CyberGraphics 3-driver library W3D_CyberGFX_PPC. CyberGraphics 3-driver (PPC) library W3D_CyberGfx4. CyberGraphics 4-driver library W3D_CyberGfx4_PPC. CyberGraphics 4-driver (PPC) library W3D_Picasso96. Picasso96-driver library W3D_Picasso96_PPC. Picasso96-driver (PPC) library in Libs:Warp3D/HWdrivers W3D_Permedia2. 3DLabs-Permedia2-driver library W3D_Permedia2_PPC. 3DLabs-Permedia2-driver (PPC) library W3D_Virge.library S3 Virge-driver W3D_Virge_PPC. S3 Virge-driver (PPC) library from these Treiberbibliotheken become natural only the installed, the during of Installationsvorgangs also requisited become. So become the PPC-page driver only installed, when WarpUP installed is. To note is, that together with the W3D_Permedia2#?.library always automatic the W3D_CyberGfx4#?.library installed is, also when only CyberGraphics 3 existing is. That is no error. Shall an the libraries missing, ought an reinstalling resolved to do become. The author's advise of it off, files from hand to copy. 8.1.3. Error handling towards more occurred installing ought direct supervised become, if Warp3D serves: to this alternates one in the directory "demo". The progam "WarpTest" ought as first restarted become. It opens a own onscreen and shows in the centre an square on. The square can with the mouse animates become, indern the left or raked Maustaste pressed be expected to is. When the square to see is means this, that Warp3D correct installed is. As next ought one the different "Gears"-demos commence. The demos lie each as PPC and 68K-versions before and of use already a great part the functionality from Warp3D. What but, when it not serves? First ought one examine, if the obversely hardware existing is. Warp3D bolstered (to the date of writing) the CyberVision 3D, CyberVision PPC and BlizzardVision PPC. Graphics card how the Picasso 4, the over no 3D- hardware dispose become not bolstered. A another feasible source of error is an more obsolete Grafikkartentreiber. For CyberGraphics V3 ought on each fall an "cgxsystem.library 41.21beta" or later used become, all earlier versions become not work. In addition ought in union with the xVisionPPC- cards the Monitortreiber "CVisionPPC 2.7 beta 3" or an later version to the use come. From CyberGraphics V4 is in the relation with Warp3D an "cgxsystem.library 42.0" assumed, farther the Monitortreiber "CVisionPPC 4.0 beta 4" or. "BVisionPPC 4.0 beta 4". They are this versions existing, should the settings in the monitor- Icons supervised become. The V4-driver use the BitmapCache from CyberGraphics, this option ought so in the Icon through the ToolType "BITMAPCACHE=YES" dingeschaltet is. That necessary also for CyberGraphics V3 in union with one the xVisionPPC-cards. The CyberVision 3D knows this Feature only in union with V4, by the old version must by means of of Tooltypes "MULTIMEDIAMEM=YES" an foothold area from 1 MB of Grafikspeichers reserved become. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ in general is from the use from CyberGraphics V3 with the CyberVision 3D to advise, here ought on each fall the V4 or Picasso96 preferred become. In relation with PowerPC-processors able likewise problems occur. Those are then haputsächlich on absent environment variable to restore. Shall an problem only in union with Warp3D on PPC occur, so should following environment variable supervised or. Steady become: powerpc/gfxaddr: those variable must by use from CVisionPPC/BVisionPPC on the worth $e0000000 steady become. Check can one the worth through "getenv powerpc/gfxaddr". If not steady (or false) is the new worth through "setenv powerpc/gfxaddr $e0000000" written. powerpc/force: here must an 1 steady is (in union with the xVisionPPC-cards). powerpc/terminator: with BlizzardPPC-cards, the the ppc.library in a ROM hold, must WarpUP this library before terminieren. That can with these variables controlled become. For Warp3D must these worth on "2" stand. powerpc/memprot: when all nothing helps ought one this variable on "0" set. Thereby is every one memory protection switched off. The above genannten methods should the functionality from Warp3D guarantee. Worse luck is an correct action but many a time always still not guaranteed. That can several causes have. To the one able Patches in the system to Instabilitäten lead. To this belong to to the example "MCP". In addition can it come forward, that program's with very many bitmap work and so the Grafikspeicher scanty is. As rule of the thumb ought one by problems in principle first once all Patches from the system remove or a cold start carry out and in the Bootmenü "boat without startup-sequence" dial. After this is one he in the Bootshell and can the Grafikkartentreiber manual commence. Self the hardware on he can to problems lead. The Permedia 2-chip, the on the PPC-cards to the use comes, is very quick very hot. Shall during of operating brightly streak on the 3D-representation to see is, so can this from a überhitzten chip originate. An additional fan or heat sink can remedy create. Also übertaktete PPC-cards able heat produce. 8.2. AHI AHI is an standard for the Soundausgabe on the Amiga. It enables, verschiedenste audio-hardware with the Amiga to of use, without that the program's special for every unused audio-hardware adapted become must. It play so no role, if you the Amiga-internal audio- hardware of use or he an Soundkarte buy and then this of use. AHI stands an standardized interface to the audio-hardware to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, the by means of driver the each appropriated audio-hardware accesses. The software-interface from AHI enables all program, the AHI of use, the control the audio-giving out complete independent from the use hardware. AHI stands on the Amiga some particular functions to the zur ~ - at one's disposal. The would be e.g.: . On-the-fly-Mixing from several audio-channel (normally owns the Sound-hardware only a way out (canal), AHI mix the giving out several of these canals during the giving out on a canal together) . Surround-mode . Echo-mode . Adjustable Sample-Mixing-frequency . Audibleness-attitude for more canals (e.g. Monitoring-way out by many Soundkarten) . And some more each z.Z. For the Amiga obtainable Soundkarte bolstered ours knowledge AHI and brings the for AHI necessary driver alike with. In the rule finds he by the mitgelieferten software also an Installer-script, the the constrain files for AHI on the correct places copied. Shall the once not the fall is, find you in the AHI-Guide on the AmigaOS3.9-CD clues, which files in which directory yours intrasystem copied become must. Towards the installing from AHI and the appositely driver for your Soundkarte must AHI still on your needs configured become. The Preferences is he, how all Preferences, in the directory "Prefs" on you boat-drive. 8.2.1. AHI-Preferences the AHI-Preferences is in two pages divided, where "mode- settings" you the possibility offers, a driver for the existing audio-hardware to choose and some in principle settings for the control the audio-giving out to carry out. "Further settings" contains the settings for some the "specialties" from AHI, however there to later more. Occupy with we us first with the "mode- settings". Left-hand above is he an Roll-list, the normally "Musikeinheit" shows. AHI bolstered more audio-"chunks". The means, that you e.g. Different settings for the claims your audio-program's carry out able and this settings (when it the progam allows) during the progam runs direct alternate able, in that you the desired oneness choose. So able you for instance with a audio- progam made sounds once on your Soundkarte issue or on the Amiga-internal audio-hardware alternate, around the sound on these hardware to check. AHI offers altogether 5 chunks. The "Musikeinheit" has for AHI an particular signification: you is for program's thought, the the audio- hardware self on lowermost plane speak to must. Those progam possession most an own selection-window for the wished audio- mode. Choose you for an such progam the mode "standard" (Default) is the "Musikeinheit" from AHI uses. All for this oneness vorgenommenen settings are then active. In the list under the Roll-list are the verfügbaren driver for audio- hardware listed. The shaded personated driver is the for the elective oneness active driver. The Einstellmöglichkeiten worth for the elective oneness and the with it "verbundenen" driver. Ever to driver or Soundkarte able some options also in "Geisterschrift" personated become. Those options are then for the appropriated audio-hardware not usable (e.g. Number the canals, an-giving out-canals). "Frequency" certain, which Sample-Mixing-frequency from AHI unused become shall. Ever superior this frequency adjusted is, the more "virtual" canals able unused become, without the the Ausgabequalität of signal audible suffers. The höchstmögliche frequency hangs from the use audio-hardware off. "Canals" certain, how many "voices" simultaneous displayed become able. Conditional through the merging several of these voices on a giving out-canal is the giving out with every one zusätzlichen Stimmte quiet and ever to efficiency yours computer can also an annoyance the audio-giving out occur. Places you here only so many canals an, how you really of use! For the "Musikeinheit" is this option not eligible (she is in "Geisterschrift" personated). You must the number the to verwendenden canals then in you audio-progam adjust, the the "Musikeinheit" from AHI used. With "audibleness" can one the giving out-audibleness adjust. "Monitor" offers the possibility, the audibleness for a sucked. "Monitoring"-way out adjust. Is no more corresponding way out existing (many a time is he also "Loop-trough"!) has these governor no effect. "Monitor" has in these fall by the way nothing with a "data display terminal" to do, but is an gesonderter way out, the quasi to the "Probehören" serves. He is through the settings for the actual giving out-canal normally not affect. In sound studio is so an "monitor" often uses, with it one the Klangerzeuger examine can, without the actual studio to accede. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- consider you, that it by to high settings for "audibleness" and "monitor" to distortions and so-called "Clipping" come can. Dangerous become this effects before all things by instabilen externe booster (it gives only few real stably repeater!). In worst fall able repeater, loudspeaker and even the Soundkarte damaged or destroys become! Change you this settings hence with care! "Boost" manages the sucked. Eingangsgewinn (even the boost) of Mikrofoneingangs your Soundkarte (in case existing). Then these governor likewise influence on the giving out-audibleness have can, necessary also here, the settings with care to carry out. If you an Soundkarte with several an- and exit possession, able you with "input" and "way out" the accordingly an- and exits for the elective oneness determine. 8.2.2. Extended settings "debug" - is here some other as "From" elective, gives AHI debug- informations over the internal serial interface from. Consider you, that the audio-giving out by activated Debugging strong verlangsant wurd. Employ you "debug" only, when it real necessary is (and you some with the giving out begin able). "Echo" generated a "echo"-sound. Those function required very much cPU time, hence can "echo" on Syemen with schwächeren processors possibly not unused become. Is the processor much to slow for this function, deactivates AHI the echo independent off. "Surround in the fasts-mode" - is this function active, is likewise an very faster processor required. When you the Soundausgabe with Surround- Sound accelerate want, toggle you this function off. Further information informations to the "Surround"-Feature and the "fasts"-mode find you in the AHI-Guide. "Audibleness" - an further Feature from AHI is the sucked. "Master- audibleness". With these option able you where appropriate. Emerging disturbances by the Soundausgabe repair or atleast mitigate. Choose you here "without Clipping", become the disturbances strong reduced, but become for it additional 128K memory required. A memory extension would so an good idea, in case you not insufficient memory for this function to the zur ~ - at one's disposal have. The "Master-audibleness" is in the AHI-Guide closer explained. "CPU-Auslastungsgrenze" for many a AHI-driver (but regrettably not for all) can here preselected become, how much cPU time the driver maximally for the giving out acknowledgement permit. Remains e.g. The Mauszeiger during the giving out stand, stand you here the worth some inferior to. Is the giving out on the other hand disturbed or discontinued, should you the worth light raise. Consider you, that it by to high evaluate for the CPU-load to system-cessations come can (the calculator "stays hang"). Change you these worth so with Bedacht! --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ Wählen you the Sample-Mixing-frequency only so high, how the highest from you appropriated giving out-frequency. When you e.g. Frequently MP3-files play back, is sufficient most an frequency from 44100 Hz. The has the advantage, that AHI no complicated conversions on the really Ausgabefrequenz carry out must. You Syustem runs then some faster, in spite of "on-the-fly"-Mixing! In by the way able you with these attitude two canals with the maximally possible quality of Amiga-Soundchips issue (22050 Hz), without the the Latstärke of signal reduced is (the necessary natural only, when you an Soundkarte use and this frequencies from 44.1 kHz bolstered!). Places you for a oneness only so many canals to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, how really required become. The has already mentioned, is the Gesamtlautstärke of output signal with every one zusätzlichen Stiumme smaller. Consequently would then also more display by the boost of signal necessary, and the quality of signal is through boost in the exorbitance not unconditional better. Here is the posy: fewer is more! 8.3. Smart file system (SFS) "smart file system" or short SFS is an really new Filesystem for the Amiga. An Filesystem is for it able, how the files on diskettes and hard drives saved and administered become. On the Amiga is normally the "fasts file system" (FFS) uses. SFS offers some special features, the in the FFS not existing are: . Faster grips on files . Faster input from list . Faster seeking in files . Support from great Partition (till to 2000 gigabyte) . Long file names (till to 100 sign) . Support for great files (till 2 gigabyte) . Secure writing (no long Validieren to a abnormal system end or Stomausfall) . Intervention on the 25 at last gelöschten files --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- you able SmartFileSystem in the Internet to the example with AWeb under following address find: "http://www.xs4all.nl/~hjohn/SFS". The actual version 1.84 find you under "http://www.xs4all.nl/~hjohn/". 8.3.1. SFS fit --- WEIGHTY -------------------------------------------------------------- before you SFS install, should you unconditional an backup from all data your Fesplatte lay against. The hard drive is during the installing new formated and all data go so lost! The installing from SFS must "from hand" resolved to do become. The clinkers sure complicated, is but very easy, because proper only an manipulation did become must. After you the archive unpacked have, copy you the file "SmartFileSystem" in the directory "L:". You able this over the Workbench by "Drag&Drop" dispose or the Kopierbefehl in the Shell enter. Undoing you an Shell and give you following row an: copy Smartfilesystem/L/SmartFileSystem L: activating you thereafter the HDToolbox, around SFS for the hard drive available to make. Select you the hard drive from the list, and choose you "hard drive partitionieren". Select you now under "file system" the point "Hinzu/update". You see now an list the verfügbaren Dateisysteme. Choose you "Filesystem add" and in the following Dateiauswahl the "SmartFileSystem". Click you then on "shop". The progam inverts on the side for the Filesystem-accociation back. Give you now for SmartFileSystem as identification "0x53465301" ("SFS/01") an. With "OK" come you again back on the Anfangsseite. SFS is now in the "Rigid Disk block" (RDB) your hard drive installed, is however still not used. Around the new Filesystem insert select you again your hard drive in the HDToolbox, and choose "hard drive partitionieren". Now select you the Partition, the SFS use shall. The name the Partition is as Partitionsname show. Under "file system" choose you "Verändern...". --- WEIGHTY -------------------------------------------------------------- all info, the he on the hard drive is, goes now lost! Before you continue, examine you still once, if you an backup made have. When not, click you "breaking off", and make you first an backup! On the next side the HDToolbox able you now with the tarmac "file system" the SmartFilesystem (SFS\01) choose. With "OK" kerhen you to the window for the Partitionierung back. Make you the for every Partition, the SFS use shall. Click you now on "save". Again back on the Startseite from HDToolbox, click you "termination". Lead you thereafter a restart of Amigas through and reformat you the changed Partition(en). The installing and furniture from SFS is now prosperous cancels and you able your data again back on this Partition(en) copy. 8.3.2. The clever garbage can Auf every one Partition, the you with SFS formated have, sets SFS the drawer ".recycled" an. In these directory become all files, the you clean, buffered. If you inadvertent once an false file excluded have, so able you this easy zurückkopieren. Consider you but, that SFS automatic files from ".recycled" extinguishes, when he more as 25 files there find or when not more insufficient storage space on your hard drive existing is. 8.3.3. The SFS-tools 8.3.3.1. Diskspeed with this Shell-Program able you the speed your hard drives test. For the parameter give you "Diskspeed ?" An. 8.3.3.2. SFSformat you able SFS-partitions with the normal "format"-comand reformat, the Spezialbefehl "SFSFormat" gives you however more possibilities: SFSformat normal formatted SFS-hard drives treat file names independent from the grand/use of small letters. When you "CASESENSITIVE" at formatting enter, become the files hanging from your grand/use of small letters discusses ("HDToolbox" is then not more alike "hdtoolbox"). SFSformat standard deposits SFS at formatting the in the previous chapter beschreibenen ".recycled"-directories on. When you this not will, so give you "NORECYCLED" an. SFSformat standard are the ".recycled"-directories "invisible". When you she uncover have will, so give you "SHOWRECYCLED" an. 8.3.3.3. SFScheck Prüft the hard drive on error. If SFScheck error finds, is from the hard drive an backup made and thereafter the hard drive new formated. 8.3.3.4. SFSsetcache with this stand you the advance-harvest-buffer an. Modernity hard drives read by one harvest-requirement from of computer mostly more data as requisited become. Often become this data however later from computer in one wider harvest-requirement on the drive requested. SmartFilesystem can this previously still to lesenden data alike by the first requirement between computer store. To high values for these buffer able the thereby gewonnenen Geschwindigkeitsvorteil again pick up. You must here the names the Festplattenpartition enter, ensued from the Zeilenanzahl and the Blockgröße. e.g.: SFSSetCache Workbench: LINES 50 READAHEAD 8192 ever to available memory are 50-400 lines (LINES) á 8192, 16384 or 32768 bytes (READAHEAD) recommendable. The bigness of proved storeroom accounts he from the number the lines multiplied with the bigness the separate advance-Lesepuffer (READAHEAD). 8.3.3.5. SFSDefragmentGUI when many small files over your hard drive distributed are, is he the speed by Dateizugriffen decrease. With SFSDefragmentGUI is your hard drive new rationed and you able again with the old speed work. SFSDefragmentGUI name: (e.g. "SFSDefragmentGUI Workbench:" 8.4. Colorwheel the new ColorWheel, the Farbrad, offers much more colors to the selection and also much more beautiful Farbeverläufe. You able much particularly colors choose, besides bolstered it Hi-(15/16bit) and Echtfarben (True color, 24/32bit). This new Farbrad is to the example in the palette-Preferences uses, but also in many other program, the an Farbauswahl offer. 8.5. Fontcache the new Fontcache accelerated the shop the Zeichensatzliste in the font-selection around an multiple. He created an Indexdatei, the all important Font-informations contains. With great Fontmengen is the shop and Darstellen the font-selection only still few seconds last. The Fontcache leaves he from the Shell how follows activate: SetEnv diskfont "cache=yes" Copy ENV:diskfont ENVARC: CLONE MakeDir FONTS:_Cache with it is an environment variable arranged, the the cache einschaltet, as soon as an "_Cache"-directory in the directory, of it Fontliste buffered become shall. 8.6. NewIconEmu The NewIcon-Emulation brings program, the NewIcon-functions to the shop from pictograms use by, AmigaOS 3.5/3.9 GlowIcons to load and to computer store. It makes however in the rule sense, for the those concerned program's alternatives to seek, the AmigaOS 3.5/3.9 GlowIcons direct lean. Fore the appearance from AmigaOS 3.5 boot the NewIcon-Patch an good possibility, pictograms with many colors independent from the colour depth of screen there-deliver. With the appearance from AmigaOS 3.5 became for it an newer more homogeneous standard created. The AmigaOS 3.5/3.9 - routines to the shop from pictograms lean by it from he from also the shop from NewIcons. With it able all program's, the this new routines use automatic also NewIcons load. With the save become this however then as GlowIcons written. 9. AmigaOS and the Internet 9.1. Prelude to the Internet what before round 20 years began is today in all mouth - the Internet, those mysteriously, weltumspannende net, filled with informations and ready also you at it participate to leave. The concept "Internet" is frequently with the WWW or. "World Wide Web" or to german the "weltweiten net" equated. That is however not whole right, because the WWW is only an part of Internet. Also the electronically mailing, the E-mail, the Usenet with his Newsgroups, the Telnet-service and many other services belong to to the great field of Internet. In frame this chapter will we only the most weighty services put forward. After this devote we us the program, the for it in the OS3.9 to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stand, as soon as unite program, the you in the Internet load able, around another services to of use. Access Am beginning stands the question: how come I in Internet? The entire is in the practice really easy. As first needs one a so-called Provider (eng. For provider), so somebody, the a these access to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stands. An such Provider is e.g. Traumatically- Online, an daughter the German Telekom, other be called Mobilcom, 1&1, Freenet uvm. Of the Provider get you an telephone number, a Benutzernamen and an Zugangswort (keyword). The access to the Provider is in the rule over the Telefonleitung establish. From the fact need you now an analogous modem (for the analogen access) or an ISDN-card or an ISDN-modem (for a digitalen access). The modem is on the one hand with the Amiga over the serial interface bound and to the other on the Telefonleitung connected. Further details for this find you in the hint yours modems. Now miss only still the software, the the union from Amiga to the Provider over the modem establishes. Those software mention one TCP/IP-Stack. In our fall is the progam there to Genesis. In this progam carry you now the data an, the you from Provider get have. When all worked out has, is the union to the Internet built up and you are "within"! WWW the World Wide Web (worldwide net) is surely one the most weighty services of Internet. Meant is with it an special net from HTML-document, the on Servern in the entire world distributed are and the over special reproofs, the so-called "Links" together bound are. The clinkers now under circumstance more complicated as it is. An HTML-document is letzlich only an text file, the on appointed kind formated is. In these file come for instance appointed concept before, the but in these text not closer explains become. The author makes therefore a animadversion on an other text file, the on a other Server lies, the anywhere on the world stands. The reader the text file can now on these Link click and gets automatic the explanatory text the else file displayed. So far the attempt, this subject theoretical to explain, go we in the practice. The has usual needs one for the WWW an special progam. With the OS3.9 is for this the Webbrowser AWeb delivered. The has all other program's is he he in the drawer "Internet" on the hard drive, on the you the OS3.9 installed have. When you this progam restarted have, so give you for instance our WWW-address an: http://www.The hague-partner.com towards one board Ladezeit (when the conduction free is) is our Startseite on you onscreen appear. When we us the area "AMIGA" back left some particularly look at, then fall the concept "English" and "german" on, the each underlined are. That are the associations ("Links") to our englischen or. German area. Click you easy thereupon and already to short time shall you on the next side is. E-mail E-mail is the electronically mailing of Internet. Surely is you already once an row how KarlMustermann@t-online.DE struck, the meanwhile on every one visiting-card and every prospectus stands. That is the E-mail- address from Karl Mustermann. After all where become this E- mail "rested"? The answer is mostly really easy: by you Provider, so the firm, the you also the access to the Internet to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stands. With these Provider have you then an E-mail-account, on the the eingehenden E-mail rested become. With the E-mail-progam call you this E-mail from E-mail- account off. Natural able you with the E-mail-progam also self E-mail create and this then broadcast. FTP FTP (file transfer Protocol = data transfer- journal) is an wider service of Internet and he serves to the transfer from files. With a FTP- progam able you files on a Server load or from these gerunterladen. Places you he before, you interest he for an appointed software, e.g. Of us Grafikprogramm ArtEffect. Before you the software buy, will you but an test- or demonstration version view. Those find you again on our FTP-Server under following address: ftp://ftp.The hague-partner.com/ArtEffect/ArtEffect4Demo. lha around this file from our FTP-Server load to able need you either an FTP-progam or you use a Webbrowser how AWeb, the this also can. You give so the above address in the Suchfeld an and to one board time is AWeb an Dateiauswahl open and you ask, where he the file computer store shall. Then begins the loading process, the some minutes or also longer last can. IRC human being strike he gladly, around together to talk. To this goes one e.g. In an bar or an pub or on an seminary or an other event - not so in the Internet, because here gives it the IRC. IRC (Internet Relay Chat) is an possibility, he with other people in a "space", the Chat-space to strike and with you over the keyboard to "talk". With it play it no role, where on the world he the people find, the he in these space strike. Telnet with a Telnet-progam ties one his calculator with a other calculator and can then the other calculator so attend, as säße one direct before him. That is then practical, when one on these computer files copy, texts change or other things do want. That are only the most weighty services of Internet. Many other how for instance ICQ, the Usenet with his Newsgroups, Whois, Gopher and many other are another services, on the on these place but not closer entered become shall. When you he first once in the Internet find, then gives it for you many possibilities, he this informations to take care of. In the succeeding chapter become now the three Internet-program's of AmigaOS describe: Genesis, AWeb and AmigaMAIL. 9.2. Genesis - the access in Internet 9.2.1. Prelude Genesis is an so-called TCP/IP-Stack and enables it, the AMIGA with the Internet or a lokalen network (Intranet) to connect. Genesis consists from three Hauptkomponenten: . Genesis-Wizard . Genesis-Prefs . Genesis-main program the Genesis-Wizard is an small Tool, the you the reduction of Internet-entrance or of lokalen net relieved. In Wizard become you Schrittfür-step through the Installationsvorgang led. In end stands the ready union. The Genesis-Prefs are the part of the program with the all settings from Genesis resolved to do become. Settings gives it by Genesis abound, hence is these part of the program very extensive. In the rule must you however here not "from hand" encroach, because the settings become from Genesis-Wizard resolved to do. When it however to problems comes or when you as erfahrener operator adjustments on the settings carry out will, then gives you Genesis-Prefs all possibilities there to. The last part of the program mention he plain Genesis. He is the part, the the union to the Internet or a lokalen net (the so-called Intranet) establishes. 9.2.2. Online in 5 minutes - step for step in Internet . After you the Wizard restarted have, must you settle, if you an modem-union (analogous/ISDN) use want, around in Internet to go or an network-union to a other computer arrange want. We will with a modem in Internet and that is why choose we the upper option from. Later describe we also the second option, around an local network over "SanaII" to arrange. . As next become you from Wizard asked which modem you use. Is you modem in the list not listed, use you please the standard-modem ("all purpose or Generic"). When you you modem picked have appear the initialization in the field under. The initialization-comand contains the comands, the to beginning of Wählvorganges on the modem clever become, around appointed settings to carry out. When the dialing and the establishing of contact with the Provider not flips must you under circumstance you Modemhandbuch to help take. . As next is the device to enter, that to the addressing yours modems verwendt is (e.g. serial.device or "hyperCOMxyz.device" by one Hypercom-card). With oneness (Unit) stands in the rule an "0". . Now must you the Wahlverfahren give. That is in the rule the "Tonwahl", by elders Vermittlungsstellen could it still the "Pulswahl" is. . With the "Amtsholung" must you normally nothing give. Only when you modem on one Nebenstellenanlage hangs and some preselected become must, around an charge to get, then must you here this Eintragen, e.g. "0", when you an "0" vorwählen must around the Freizeichen to get. . If the modem the Tonwahl not acknowledges (e.g. By one Nebenstellenanlage), then toggle you "Wählton ignore" an. . Choose you now a the "Internet-By-Call"-offerer from. With these provider must you no registration make, but able forthwith Online go. The charges become in the rule over your telephone bill accounted. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when you already a Internet-Provider have, but the Einwahl not serves, then use you please first a the Provider from the list around sicherzugehen, that it not on the data of Providers lies. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- Eigener Provider when you already a Internet-Provider have and from these the necessary data (telephone number, Zugangsnamen/Login, keyword) get have, then choose you by the Providerwahl the entry "other". Then opens he the here angegebenen window, in the you this data fill out able. . Now hear you tone from you modem (in case the loudspeaker not switched off is) and some led's in modem would must additional shine. Short thereafter must then an small window with "please wait" come. In these time feels the Wizard some data from Provider. . When all worked out has, then comes an obversely report. . Now are all data for the access in Internet adjusted and the Genesis-Wizard can cancels become. . Now must you only still the Genesis-Icon Doppelklicken and on "connecting" (Online) press. Genesis chooses then yours Internet Provider on and stands an union to the Internet here. It appears then in the Genesis-window an greener point and the report "Genesis is now Online", have you it finally created - you are in the Internet. 9.2.3. Local network Aufbauen coming we now to the furniture of lokalen net (LAN) over the Genesis-Wizard. An local network is an union from two or more Computern, the there to in the rule over network card and an corresponding cable bound are. Towards the activating choose we this time the point "network". . Now must you the SanaII-driver (Device) give with the your network card accessed become shall (e.g. AriadneII.device) and the correcting oneness (Unit, in the rule "0"). . Wizard asks now, if you an special config for you SanaII- device need. With the Ariadne II can one here normally on "refusal" klikken. Otherwise able you an Konfigurationsdatei choose or the configuration data direct in the Textfeld enter. Please note you by it the documentation yours device driver. . Wizard attempted now, the local IP-address to ascertain. When this not serves appear following Preferences, the you with "yes" answer should. . When you now on "further" click, appear an small window in the you your IP address, the Netzmaske and the Router fill out able. . After this become you to the IP of domain-name-Servers (DNS) asked. When you no DNS in you network have, leave you the field easy empty. As last become you still to the Domainnem asked; this input is likewise optionally. . The configurations is now to "AmiTCP:db/Genesis.conf saved - and the Konfigurationsvorgang is with it cancels. . Now must you only still the Genesis-Icon Doppelklicken, the entry the network card choose and on "Online" press. It appears then in the Genesis-window an greener point and the report "Ariadne is now Online", have you an local network built up. 9.2.4. The Genesis-Preferences (Prefs) Genesis-Prefs is the Einstellprogramm from Genesis, with the you every function, the Genesis ready keeps, to yours Wüschen adjust able. This Preferences can for beginner very baffling is and therefore should this also the Wizard benutzten. For advanced student are the Genesis-Prefs but indispensable. When you the Genesis-Prefs restarted have, appeared the Startbildschirm with the Einschaltmeldung and left of it 8 Hauptmenüs (information, interfaces, options, modems/TAs, file, User, Socks and Cost). Dedicate we us first of all times the Hauptmenü interfaces. 9.2.5. Interfaces in the menu interfaces able you different sections your associations fill out, with it you e.g. More Provider use or next to the Internetzugang also still an local network run leave able. Under the list with the Profielen find he 4 buttons (new, copying, discharge and editing). New with new able you an new profile create. Copying with copying able you an already existing profile easy copying, with it you by less adjustments not all new fill out must. Choose you by it the desired profile from, the you copy want and click then on "copying". Discharge with discharge able you an profile clean (care: when you an profile once excluded have able you it not more fetch back, then must you all new enter). Choose you by it the desired profile from and press on discharge. Editing with editing able you the settings of bestehenden section change. Choose you either the desired profile from and press then on editing, or you make a Doppelklick on the profile. Profile settings when you an new profile create or an already existing editing, opens he an new window, which in 7 subassemblies subdivided is (interface, Sana-II, modem, PPP, services, happening and Resolv): 9.2.5.1. Interface in the submenu interface gives it following Einstellungsmöglichkeiten: name here able you a names for an profile enter or a the Standardnamen choose. Around the list with the Standardnamen to open, press you please on the symbol on the right next to the Textfeld. IP address here able you either an IP-address fill out or an dynamic ascertain leave. With Internetverbindungen is nearly always an dynamic IP-address uses, then the Provider you automatic an IP-address assign. With restaurants Netzwerkverbindungen is mostly an statically IP address uses, how e.g. 192.168.0.50. Goal when you an place to place union (how PPP, BRIEFS plip, magplip) use, must the interface know where you her packets sends. That say you you, in that you the IP-address yours Zielrechners registered (by PPP is the IP automatic found). Gateway an Gateway is an calculator, the an network with a other network ties (how e.g. An local network with the Internet). The means one can the Gateway e.g. There to use with several computer, over a Intranetzugang, in Internet to go. With it is the Gateway the calculator, the direct with the Internet in union stands. The other calculator go easy over him in Internet, he serves so to speak as Router. With it must all other calculator the IP-address of Gateway registered have. When you over a Gateway in Internet go will, must you in this field the IP-address of Gateways fill out. Netzmaske The Netzmaske gives on, which span on IP-addresses in you network to zur ~ - at one's disposal stand. With Internet associations is this function but generally not required (standard: 255.255.255.0). MTU (maximum transfer Unit) there gives one the maximum Transfereinheit on. For an PPP associations is this attitude but not so censorious, because Genesis stands the normally automatic an. Params many a one interfaces use not only the Sana-II Konfigurationsdatei but need also still many other parameter, the earlier in "amitcp:db/interfaces" together with the Schnittstellennamen, the driver and with the Unit to find were. Since newest is this from Genesis not more required (it is dynamic in env:netconfig/autointerfaces generated) and therefore become the Schnittstellenparameter here registered. 9.2.5.2. Sana II in the Sana II menu see you above an so-called selection menu. There able you the journal choose, the you use want. It gives three different protocols to the selection: PPP the is the journal for an Internetverbindung. BRIEFS old journal the today hardly still used is. SANA-II the is the journal for an local network. When you latter choose, must you under still the device give, the her network card responds (e.g. By one Ariadne 2 the Ariadne_II.device), the Unit of device and the names the device configuration. In the Textfeld under the Konfigurationsdatei, able you also the device configuration from hand enter. 9.2.5.3. Modem the modem menu is in three fields subdivided. Once in the part "modem/TA settings", in "Login script" and in "Provider information". With one lokalen union is by the modem/TA settings no modem specified and then natural also no Login-Script and no Provider. With one Internet union must you an modem auswahlen, and the Providerdaten and Login-Scripte must registered is, because the Login script are there to then, around with you Provider contact receive to able. Modem/TA settings in these area able you, how yes already mentioned, an modem adjust. Around an new modem to register, use you please the button "new". When you an modem from the list clean want then click you please on "discharge". Will you by a bestehenden modem some settings change, press you please on "editing". Create you an new modem or editing an existing, opens he an new window with several subassemblies (modem/TA, device, comands and results). Modem/TA there able you the Modemtyp, a comment and Wiederwahleinstellungen make. With the Wiederwahleinstellungen able you the number the Wiederwahlversuche and the Wiederwahlverzögerung adjust. Device here is again in two fields discriminated. Once in Geräteeinstellungen and in options. In the area Geräteeinstellungen able you the device, with the the modem accosted become shall (e.g. Serial.device), the Unit of device, the baudrate (speed the transfer, how e.g. 57600), the buffer size and the Flusskontrolle (most modems use RTS/CTS) give. With the options able you once fix, if the Highspeedmodus (reduced the CPU encumbrance), the OwnDevUnit mode, the "DSR ignore" and the "Drop DTR" activates become shall. The Highspeedmodus is generally to recommend, then there only Paritätschecks, the xon/xoff administration and test on Break signals cease. Activate you the option "OwnDevUnit use", is the ownDevUnit.library the permission reprimands also on the serial Schnittelle seize to permit. "DSR ignore" able you plug, when you modem/cable no DSR signal bolstered. Activate you "Drop DTR" is the DTR signal only to the place abgeschalten. Comands with comands able you the Modemkommandostrings fill out. Normally ought there through the selection of modems some registered is. Is this not the fall, hit you please in yours Modemhandbuch to. Modem Antwortkommandos here able you the modem Antwortwortcodes fill out, this become but normally automatic registered. Results here are the standard results listed. Is you modem accidental an special case and has other results, then able you this here from hand alter. Provider information when you now again in the menu modem go back, find you left back the Provider information. There must you the Einwahlnummer, the Login and the keyword yours Providers give. Loginscript right next to the Provider information is he the Loginskriptliste. There are the Login-Scripte listed, the you to the contacting yours Providers need. With "to this" be appropriate you an Script an and with "remove" clean you an script. PPP the submenu PPP is in two area subdivided. Once in PPP options and once in Callback settings. Walk we first times the PPP options on. Carrier Detect is this function activates, checked the PPP device the Carrier Detect signal to the modem. As soon as this signal wegfällt, deposits Genesis automatic on. MPP compression is this function activates, is the microsoft Point2Point compression uses. This Kompressionstyp has sure an high Kompressionsgeschwindigkeit, is for it but also not so efficient. With a 68030 or superior ought this Kompressionsformat work. VJ compression activate she this function, is the Van Jacobsen compression uses. VJ compression ought generally activates become. Use DNS address PPP used the DNS-Server, the from Genesis receive become. EOF mode when activates, used PPP a effizienteren path the data from Serial.device to read. Worse luck serves this function not with every serial.device and Genesis refuses he then an union to build up. Shall you this function unconditional use will, should you the standard - "serial.device" use. BSD compression those Kompressionsmethode is very good, but speicherhungrig, slow and required a leistungsstarken processor (060). Deflate compression those Kompressionsart is sure very efficient, but slow and required much computing performance (060). Callback settings when you Provider "recalls" bolstered, able you here your telephone number or a with the Provider arranged String enter. With Timeout choose you the wait for the Wiederherstellen the union during of recalls. 9.2.5.4. Services here have we three subassemblies (time, different and Keep Alive). Time here able you over the point Sync Clock your clock with the of angegebenen Servers synkronisieren. Squeeze you there to still "time computer store", is the internal time of Amiga still conserved. With Timeserver, give you easy the Server on with the you your time synchornisieren want. Different here able you over the point "boat use" adjust, if you Genesis, the BOOTP journal neutzen leave. This special journal allows Genesis an dynamic IP-address for an interface anzufordern and important Netzwerkinformationen (how DNS and Domainnamen) automatic to ascertain. No every one Provider bolstered this and is normally for PPP associations not required. Moreover slowed it the registration and it used up more memory. Use you BOOTP hence only in the case of need. With car-Online able you Genesis say, the it forthwith Online go shall, as soon as Genesis actuates is. Keepalive when you by these function a worth irregular naught choose, is Genesis to the running down of specified range an Ping broadcast, around an clasps the union because of inactivity to prevent. 9.2.5.5. Happening in these menu able you define, what for events by particular be in action tread shall. In the selection menu in upper windowrand stand you the different conditions an (Online, Online fehgeschlagen, offline active, offline passive). Credit you now above a condition picked, able you now with "to this" an happening add and with "remove" an existing clean. Jetztt able you still the kind of event choose. With it gives it the selection between CLI (Shell), WB (Rowkrbench), Script and ARexx. Credit you the kind of call elective, able you now from the ASL Requester the file choose, the in these particular condition restarted become shall. Will you e.g. ICQ automatic commence leave, when Genesis Online goes, choose you as condition Online, as Ereignistype WB and as file the progam ICQ.EXE. 9.2.5.6. Resolv coming we now to our last Untermenüpunkt from interfaces "Resolv". Here able you the important domain name Server (IP-address, e.g. 212.185.252.73), Domainnamen (e.g. Test.DE) and the restaurants Host (how e.g. Amiga1200) fill out. With the "to this" Button be appropriate you a in addition and with "remove" clean you a Bestehenden from the list. With the restaurants Host Einstellugen able you still choose, if the Hostname and the Domainname requested become shall. With one Internetverbindung become always an or more DNS entries and an Domainname required. Those data get you either from you Provider direct, or by your first union. 9.2.6. Options with the Hauptmenü options able you general settings strike. Those are in 4 subassemblies subdivided (advertisement, different, carry out and extended). 9.2.6.1. Advertisement this submenu has again two subdivisons. To the a in "Haupt window Anzeigeoptionen" and in "Status window Anzeigeoptionen". With the "Haupt window Anzeigeoptionen" able you Genesis say what all in the Haupt window to see is shall. Here gives it following informations, the one he show leave can: featuring Onlinezeit shows the length the call time on. (When active) featuring shows the actual Verbindungsgeschwindigkeit. Speed (when active) featuring shows the profile with yours momentary status. Interfaces (when active) featuring Buttons shows the connecting- and Trennbutton on. (When active) featuring shows the status led's the interfaces on. Interfaces led's featuring Mitschnitt shows the Syslog-giving out on. (When active) featuring user shows the actual user on. (When active) in desem area find you then still an selection menu, in that you the behavior from Genesis at boot define able. Here gives it three different behavior: open at boot holds the window to the boot open. With the boot as Iconifiziert Genesis. Around the window again appear Icon to leave, doppelklicken you easy on the ikonifizierte Genesis-Icon on you Workbenchhintergrund. Closed at Schließt the window and makes he invisible, i.e. Boot one sees on the Workbench no foretoken. When you again the Genesis window show leave will, click you please double on the Genesis Icon in the Genesis directory. Under the "Haupt window Anzeigeoptionen" find you the "Status window Anzeigeoptionen". Three options stand here to the selection: open it opens the Status window at boot. Status window (when active) featuring serial shows the Verbindungsgeschwindigkeit and the seriellen inputs inputs, during the union built up is. Open shows the Netzwerkstatus window on. Netzwerkstatus window 9.2.6.2. Different in these menu apportions he the window again in three fields: the "Kontrolleinstellungen", the "Mitschnitteinstellungen" and the "Starteinstellungen". Kontrolleinstellungen here able you following settings make: Verbindungsabbruch affirm here able you an safety query in the Trennenfunktion incorporate, i.e. Always when you the "separation" Button anklicken, is an additional window open and asked, if you the union abbort want. The activation these function is particularly by important associations to recommend. Benutzernamen in end clean is this function activates, is always to the expiration from Genesis the Benutzemamen excluded. Debugmodus credit you often problems with your Internetverbindung, able you this function activate. Here is you then detailed displayed what Genesis straight makes. No car-Traffic when this anbgewählt is, reach [for] Genesis and other program's at boot not on the network to. Consequently become interfaces, the automatic On- and Off-line go (e.g. ISDN cards and Router) not unnecessary bound. Kontrolleinstellungen here able you the following adjust: Mitschnittlevel here is adjusted, which newscast in the Genesis Mitschnitt displayed become shall. Mitschnittdetaillevel here is adjusted, which newscast in the Mitschnittdatei hold is shall. Mitschnittdatei here give you the path for the Mitschnittdatei on. Starteinstellungen Hiuer able you the following adjust: start Inetd Inetd is accountable for the boot other demon how FTPd, httpd etc. TCP: Mounten Mountet TCP: at boot. Loopback configure (IO0) with this able you at boot, an Loopback Schnittstelle configure leave. That means you able on local demon (FTP Server, www Server) seize and around this to test. 9.2.6.3. Carry out here able you a Shellbefehl, an progam, an ARexx Script or an DOS Script define, the either at activating, or at termination from Genesis invoked become shall. Objections you, when you car-online of use, that this invocations still before the establishing of communication restarted become. 9.2.6.4. Extended this last Untermenu is in dei fields subdivided: Kerneloptionen Gateway an Gateway is an calculator, the an network with a other network ties (e.g. An local network with the Internet). The means one can the Gateway e.g. There to use with several computer, over a Internetzugang, in Internet to go. With it is the Gateway the calculator, the direct with the Internetin union stands. The other calculator go easy over him in Internet, he serves as Router. When you will, the you calculator as Gateway work shall, activate you this function. IP sends redirect when activates, sends IP ICMP newscast. Sana debug is this active, is the Sana II Debugging activates. ICMP is this active, is the ICMP Debugging activates. IP debug is this active, is the IP Debugging activates. Kernel Speichermanagement Anfängliche Chunks here can the number the "mbuf Chunks" specified become. Cluster Chunks here able you the number the cluster allocate. A maximum of. Memory here able you the maximum memory usage the Genesis Kernels give. Chunk here can the number the "mbuf Chunks" specified become. Clustergröße here able you the bigness of "mbufs cluster" give. TCP buffer size here is the Standardgröße of transmitting- and reception-Socket buffer (TCP) specified. 9.2.7. Modem/TAs in these area able you an modem adjust. Around an new modem to register, use you please the Button "new". When you an modem from the list clean want, then click you please on "clean". Will you by a bestehenden modem some settings change, print you please on editing. Create you an new modem or editing an existing, opens he an new window with several subassemblies (modem/TA, device, comands and results). 9.2.7.1. Modem/TA there able you the modemtyp, a comment and Wiederwahleinstellungen make. With the Wiederwahleinstellungen able you the number the Wiederwahlversuche and the Wiederwahlverzögerung adjust. 9.2.7.2. Device here is again in two fields discriminated. Once in Geräteeinstellungen and once in options. In the area Geräteeinstellungen able you the device, with the the modem accosted become shall (e.g. Serial.device), the Unit of device, the baudrate (speed the transfer, how e.g. 57600), the buffer size and the Flußkontrolle (the most modems use RTS/CTS) give. With the options able you einaml fix if the Highspeedmodus (reduced the CPU encumbrance), the OwnDevUnit mode, the "DSR ignore" and the "Drop DTR" activates become shall. The Highspeedmodus is generally to recommend, then there only Paritätschecks, the xon/xoff administration and test on Break signals cease. Activate you the option "OwnDevUnit use", is the ownDevUnit.library the permission reprimands also on the serial Schnittelle seize to permit. "DSR ignore" able you plug, when you modem/cable no DSR signal bolstered. Activate you "Drop DTR" is the DTR signal only to the place abgeschalten. 9.2.7.3. Comands with comands able you the Modemkommandostrings fill out. Normally ought there through the selection of modems some registered is. Is this not the fall, hit you please in her Modemhandbuch to. Modem Antwortkommandos here able you the modem Antwortwortcodes fill out. Those become but normally automatic registered. 9.2.7.4. Results here are the Standart results listed. Is you modem accidental an special case and has other results, then able you this, here from hand alter. 9.2.8. File then the file very complex settings zulässt, is only preceded user this section commended. Normally need Internet user this section not, only by komplexen net, is these area interesting. 9.2.8.1. Groups that is the Gruppendatenbank from Genesis. Each row defined an group. Groups become proper only for externe program's how NFS required. With "to this" is an group to the list added and with "remove" an consisting of group from the list excluded. The following values able you one group fill out: name here is the name your group registered. ID here is the numerical Identifizierer specified. The ID issue ought an decimal from 0-32767 is. Negatives groups IDs work sure also, ought one but only by special project use. A groups ID issue ought besides always unique is. Hosts here become the Hosts in the Genesis file registered. With "to this" is an Host to the list added and with "remove" an existing from the list excluded. IP address here is the IP address of Hosts registered. Name here is the full name of Host registered. Aliases here able you still a zusätzlichen aliases for the Host give. 9.2.8.2. Protocols the Protokollbereich the file contains all to zur ~ - at one's disposal standing protocols, the for an transfer used become able. 9.2.8.3. Services here stand the to zur ~ - at one's disposal standing services. 9.2.8.4. Grips here become the Zugriffsbereichtigungen registered. 9.2.8.5. Inetd here find you the Konfigurationsektion to Inetd. 9.2.8.6. Networks here able you networks administer. 9.2.8.7. RPC here is the Programmnummerdatenbank displayed. 9.2.9. User here able Genesis user individuals arranged become. The is, it able User confined and accomodated become. New with this is an new user in the list registered. Discharge here is an existing user from the list excluded. Editing here can an already existing user changed become. Create you now a new user or editing a, is an new window open the three groups tps of umfassen: 9.2.9.1. General this area contains general info over the user of angewählten section. Benutzername here able you he a Benutzernamen fill out. Authentic name here is you authentic name registered. Homeverzeichniss here is the directory specified, the from the user unused become shall. BenutzerID groups ID here become the IDs of user's and the the group specified, to the the user heard. Keyword alter here able you an keyword for the user define, with it the profile from not meddlers unused become can. 9.2.9.2. Countdown in these Preferences become Zeitbegrenzungen for the user registered. With the "to this" Button be appropriate you a period in addition and with "remove", clean you a period from the list. With it able you in the selection menu under the buttons the weekday and in the both Textfeldern the space of time fill out. 9.2.10. Different with these window able you the maximum call time, the time- Server and the Benutzerwarnung plug. 9.2.10.1. Socks Socks enables you with several computer an Internetverbindung germeinsam of use to able. The Socks window is by it in two menu subdivided: once "general" and "filter". 9.2.10.2. General as first must you the Socks Wrapper in upper edge of menu plug. Credit you him active, can one the other part see and edit. 9.2.10.3. Socks Server here carry you the IP address of Server, over the the Internetverbindung runs an. Next to the Server IP must you still a Port give, these is ordinary 1080. Credit you no DNS in you lokalen network must you still the function "all Host falsify" activate. 9.2.10.4. With cut here able the info from Socks Wrapper displayed become. 9.2.10.5. Authentification when you Server an authentification required, must you here the requisite names and the keyword fill out. 9.2.10.6. Filter here able you the Socks Wrapper on the union to the Hosts or serve adjust. 9.2.11. Cost those menu consists from again two subassemblies: "costs" and "general". 9.2.11.1. Costs here able you the costs the associations compute leave. In upper menu carry you the weekday an. Now able you for the ausgewählten weekday an computation appoint. Choose you "to this", around an computation to add and "remove" around an consisting of to clean. Then must still values for the computation specified become. Here for must you the "acceleration time", the "Endzeit", the "duration the oneness" and the "costs the oneness" give. 9.2.11.2. General The currency, the Verbindungsgebühr and the price reduction become here specified. In addition able here still the entirety Kostendaten conserved and charged become. 9.3. AWeb AWeb is an faster and stronger browser for the World Wide Web (WWW). The actual version offers all important functions, the one to the Browsen in the Internet needs. . JavaScript 1.1 . Frames . Charts (inclusive Tabellenhintergründe) . Customer "Image Maps" . Embedded objects and background-Sounds as an unique Feature, offers AWeb three different HTML modes, which the correct advertisement almost every one side garantee: . The strict mode, by which only officially standard recognized is. . The permissively mode, which many Netscape and other amplifications acknowledges. The permissively mode offers also an error tolerance over against many typing error, inclusive lascher comments. . The compatibles mode, around bad programmed HTML pages represent to able, on those the most other browser despair become. 9.3.1. Special features from AWeb images become at AWeb in the rule over data types (Datatypess) read in. Thereby can he automatic from existing PowerPC- optimized Ladern profit. Alternative able also special internal Plugins uses become, the progressive Dekodieren for GIF, JPEG and PNG images, as soon as encouraged GIFs unterstutzen. You able for all Datatypes determine, which actions happen shall, hanging from yours MIME-type-settings (am menu item "Viewers"). "Streaming input" for externe program's is also necessary. With write checked AWeb, if it he real around text acts, before attempted is, him to announce, around problems with Servern, the amplifications how ".lha" not recognize, to avoid. A public Plugin-interface allows the simple integration from Erweiterungsprogrammen in AWeb. AWeb bolstered for the union in Internet each familiarize TCP/IP- Stack, the it for the Amiga gives. He runs by it also problem-free with the version from Genesis, the at AmigaOS 3.9 contains is. When you an Internetseite attend will can AWeb the access automatic establish and you must this not "from hand" carry out. 9.3.2. Settings AWebs Konfigurationsmöglichkeiten organize he in four unconnectedly Einstell window, those permit you nearly all aspects from AWeb on your personal affectations acclimatize. You able AWeb easy configure, its window on a own öffentlichen screen (Public Screen), a named öffentlichen screen or the voreingestellten öffentlichen screen to open. The Netzwerkstatus-, Hostlist- and Geschichts window become optionally automatic at run open. You able the menu complete on your personal needs acclimatize. You able menu new compilate or new menu items add, the ARexx-comands or ARexx-macros accomplish. You able the functions the ten Navigationsknöpfe in the upper part of Betrachter windows self determine. You able the voreingestellte Popup-menu which for images, Links and Frames appear, fix. Through Verwenden from ARexx-ordering able you the functionality add, the you for useful hold. You able even ARexx-macros or externe program's from Popup-menu from commence. Make the "Fastlink"-buttons other browser offers AWeb far stronger Benutzerknöpfe. You able these buttons every one any ARexx-comand allocate. That contains also an URL to open (which the button in a simple Fastlink-button transform would), an simple Konfigurationseinstellung to alter (how the HTML-mode) and ARexx-macros or externe program's to commence. You able your own functions on the most buttons the keyboard lay. 9.3.3. System requirements those special Edition from AWeb required the following around run to able: . AmigaOS 3.9 or better . 3Mb memory as absolute minimum. 4Mb or more is urgent commended. . Either Genesis, I-Net225 or ACE-225 around intervention from the World Wide Web to attain, or an TCP- Stack the with a from the genannten compatible is. Examples for compatibles products are Miami and TermiteTCP. . Suitable Datatypess to the announcement from picture GIF, JPEG and PNG, become through delivered Plugins dekodiert, but able this through other convenient Datatypess compensates become. . Around mood music on pages hear to able is an WAV and an GOLD Datatypes commended. Make of Datatypess able you also a externe gambler how Play16 use. For MIDI mood music is an MIDI gambler (how GMPlay) commended. 9.3.4. Installing The installing from AWeb follow in the OS3.9-Hauptinstaller. Also by one nachträglichen installing use you the OS3.9-Hauptinstaller and choose the installing in the menu from. Sequels you then the assignments of program. 9.3.5. The Steuersymbole from AWeb Am upper edge the browser-window are an number from field and buttons. The accurately bigness and the look the buttons variation with yours settings, but the position associate is fixated on. The separate field become in the following describe: URL-input field this field shows the URL (Netzadresse) the at the moment angezeigten side. You able here an new URL enter and the final worrys for it, that the side receive is. The menu item "project/open WWW" or the Tastaturkürzel - activates this input field likewise. With it is already "http://www." In the input field registered. URL-defaults this button opens an small Popup-list from the you a the usual beginnings from URLs, how "http://www." Choose able. The URL-input field is activates and the selection registered. Statusindikator this field serves two tacks: . When you with the Mauszeiger on a "Link" stand, so is here the address (URL) displayed. Those URL is charged, when you on the Link click. . When an side for this window charged is, is here the Ladestatus displayed. Formation data receive appear an Fortschrittsbalken, the announce how wide the loading process already forgeschritten is. Shall the bigness of document in the advance not known is, appear no Fortschrittsbalken. Sicherheitsindikator this indicator shows on, if the actual document over an certain union charged is. Those function is in the SE-version not available. Hintergrundstatus when an or more loading processes active are, shows this Angezeige a or several small squares. With every one union, the closed is and every block the receive is, animates he the square a step wider. Those advertisement leaves you know, if still things in the background charged become and how quick the loading process fortschreitet. When you more details want, get you this in the Netzwerkstatus window. Back with these button able you he in the window-course (History) forwards move. The window-course contains all pages, the ahead in these window looks at become. Forward this button leaves you through the window-course vorwärtsbewegen. The window-course contains all pages, the ahead in these window looks at become. Consider you please, that the window-course not over ramifications disposes, but "linearly" is. The is, when you an couple steps go back and then an other side invoice, is so the another course of bisherigen window-course forget. Home this button calls the URL, the you as "Home"=Dokument adjusted have on. The Holist add this button complies the URL the actual side to the Hotlist in addition. Hotlist this button shows your Hotlist on. Breaking off this button aborts the shop one side in these window off. Loading processes in the background able with these button not broken off become; use you instead of of it the "breaking off"-button in the Netzwerkstatus window. Netzwerkstatus this button opens the Netzwerkstatus window or brings it in the foreground, in case it already open is. Seeking this button opens the Such window or brings it in the foreground, in case it already open is. Reload this button lades the actual document renewed. The side is from the buffer excluded and renewed receive. Images shop this button lades all till now still not geladenen images on the actual side. Benutzerknöpfe The bottom row from buttons can with any functions allocates become. When you more buttons defined have, as in the window fit, able you the Menüzeile horizontal durchrollen. Squeeze you the left Maustaste and consider you simultaneous the mouse to left or on the right during you the -key pressed hold. Around valuable Browserplatz on a lower-case screen to save, have you the possibility the Benutzerknöpfe to hide. 9.3.6. The Browser window the Browser window is the prime window from AWeb. Here become the pages of World Wide Web displayed. Over the window are some buttons. 9.3.6.1. Through pages move (scrollen) you able the windowinhalt horizontal and vertical durchrollen (scrollen) as soon as the bigness of angezeigten document the windowgröße exceeds. Natural able you the Scrollbalken and the Pfeilknöpfe to the Scrollen of text use, but AWeb understands over that out still following buttons: high and down; scrollen for short distances. + scrollen. , (Numerisches key field) an side high or down scrollen. , an side high or down scrollen. , (Numerisches key field) on the end or the beginning of document bounce. left and on the right scrollen. That is only then possible, webb the document an image or a preformatted text, broader as the Browser window contains, then AWeb otherwise the text so fora dull, that he in the windowbreite goes. + one side scrollen. Annotation: that are the voreingestellten buttons. You able other buttons determine or other actions for this buttons fix. 9.3.6.2. Frames many pages in the WWW of use an property the one as "Frames" designates. "Frames" are an subdivision of Browser windows around an side, the from several HTML-documents consists, show to able. When "Frames" displayed become, are the Haupt window-Scrollbalken probable on full with bigness (not scrollbar). Instead of this hold many a "Frames" a Scrollbalken with the one the content of "Frames" scrollen can. In many through, "Frames" subdivide pages contains an Frame the Hauptdokument and the other, most less "Frames" hold additional things how Werbebanner or an Navigationsleiste. In such cases stands AWeb an conjecture on, which the "Frames" in sinnvollsten a Scrollbalken required. In these "Frame" able you then with the above beschriebenen buttons scrollen. When you a other "Frame" as the automatic ausgewählten scrollen want, then click you easy with the mouse in these "Frame" (or neutzen his Scrollbalken) and already is these "Frame" for the future Scrollen with the keyboard activates. Many a time define author's from Webseiten "Frames" explicit without Scrollbalken, self when the content greater as the visible area is. Although wier no Scrollbalken existing are, able you the content this "Frames" with the keyboard roll. "Frames" have you own Popup-menu. It is in the lefthand upper Eck of each "Frames" dialable. You able "Frames" always in hers bigness change. Snaps you he easy the edge of "Frames" with the mouse and postpone you she, till the desired bigness attains is. Use you the menu item "control/ Frames disfavour" around all "Frames" on her original bigness zurückzusetzen. In lower-case window (with only 200 or 256 Zeilenschirmen) appear an side with "Frames" oftentimes bruised and is not easy to use. In these fall able you AWeb so configure, that an greater surface used is on which the side mapped is. Now able you the windowscrollbalken of use, around the through "Frames" subdivided side in hers Gänze to scrollen. 9.3.6.3. Left-hand Einter the most weighty tees of WWW is the ability "Links" (also "Hyperlinks" called; ramifications to wider informations) in documents to install. An Hyperlink is in one other colour personated and voreingestellt underlined. You able the colour and the underscore on the "options"-side by the browser-settings alter. Click you on the text or the image around a Link to follow, so is the document or the file in the browser displayed, the he "behind" the Link conceals. The URL (network address) of document, on the the animadversion shows, is in the Statusindikator displayed, when he the mouse over the Link is. 9.3.6.4. FTP-Links many a time shows an Hyperlink not on an other document but instead of this on an file or an directory. You able such reproofs on hers URL (network address), which with "ftp:" begins, recognize. When you on a Link click, the on an directory shows, shows AWeb the content of list on. It gives for it no standardized format, but normally become you the names the files or subdirectories on the right side the list see. Those are siederum Links, so that you through an Verzeichnisstruktur browsen able, in that you on the Links click. Often contains the listing also the filesize and the date. When you on the Link one file click, is AWeb the file load and try she to announce. When it not displayed become can, opens he an Dateiauswahl, with it one the file conserve can. When you computer over an Firewall (protective function) on the Internet connected is, could it is, that this no FTP-associations on normal ways allows. You able AWeb so configure, that he on an other kind and wise man an FTP-union build up, by the it probable is, that this also behind one Firewall serves. 9.3.6.5. Single images many a time refer an Hyperlink not on an other document, but instead of this on an image. Voreingestellt is, that AWeb this images in the Browser window announce. You able but also AWeb so configure, that an external Bildanzeiger used is, around the images there-deliver. Objections you, that images the he already in the memory from AWeb find not over a externe indicator personated become. That can the fall is, when an Link on an image shows, which also already in a document anticipates/occurs, which he in the Speicherpuffer is. Then the image already dekodiert is and he in the memory is would it an dissipation on resources it still once to decode and then also still wider memory for the externe indicator aufzuwenden. When you the image with a externe indicator view want, must you first the AWeb-Speicherpuffer clean. An path an image to clean is the Popup- menu to use. 9.3.6.6. Embedded images an document can embedded images hold, the with the text "verwoben" are. When an such image (still) not charged is ought, shows AWEB on of it place an Icon. You able in "settings/ images load" choose, if images forthwith charged become shall or even not. AWeb shows under differently circumstance defferent pictograms on: * this Icon stands for an not geladenes image. Click you it on around the image to load. * when an ungeladenes image simultaneous an Link on an document is, is an diagonal line over the image designed. Click you in the upper left half of Icon, around direct the Link to follow or in the bottom raked half, around the image to load. This image stands for an unloaded, dialable Map. Because an dialable Map always an Link on an other document is, appear here even so an diagonal line. Click you on the bottom raked half around the image to load. As soon as it charged is, able you a point on the Map anklicken. You able in the left upper half click around the Link without Map- coordinates to follow. Server should in the position is this as an requirement one pure Textversion the side to hear. * when an image from one of these ground not charged become can, is this Icon displayed. For an image can an so-called OLD-text definieirt become. That is an text the displayed is, when the browser the image not announce. Natural understands AWeb these OLD-text and shows him instead of Icon on. With a OLD-text provide images see unloaded folgerndermaßen from: * Ungeladenes image. * Ungeladenes image, which simultaneous a Link on an anklickbare Map represent. 9.3.6.7. Download place a Link to follow and an new document to announce or an image to load and to announce, able you an document or an image direct download. Around this to carry execution hold you the -key pressed, during you on the Link click. The document or image is now receive and an Dateiauswahl appear, the you a names and a Speicherort determine leaves. When the document already in the buffer existing is, is it not renewed over the net charged, but only under the from you entered names conserved. You able also announced image on this kind and wise man conserve. Drükken you easy the -key and hold you she pressed, during you the image anklicken. That serves even with Hintergrundbildern (only when which displayed become): Klicken you easy anywhere on the background (simultaneous -key press) and you become to the names asked under the the background conserved become shall. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when the image also a Link represent ought, so could an - Klicken of picture equivocal is; in these fall saves AWeb the image. When you the document "behind" the image download want, should you the Popup- menu use. 9.3.6.8. Popup-menu when you the or the -key press, during you on a Link or an image click, opens AWeb an Popup-menu with different very nützlichen possibilities, the otherwise heavy to move would be. You able AWeb so configure, that he the Popup-menu also opens, when you the -key press, or when you the medial or raked Maustaste actuate. 9.3.6.9. Clipboard-use this attribute is in the special Edition not available. 9.3.6.10. AppWindow-property when you AWeb on the Workbench-screen run leave, relates he the Browser window how an AppWindow. The means, that you an Workbench- Icon on the Browser window consider able and the relevant file in the underlying window open is. 9.3.6.11. Ikonifizieren with the menu item "project/Ikonifizieren" able you AWeb ikonifizieren. When you AWeb ikonifizieren, become all window closed and the AWeb own screen closed, where memory enabled is (special when AWeb on a own screen ran). In addition become all images from the memory excluded. All transfers run in the background wider. After you AWeb ikonifiziert have, appear an Icon on the Workbench. Click you this double on, opens AWeb renewed his screen and its window how ahead. You able also an other Icon on the AWeb Icon consider around AWebs giving out again to activate and the file, which to the Icon heard in a new AWeb window to open. 9.3.7. AWeb-settings 9.3.7.1. Browser settings this Preferences subdivided he in 5 subassemblies: options, fonts, styles, colors and indicator. Options HTML modes Strikt - only the officially standard is recognized. Tolerant - many Netscape- and other amplifications become recognized. In addition offers the permissively mode also an error tolerance over against many typing error, inclusive false comments. Compatibles - around real bad programmed HTML pages still represent to able. Javascript here can one Javascript deactivate or optimized and tolerant adjust. Warn by suspicious JavaScript Warnt you by suspicious JavaScript code. JavaScript error show here able you determine, if Javascript error displayed become shall or not. Use Frames here have she the choice between Frames use or not use. Nominal Framehöhe in lower-case window (e.g. On a onscreen with one height from 200 or 256 pixel) appear an side with Frames often bruised. When you this Kästschen dial, is an greater height for the formation of layouts uses. The makes single Frames greater and easier unsuitable. Blättersymbole as list show many people use an Commodity, the Blättersymbole in Popup-menu metabolizes. I hold the for no good idea, then it merely the behavior of field changes, but not is look, and because it only GadTools-field affect, the not constant used become (because of the confinements the GadTools-Library). Sure have Blättersymbole also some disadvantages, hence offers AWeb the possibility, Blättersymbole in form one list there-deliver. Consider you, that Auswahlfelder with more as five choices or with the possibility the Mehrfachauswahl always as list personated become. When you this small box choose, become Blättersymbole always as list personated, also, when she few as five options bid. Progressive charts-advertisement accepted, an side contains an great table. The most browser show then so nothing on, till the complete table read in is - and the can long last. AWeb offers an progressive Tabellanzeige, and the means, that he the table announce, during she still read is. The advantage lies on the hand: you see already in one earlier Ladephase more from the side. It gives but two disadvantages: firstly can an later more read part the table an greater Spaltenbreiten needed make - the leads to a creation the entirety table. At the worst is the table with every amount data block new built up; the leads to a ugly mender. To the second can the progressive Tabellenaufbau about 10% slower is as the normal advertisement, but the is through the earlier advertisement from division the table more as balanced. With these small box toggle you between more progressive and normally Tabellenanzeige around. Use backdrops and colors many pages have Hintergrundbilder or -farben. Those become from AWeb only displayed, when this small box choosen is. Is the not the fall, become only the colors uses, the in the Browserfarben-settings fixed become. Handzeiger over Links Wechselt by Links from normal Mauszeiger on a Handzeiger. Use background Sound some pages have an mood music. When this small box elective is, is this music always played, when the side displayed is. Otherwise is the music not automatic played. You able the music then hear, when you the "menu item control/mood music play back" choose. Underlining Links when active, become all Links still once additional underlined. Blink (0.1s) Blinkgeschwindigkeit in seconds. Fonts here able you the Schrifttyp, the font and the size of type give. Styles for every HTML-style-mark (also day called) able you adjust, which font-type (normal or setier breadth) and which bigness used become shall. Even so be able you a Schriftstil choose. The list contains all necessary styles for it. Under the list is an short description the signification the straight gewählten mark. Celebrations breadth Wählen you this small box, when you want, that for this mark an font with foothold breadth instead of of Proportionalzeichensatzes used is. Abs. Bigness for brands the headline (

till
) able you here an Zeichensatzgröße from 1 till 7 enter. Bigness 1 is the least, 7 the greatest. Transmit relay control. Bigness for all other brands able you here an relative bigness enter. Valid relative bulks are -6 till +6. The really bigness, the for these type uses is, is then the actual normal bigness in the document, corrected through these worth. Consider you, that the final bigness never smaller as 1 or greater as 7 is is. Normal, fat, cursive, underlined Benutzen you this small box, around the notation for the edited mark to choose. Colors here able you the colors from Links, already visited Links, angewählten Links, the background and the text adjust. Indicator here able you for the different Datatypes, indicator and Abspieler define. 9.3.7.2. Progam-settings the Preferences subdivided he in 4 subassemblies: onscreen, palette, options and program's. Onscreen here able she the onscreen, on the AWeb run shall adjust. With it have she the selection between a default öffentlichen onscreen, a named öffentlichen onscreen or a own öffentlichen onscreen. Palette Palettenänderungen able here made become. Options Speicherpfad here must the path adjusted become, where the files copied become shall, the you from the Internet download. More temporary path this path is for temporary files used. The are files, the to the externe Anzeigern transmitted become as soon as images, the not buffered become. Scroll-overlaps when you an side high- and runterrollen, gives it an overlap. When you an greater overlap wish - when you about a greater font use - able you whose bigness here else. Places you in these field the desired overlap (measured in pixel) an. Shell comands in Links permit in the SE-version not verfüfbar. Pictograms produce when you this small box dial, generated AWeb for every file, the you conserve or download, an Icon. When it an text file is (HTML or easier text), is therein AWeb as standard program specified, so that you the text easy through an Doppelklick on the Icon look at able. Hotlist window schließtg automatic with the selection of Links from the Hotlist, is by the activation these option, the Hotlink window automatic again closed. Hotlist automatic open Hotlist is at activating automatic open. Window-story automatic open the window "story" is at activating automatic open. Window-story shuts automatic the alike how by the Hotlist. Indentations enable in SE-version not available. Network-status automatic open Netzwert-Status window is at activating automatic open. Truing Auswahl window all Auswahl window become in the centre of AWeb-window open. Program's here able Siue adjust, which editor, HTML Quelltextanzeiger and Bildanzeiger you use will and which Script at activating and termination wervenden will. 9.3.7.3. GUI-settings the GUI-Preferences apportions he in 6 submenu: options, menu, buttons, Popup, buttons and navigation. Options navigational-buttons show when active become all Navigationknöpfe show. User-buttons show is this activates, become buttons of user's displayed. Popup-menu activation here able you adjust, with which key he the Popup-menu open shall. Menu here able you the menu to yours Wüschen configure. In the SE- version but not available. Buttons in these menu able you buttons on your AWeb surface place, with those you then different actions accomplish able, how Z.B's. Left-hand to Internetseiten define or program's commence. Popup with these menu able you in you Popup-menu, to the already voreingestellten actions, own add or also consisting of clean. Buttons here able you Tastaturkürzel (Shortcuts) for appointed actions adjust. In the SE-version is this function but not available. Navigation here able you the Navigationsknöpfen, actions allocate. In the SE- version is this function but not available. 9.3.7.4. Network-settings the NEtzwerkPreferences is in 6 submenu apportioned: options images load here able you adjust if images, only the Maps or at all no images charged become shall. Local index gives the file for the lokalen index on. A maximum of. Network- associations/Diskzugriffe The maximum number from Netzwerkverbindungen and Diskzugriffe leave he here adjust. Homepage here is the Internetadresse registered, the always when AWeb restarted is, forthwith charged become shall. Activating with the homepage when the function not activates is, is no Startseite used. Ignore MIME-type from Server the has in the section "dayboy indicator" particularly explains, broadcast the most Server the MIME-type together with the data. Unfortunately able many a Server the correct MIME-type not ascertain and give so false informations over that out. Thereby is an transfer file under circumstance only conserved, instead of displayed, how it he heard. Continuous animation Kontrolliert the kind and wise man, in the the Hintegrund-status-indicator (or. The transfer-animation) collaborates. In the default is these indicator for every Bit on Netzwerkaktivität a step wider animates. When you the continuous animation adjust, runs the animation with more unchangeable speed, so an transfer occurs. Program's in the SE-version not available. Proxy Proxy-Server an Proxy-Server is an more specific Server, the between yours computer and the Internet switched become can. Place an union to a Server to produce, the perhaps in end the world lies, takes the browser only contact to the Proxy-Server on. This has a buffer with the in häufigsten angefragten pages, so that angefragtes document possible. Already here ready lies. If not, fetches the Proxy-Server the document for you. On this wise man is the commerce in the Internet decreased and the Surfen accelerated. Many a time is the Proxy-Server the sole possibility, with you Provider in contact to tread. With it acted he also as Firewall. One Proxy adjust at first choose you the journal, for the you a Proxy adjust will. In the Auswahlfeld are 4 possibilities defaulted: . HTTP . FTP . Gopher . Telnet then give you the address of Proxy-Servers in the Proxy-field an. Places you sure, that your data an these both forms has: http://proxy.foo.Bare http://proxy.foo.Bare:8080 (where name and Portnummer natural differ permit!) when the address not with "http://" begins, sets AWeb this from he from in front of it. Confined Proxy-use some Proxys able with form not bypass, when this METHOD=POST conclude, or an Zugriffberechtigung necessitate. If you problems with such pages have, try you it with these small box. It worrys for it, that AWeb such pages direct administered, without use of Proxy. Those Sites without Proxy use if this list names from Sites contains (also known as "locations" or "Hostnamen"), become documents or images from these Sites never over the Proxy conducted. Employ you the new-button, around a entry to add and the "discharge"-button, around a ausgewählten entry to remove. With a Doppelklick on a entry able you him on place and place alter. Buffer AWeb deposits a buffer on your hard drive on, around objects to computer store. You able here an Pufferverzeichnis give, which for it unused become shall. You should for this an new directory lay against or an empty use. Use you the directory exclusive of for the AWeb-buffer. Give you the full pathnames on or click you on the field, around with help of Requesters choose to able. Consider you, that changes settings not forthwith to the effect come, when you she use or computer store. Around a widersprüchlichen buffer to avoid, used AWeb the old Pufferverzeichnis wider, till you the progam leave. First then become the new settings active and stand at next run to the zur ~ - at one's disposal. Reviewing Pufferkopie places you here the Kontrollmodus an. Once per meeting is the commended attitude. Fast answer activate you this field, when you an swiftly answer of buffer wish. Buffer size in these both field able you the maximum buffer size in the main memory and on the hard drive fix. All bulks should in kB specified become. At least free leave those two field lay the minimum on memory fast (chip and fasts), the AWeb free leave shall. Shall few memory free is, as here specified is, distant AWeb object from the memory. Normally remained this objects then on your hard drive get. When you here more memory give, as generally enabled become can (to the example more as 0 kB fasts on a Amiga without fasts-memory), distant AWeb to and to all documents and images from the memory. Be you so careful, which values you here adjust. The data happen in kB. Those Sites not puffern when this list names from Sites contains (also known as "locations" or "Hostnamen"), become documents and images from these Sites not in the buffer saved. Employ you the new-button, around a new entry to add, and the "discharge"-button, around the angewählten entry to remove. With a Doppelklick on a entry able she him on place and place change. Private life Referer during the Browsen suppress reproofs become beneath the browsen constrained. Spamblock at News posten activate Spammer (i.e. Versender from unerwünschten for-sale E-mail) rummage often all article in Newgroups to E-mail-addresses. When you this small box choose, hold the from you verschickten article changed Adressangaben, around you against such practices to protect. E-mail address as FTP Anonymous-keyword is this function activates, is at eventuation in a FTP Server the enamel address as keyword used. Use Cookies here able you adjust, till to which degree you itself against an violation your privacy through Cookies protect will. RFC 2109 the new standard (RFC 2109) for Cookies offers a disabuse cover the privacy as the original Cookie-mechanism from Netscape. Worse luck are not all Server compatible to these standard. When you these small box not mark, is the new mechanism parked (for the fall, that you problems with a particular Site have). Mail/News here become all enamel-Datein registered, with it you with AWeb also enamel ship and receive able. Further info for this find you in the documentation to AWeb on the OS3.9-CD-ROM. 9.3.7.5. The menu project menu the project menu offers functions around window to open or to close, documents to load or to computer store or AWeb to leave. Window close Schließt the actual window. Open URL over an Dateiauswahl can an HTML-file direct charged become. Open WWW it opens the Dateiauswahl and carries already "http://www" an. News open it starts the internal Newsreader. Open local... Over an Dateiauswahl can an HTML-file direct charged become. Seek-engines... It opens the seek-window. Quelltext shows the HTML-Quellcode the actual side with the show... voreingestellten Anzeigeprogramm on. Quelltext it opens the Dateiauswahl around the Quelltext the actual computer store... HTML-file to store. Over... It opens an window with Versionsinformationen. When the actual window over a ARexx-Port disposes, is the name here displayed. Ikonifizieren Schließt all window and minimized AWeb on an Icon on the Workbench. While AWeb ikonifiziert is, runs the Netzwerkübertragung wider. Around the window again to open, click you double on the AWeb-Icon or consider you an other Icon on the from AWeb. End Beendet AWeb; before become all current Netzwerkoperationen broken off. Control menu the control menu offers the possibility AWebs other functions out of those of buffer to control. Images now load initiated the shop the images of actual document. This menu item has two sub-dots: all images initiated all till now not geladenen images of actual document to load. Only Maps initiated the shop all till now not geladenen, anklickenbaren Maps of actual document. Mood music Spielt the mood music the augenblicklichen side play back off. Play the Sound already, is he broken off and actuates renewed from in the front. Frames put all Frames the actual window on your disfavour predefined bigness back. Network-status... It opens the Netzwerkstatus window, or brings it in the foreground, in case it already open is. Reload current document it loads the actual document renewed. The side is from the buffer excluded and renewed receive. Images of actual Dok. It loads the images of actual document renewed. The images become renewed from your Originalquelle receive. Shop abbort Unterbricht the shop the side in these window. Loading processes in the background able herewith not broken off become, use you for this the "breaking off"-button in the Netzwerkstatus window. Proxy deactivate when you Proxies configured have able you these menu item use around the use the Proxies on- and interrupt. JavaScript Stoppt all current JavaScript-program's. Abbort buffer menu the buffer menu stands functions to the control of buffer, as soon as to the store and discharge the gepufferten Autorisierungen ready. Buffer- it opens the buffer-advertisement. Viewer... From the memory Löscht a the following points from the remove Speicherpuffer. When the objects also in the Festplattenpuffer are, so remain she there! No displayed images all images, which not on the (the) actually, visible Seite(n) uses become, become from the memory excluded. All images all images inclusive the on the (the) actual angezeigten Seite(n) become on the memory excluded. No displayed documents all documents the to the time not uncover are, become from the memory excluded. From Disk clean Löscht a the following points from the Festplattenpuffer, as soon as from the Speicherpuffer, when the objects not in use are. You become first to one confirmation asked. All images Löscht all images from the Festplattenpuffer. All documents Löscht all documents from the Festplattenpuffer. Buffer clean Löscht all images and documents from the Festplattenpuffer. Buffer Synchronisiert the Pufferregistrierung with the files, clean up... The real on the hard drive found become. In addition become all files in the buffer, the not to AWebs cache belong to excluded. Zugriffsberechtig. Saves the actual Autorisierungsdetails. Computer store authorizations it opens the Autorisierungsänderungs window. Edit... Navigational-menu the navigational-menu offers functions around in window-course the documents navigieren to able. Back it goes an document in the window-course back. The window-course contains all pages, the ahead in these window looked become. Forward it goes an document in the window-course forwards. Home-document it loads the side, the you as "Home" adjusted have. Window-course it opens the window-course. Hotlist menu the Hotlist menu offers functions to the use your Hotlist or around an foreign Hotlist einzulesen. The Hotlist Fügt the actual document on the end your Hotlist add on. Hotlist show shows the Hotlist in the actual Anzeige window on. Hotlist show... It opens the Hotlist-window. Hotlist-manager... It opens the window the Hotlist-accociation. Settings menu the settings menu contains functions around AWeb to configure. Images load here is fixed, if images forthwith or only on wish charged become shall. He contains three sub-dots: "all images", "only Maps" and "From", the selbsterklärend are. Hintergrundbilder tuning the background color and the Hintergrundbildeinstellungen. Mood music tuning the mood music. Browser- Läßt the BrowserPreferences appear. einstellungen... Program's- Läßt the ProgrammPreferences appear. instellungen... GUI- Läßt the GUI-Preferences appear. Settings... Network- Läßt the network-Preferences appear. einstellungen... Actually Speichert all actual settings. Settings computer store settings Speichert all actual settings as another computer store as... Config. A Dateiauswahl appear and you able an directory determine in which the settings conserved become shall. Normally computer store you the settings in a directory in ENVARC:Aweb3 off, so that you the Verzeichnisnamen at boot from AWeb as CONFIG Tooltype or argument use able. Settings it loads an alternate config. Load... Fix as Speichert the actual positions all alternate bigness Einstell window of first Browser windows, as soon as of it bigness off. Help menu the help menu offers you more Hilfsinformationen. Documentation shows the AWeb guide in these window. AWeb-homepage it loads the AWeb-homepage. The Popup-menu from a Link, a image or a Frame outgoing gives it defferent things, the you with it do want. You want perhaps a Link follow, is document download, him in a new window open, an image load or clean, etc. The Popup- menu gives you the possibility between all these things on simple and clear wise man choose to able. Furthermore able you the choices in the Popup- menu self on your needs optimal acclimatize. Around the Popup-menu to open, hold you either the - or the -key pressed and click on a Link or an image; or you click with the middle Maustaste on a Link or an image (in case you an Dreitastenmaus possession). The menu opens he and presents you an list from choices hanging from type of object, on which you clicked have. Then click you on the from you desired function. Around the Popup-menu for a Frame to open, click you likewise anywhere in the Frame, outside of Links or of Vordergrundbildes. When you on a Link or an image click is the Popup- menu for this object displayed. You able AWeb also so configure, that the Popup-menu also at Drükken the right Maustaste or when you the -key pressed hold appear. Around the menu to close without an function to select, press you the raked Maustaste or click you anywhere outside of Popup-menu. 9.3.7.6. Image-functions when you the Popup menu for an image open have, can it voreingestellt following functions hold, in as much she applicable are: image load it loads the image, exactly how when you on the image clicked have. Image remove Löscht the image from the memory. Image new load it loads the image renewed. Image computer store Speichert the image, exactly how when you with on the image pressed have. Image downloaden it loads the image down. Image show those function shows the image with the externe indicator for these Bildtyp on. 9.3.7.7. Left-hand-functions when you the Popup-menu for a Link open, can it voreingestellt following functions hold, in as much she applicable are: Link open it opens the Link in the resemble window, exactly how when you on the Link clicked have. Left-hand in the it loads the document in the background, shows it but in background open not window on. You able herewith an document in the cache to the späteren observation download. Left-hand computer store Speichert the file, on the the Link shows on hard drive. Left-hand downloaden it loads the file, on the the Link shows. Left-hand the Hotlist Fügt a entry in the Hotlist with the URL of attach Links an. When you the Popup-menu for an image, which simultaneous an Link is open, contains it both sentences on functions. 9.3.7.8. Fram-functions when you the Popup-menu for a Frame open, can it voreingestellt following functions hold: contents new load it loads the Frame renewed an. Quelltext Speichert the Quelltext the file, the straight in the Frame computer store displayed is. Quelltext show it starts the HTML-indicator around the Quelltext the file, the straight in the Frame displayed is, to announce. Einzein show shows only the actual content of Frames in a separate Browser window on. In the contents it starts the Suchfunktion for the side, the straight in the seek Frame displayed is. Info it opens the Informations window for the side, the straight in the Frame displayed is. When the document in the Frame an Hintergrundbild has, contains the Popup- menu functions for the Hintergrundbild and for the Frame. 9.3.8. Frequently problems Unterstehend some the häufigeren problems the aufreten could and her solutions. . AWeb want not commence. It say it can xxx.image or xxx.gadget not find. Probable have you OS3.9 not complete installed. Those special Edition runs only on AmigaOS 3.9 or superior. . AWeb falls at shop of GIF picture off. The frequently used ZGif Datatype version 39.16 has a error. Assure you he version 39.18 or better of, or an other GIF Datatype to use. . AWeb shows not the entire side on. Others browser show the side correct on. Probable contains the side some error in the HTML code. Single sculler the häufigen error is the use from false comment as an Unterteilungslinie in the HTML Quelltext. In permissively HTML mode attempted AWeb the comment so to interpret, how it from author wahscheinlich meant was. In strikten HTML mode become great part the side based on the defective syntax possibly auskommentiert. Attempts you the HTML mode on tolerant or compatible umzustellen. . AWeb is dreadful slow when it on a own screen runs. The has what with the use of chip Memorys and the DMA bandwidth to do. Apparent is this problem worse, when you a quickened calculator have. The solution is either an inferior to or an higher speed ("baudrate") by your union to the modem to use. Activating you by your modem speed (when you an 14k4 modem, commence you by 14k4 Verbindungsgeschwindigkeit). Then raise you the speed till you an dramatically retardation ascertain. Then go you again a step back with the Verbindungsgeschwindigkeit. Around the Verbindungsgeschwindigkeit to you modem to alter, can it needed is settings in you Anwahlprogramm, TCP Stack and/or you SANA driver to alter. The seeing you please in the accordingly instructions. . Backdrops in AWeb are dreadful slow, much slower as by Amiga Browsern the opposition. That can on a ineptly picture Datatype lie. Benefit you the 24-bit picture Datatype only on CyberGraphics umbrellas; on original Amiga umbrellas is this Datatype very slow. Use you the original picture.Datatype your Workbench diskette. . The Farbrequester the Programmeinstellungen: The palette side generated Störeffekte on a CyberGraphics screen. That lies on the palettes-orientated redesigned of AmigaOS. This redesigned serves good on Amiga Chipsatz umbrellas, is but not bestonders suitable for Grafikkarten. . With me runs AWeb on a lower-case screen and the save-, Benutzen-, test-, Abbrechenknöpfe in the Einstellungs windown are outside of screen. Activating you the Reaction Preference-progam, go you on the "Misc" side and set you "clearance" down. . When I the öffentlichen AWeb-screen clos, during an Besucher window open is, falls the calculator often off when it he around a Cybergraphics screen acts. That is an error in CyberGraphics V2.15 and inferior to. The equality passes also on other CyberGraphics umbrellas. . When the Fenstger not activates is and one in the Scrollbalken- area klickt (outside of Scrollbalkens) animates he sure the Rollbalken, but the windowinhalt is not mitgescrollt. That is an error in intuition. The equality passes many a time also in MultiView. . I use MagicMenu and off and on hangs he the system on when I an menu open. With MagicMenu version 2.15 or superior ought this problem disappeared is. . I use not MagicMenu but my system hangs, when I on the great part the Auswahlknöpfe in the settings- menu klicke. Assure you he, that you the version of "chooser.gadget" use, the these archive appositional is. In addition are some Mauspointer- animation- Commodities known for it the ground for this Hänger to is. 9.3.9. Use of Low-week Amiga you able a Low-week-Amiga with little memory use, when you him right configure. Here are some recommendations: . Clasps you all unnötigen window, applications, etc. . Letting you AWeb on the voreingestellten öffentlichen screen run. . Places you images load on "from", and load you only images, the you real see want. . Switching you the mood music off. . Fit you not any own GUI buttons but of use you the voreingestellten. . Places you the maximum number from contemporaneously Netzwerkverbindungen and Festplattenzugriffen on 1. Each union used up valuable memory. . Places you the temporären path on an directory on your hard drive and not on the RAM. . Places you yours buffer how follows an: Speicherpuffergröße: rough 50% of free storeroom when AWeb runs. Festplattenpuffergröße: so much you want. Minimum free chip-RAM: about 50kB. Minimum free fasts-RAM: 0kB. Use you no JavaScript. When you this recommendations note is Websurfen with little memory possible. Be you but thereupon prepared, that complex pages (with great charts) under circumstance not in the memory fit and that's why cropped or illegibly become. Natural is Websurfen with insufficient memory essential comfortablier. You able AWeb on a own screen with more colors and a greater Speicherpuffer, etc. Run leave. 9.4. AmigaMail AmigaMail is an small and simple E-mail-progam. It bolstered PO3-Mailboxen and the SMTP-journal. It contains also an small address directory and is hence for each insufficient, the only off and to an E- mail broadcast or receive is. When you the AmigaMail commence appear the above mapped Haupt window. When you the progam the first time use, must you first still an couple settings carry out. Choose you there to in the menu the point "settings". The Preferences has four sub-dots "user", "SMTP Server", "POP Server" and "POP settings", the you all cover must and the in the following described become. 9.4.0.1. The Preferences "user" here give you your personal data an. Correct name: yours fore- and surnames (e.g. "Fred Mustermann"). Enamel-address: your enamel-address (e.g. "xyz@xyz.Netto"). Organization: the compay name or the organization. Antwortadresse: here must only then an E-mail-address registered become, when the answer-mail on an other address, as the under "enamel-address" specified address clever become shall. Signature- when you not every time under your enamel your datei: signature or. Label (e.g. "With kinds salute, Fred Mustermann") write will, dan create you an file with these lines and give here the path to these file on. Those file is then on every one mail from you appended. 9.4.0.2. The Preferences "SMTP Server" with SMTP-Server carry you the SMTP-Server of provider an, from the you your enamel-address get have. The is in our fall "the hague-partner.com", by the German Telekom would it "mailto.Traumatically-online.DE". The Port-issue stands standard on "25" and you should these worth also not change. If AmigaMail an Log-file lead shall, the all activities of program logged, click you "Aktiviere Log" on. With "Log file" must you the path and the names for the file fix. 9.4.0.3. The Preferences "POP Server" with POP-Server must you the POP-Server yours Mailkonto-provider fill out. Around an new mail-account (Account) adjust, must you on "add" press. Then become the points on the right activates. POP Host that is the address yours POP-Servers. In our fall is the "the hague-partner.com", by the Telekom "pop.Traumatically-online.DE". POP Benutzername give you here the names an, under the the Mailkonto by you Provider (e.g. German Telekom) arranged became. POP keyword give you here the keyword an, the for the mail-account be taken became. Spool-file in these file become the ausgehenden and ankommenden mail this POP-accounts saved. Give you a path and a names on, under the this file created become shall. On Server clean those function brings about, that mail, as soon as you she from mail-account collected have, excluded become. When you the mail not clean, could you account anytime full is and then able you no wider mail more get. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- when you no Spool-file give is AmigaMail no mailing from Server load! Make you on each fall a crotchet by "Auf Server clean", because AmigaMail lades otherwise every time the old files again an, so that you she then mehrach in you p.O. box have. Worse luck has AmigaMail no function, how "Dublikate avoid". 9.4.0.4. The Preferences "POP settings" The POP-settings are optionally, i.e. You need here not unconditional some to register or to alter. Periodically check when your enamel always regular, e.g. Every half hour fetched become shall (only when you online are), toggle you the point "periodically check" and on and stand by "period (minutes)" the time an. Action by newer when you over new mail informed become will mail choose you here an action from: advertisement spark: the Workbench-onscreen glares on. Tone playing: the adjusted tone (by sound the tone choose) is played. Start command it starts an file, when you an mail get. The handling the Haup window from AmigaMail has practical two-part. In upper area is the accociation the Postfächer and the bottom area is for the Erstellen and Bearbeiten from mail reserved. The list "p.O. box" contains all Postfächer or. Enamel-accounts, the you arranged have. The following Postfächer are already installed: Inbox the incoming mail. In this subject become all ankommenden enamel charged. Outbox the outgoing mail. In this subject become all from you verschickten enamel saved. Trash the garbage can. Here are the from you gelöschten mail saved. Drafts The drafts. Here stand the mail, the you written, but still not sent have. Saved the Mailspeicher. The mail, the you special secured have. Spool right of it is the list the mail of p.O. box, the you in the right "p.O. box"-list activates have (e.g. "Inbox"). In bottom area of Haupt windows become mail personated, edited and created. The upper area is for the representation of Kopfbereichs the mail ("headers"), on the right of it is displayed from which element the mail consists. The great field under shows the text the mail on. Above of mail-field is the Icon-ledge with the one AmigaMail ctrl can. The pictograms mean from left to on the right: 1. New mail compose 2. Mail clean 3. Mail computer store 4. Mail answer 5. Previous mail 6. Next mail 7. Choosen file computer store 8. Mailing call 9. Printing 10. Address table after mail to the discharge and save enabled become must you in the menu "message index new create" choose, with it you the settings appropriate einsortiert become. 9.4.0.5. New mail compose when you in the Haupt window from AmigaMail on the first Icon clicked have, opens he the window to the input one mail. The pictograms have the following Beudeutung: 1. Mail forthwith ship 2. Mail as pattern in Drafts computer store 3. Mail later ship 4. File on mail hitch on (is on the right displayed) 5. Mail clean 6. Clipboard 7. Copying 8. Integrate under it are the important input fields: on the recipient the mail. With the right button able you the addresses from the address directory choose. Cc "CC" (eng. Carboxylic Copy) means "carbon copy". On this address is an copy the mail clever. Re give you here the subject the mail on. The re (eng. "Subject" is very weighty, because he enables it the recipient, the mail quick to recognize and whose concern assign. Textfeld in Textfeld give you the text your mail an. 9.5. Tips & alternatives Auf the Amiga gives it an wide gefächerte Softwarepalette round around the Internet. To the existing Internet-program in the AmigaOS 3.9 gives it also still some alternatives. Those will we you here short put forward. Browser Auf the Browsermarkt gives it next to AWeb still two another browser - to the a is IBrowse (www.hisoft.co.uk) to name and to the other Voyager (v3.vapor.com), the also in the NetConnect-parcel (www.The hague-partner.com) hold is. E-mail Clients the well in häufigsten used E-mail-progam for the Amiga is YAM (Yet Another Mailer = still an other mail-progam). He owns monumental more functions as AmigaMAIL. In the actual version 2.2 offers he voluminous filter-possibilities, multiuser-support, PGP (Pretty Good Privacy)-integration, an convenient address directory, voluminous Suchfunktion and still lot more. Informations and the Download-archives gives it under www.yam.ch. Then these Mailer an Freeware-product is and through its efficiency convinced, is he simple to recommend. Meanwhile gives it still an other Freeware-mail-progam: Stargate. This resembles AmigaMAIL, is really quick and around some more extensive. Informations and the Download-archive find you under www.toysoft-dev.com. The sole for-sale agent in these area is Microdot-II. He resembles in the range of function YAM, is but around some faster. You find him likewise on the NetConnect-CD. Informations find you under www.vapor.com or. www.The hague-partner.com. FTP-Clients with FTP-program become files from Server charged or on this transfer. In these area gives it some agent, the all very competent are. The in häufigsten benutzten are well AmFTP and AmiTradeCenter. AmFTP is an shareware-product and is from Vapor (www.vapor.com) dislodged and is likewise on the NetConnect-CD hold. AmiTradeCenter is Freeware and you able it under www.amitradecenter.Netto load. Chat (IRC) the IRC-Chat is an the üblichsten forms of "together talking" in the Internet. Here are again the two Verbreitesten to name. The would once Black IRC and to the other the standard author AmIRC. Black IRC is meanwhile as Freeware under www.Innovative-web.Netto get. AmIRC is shareware and under www.vapor.com obtainable. He offers more functions, as Black IRC and is also regular gepfelgt and is also in the NetConnect-parcel hold. ICQ ICQ is also an kind Chat. You have an address directory in that you all wished Chat-partner fill out or. Seek able, the likewise ICQ possession. When one these persons Online is and ICQ restarted has is he with the status "Online" highlighted. You able then with him chatten. Further information informations find you under http://www.multimania.com/aubioane/ stricq/stricq.html. 9.5.1. Interesting Amiga-pages in the Internet news round around the Amiga find you under: www.amiga-news.DE www.amiga.org www.realdreams.cz/amiga www.ann.lu Amiga games Nachrichtenseiten: www.amigaflame.co.uk www.amigafire.com www.amigaextreme.com Amiga journals: www.amigaplus.DE www.amigamagazin.DE www.amigafuture.DE www.amigactive.com Online warehouses: www.amigatimes.DE www.playamiga.DE www.risc-amiga.DE OS3.9 Support: www.amiga.com www.The hague-partner.com others Links: www.amiga-club.DE aminet.Netto 10. ARexx 10.1. Introduction - what is ARexx? ARexx, the Amiga-companion to the IBM-programming language REXX< enables you the indivuelle formation your work environment. It characterizes he particularly good for script, over the uses controlled become. So able you e.g. With a ARexx-script, an Bildverarbeitungsprogramm there to arrange for, an whole directory full with images how from Geisterhand controlled in a landslide with a particular effect to edit. You able by it also more ARexx-capable uses collaborate leave, around so for instance the edited images automatic by enamel to broadcast. It gives many uses, the ARexx lean, however what is with the operating system self? Till AmigaOS 3.1 gave it only the possibility over the addressing from AmigaDOS-ordering and externe Funktionsbibliotheken on the operating system access. Neither the Workbench still other program's offered a ARexx-Port on. The is with AmigaOS 3.9 - and also already AmigaOS 3.5 - otherwise become. Those ARexx-introduction serves not as substitute for the ARexx-guide, the with AmigaOS 3.1 extradited is and he as HTML- and PDF-file also on the OS3.9-CDROM is. This describes already very good the separate comands from ARexx and is so an god book of reference. Place of it stands she there, how you the new ARexx-fähigen components from AmigaOS 3.9 head on able. Around you the first steps with ARexx to relieve, first of all but first once some bases. Many examples shall you over that out help, to hear, how you the new Funtionen use able. 10.2. First steps before you with ARexx work able, must you first of all once guarantee, that it also restarted became. Undoing you there to an Shell and write you: 9.Ram Disk:> rx 'say "hello world!"' hello world! --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ then one already alike in the first example both kinds from apostrophe needs, step also alike here the problem on: where are because the simple apostrophe on the keyboard. Solution: +<ä> as answer ought how in the example show "hello world!" Appear. --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- it appears by you instead of the giving out the error message "Host-surroundings not found" or "Host environment not found" then is ARexx on you Amiga at boot not restarted. That able you however light recover, in that you in the Shell the comand "RexxMast" enter. Normally is ARexx, or. RexxMast at first invocation automatic restarted, when this not already at boot of AMIGA follow is. This comand says you if ARexx already runs: 9.Ram Disk:> rexxmast ARexx version 1.15 copyright © 1987 passer William page. Hawes all Rights Reserved REXX server already taetig when the last zeile "REXX server already taetig" (REXX-Server already active) not displayed is, then was ARexx still not charged, became but now restarted. Around however not every time these comand enter to must, able you him also in her "User-Startup" write. Undoing you there to with a editor, to the example the "EditPad", the file "page:User-Startup" and be appropriate you you following row in addition: RexxMast >NIL: the "NILE:" brings about by it only, that the giving out of imperative "in Nirvana" clever is, with it he not by every boot an Shell-window opens. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ Who no change on the "User-Startup" carry out want, can RexxMast also from the "system"-drawer to WBStartup copy. Then is ARexx likewise at activating of AMIGA activates. Now able you ARexx already from one Shell from use, in that you single comands direct accomplish leave. The has but able you self an ARexx-script create? An ARexx-script is an simple text file, the ARexx-comands contains. With it she from ARexx eindutig recognized become can, must she with a ARexx- comment commence. Here now an simple example the at the same time also a ARexx-comand the new Workbench applies: /* open RAM:-script */ ADDRESS Workbench WINDOW '"ram Disk:" OPEN --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- the name "ram Disk" must twice in quotation mark comprised become. The Befehlsparameter become twice evaluated: once from ARexx and once from the Workbench: The simple quotation mark ' say ARexx, that it he around a text acts, the Arexx not evaluate shall, so no variable name and no formula. The twofold quotation mark " say the Workbench, that it he around an individual argument and not around two unconnectedly parameter acts. Typing you this small script easy to the example with "EditPad" an and computer store you it under the names "open-RAM.rexx". Zun checking able you it easy in the RAM-Disk computer store. When you it keep want, computer store you it in best to "REXX:". Those assignment shows on the standard-directory for ARexx-script. Ordinary is this the directory "SYS:page". Both directories have the advantage, standard in the Kommandosuchpfad hold to is: So must you only the names of ARexx-script, not but the PFad to the directory give. You able the script now easy through with the comand "RX" commence: rx open-RAM.rexx what makes the script? The is easy: it opens an Workbench-window with the content the "RAM-Disk". The is so, as if you with the mouse on the symbol the RAM-Disk double clicked have. The first comand in the script "ADDRESS Workbench" is by it an pure ARexx- comand, the ARexx inform, in future unavowedly comands on the Workbench shed. ARexx speaks with it the ARexx-Port the Workbench on. Every ARexxfähige progam has a ARexx-Port, on the ARexx-comands broadcast and from the ARexx answers get can. The second comand "WINDOW" is an comand, the the Workbench to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stands. With the option "OPEN" know he the Workbench on, the Workbench- window for the angegebenen path to open. The ability ARexx-comands with help of Shell-imperative "RX" direct from the Shell from to carry out has many implementation possible applications. So able you quick simple calculations accomplish: 9.Ram Disk:> rx 'SAY (10-5)/2' 2.5 that is by it wide stronger as the Shell-comand "Eval", then ARexx quantitative with Dezimalanteil even so bolstered how point- before stroke- calculation and braces. You able he the calculating even still more easily make, in that you a Shell-aliases define: 9.Ram Disk: alias calc rx 'SAY []' you have he so a new Shell-comand created, the she how follows use able: 9.Ram Disk: calc 2*3 6 --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ with it the aliases everlasting for Shell-window necessary able you him in the file "page:Shell-Startup" fill out. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when it you disturbs, the comand "RX" on the side give to must, able you for the file "open-RAM.rexx" also the "page"-Dateiattribut set, the an file as AmigaDOS- or ARexx-script marked. To the example so: protect RAM:open-RAM.rexx +s after this able you the script easy through the details its name commence: open-RAM.rexx 10.3. The remote controlled Workbench The new Workbench from AmigaOS 3.9 offers an entire row very interessanter ARexx-comands. You able with it fast all actions telecontrol, the actions telecontrol, the you otherwise with mouse and keyboard accomplish become. Many script from Drittanbietern zutzen this possibilities already extensive. The seeing you he there to calm times in the "Contributions"-directory on the AmigaOS 3.9-CD-ROM around. The ARexx-interface the Workbench is in five Hauptbereiche subdivided: . The "GETATTR"-comand allows it, different informations from the Workbench to get, so e.g. The version number the Workbench, but also the position of Workbench-Fenters or the type of Icon. . The "WINDOW"-comand opens, shuts and changed Workbench-window. Certain window-actions how e.g. The Minimieren/Maximieren or the in the foreground bring are additional on over own comands available. . The "ICONS"-comand manipulated pictograms: you able on- or given up or deferred become and lot more. . The "MENU"-comand allows it, every Workbench-menu to carry out, as if the user it choosen would have, and new entries in the resource- menu to add. . Additional gives it still comands for appointed actions the Workbench how e.g. The Umbenennen from files or the call of Workbench- Informations windows as soon as some special comands to the blocking the surface, so an ARexx-script collaborates, or to the translating one error number in plain text. For each these fields fölgen now an or two examples with explanation. For an complete description the separate ARexx-comands and all hers parameter read you please the Workbench-AREXX-hint on the OS3.9-CD-ROM. 10.3.1. I know what the "GETATTR"-comand accepted following parameter: GETATTR [OBJECT] [NAME ] [STEM ] [VAR ] the hears he first of all once reasonable complicated on, is but in the principle whole easy: "GETATTR" assign the Workbench on, to a particular object the "Workbench-file" informations to catch up and this in one ARexx-variable to computer store. So gives it to the example the Hauptobjekt "APPLICATION", with the one attributes the Workbench self inquire can. The can to the example so look: /* Workbench-informations */ ADDRESS Workbench OPTIONS RESULTS /* name of ARexx-ports the Workbench */ GETATTR APPLICATION.AREXX SAY "The Workbench leaves he over the ARexx-Port >"RESULT"< speak to." /* name of Workbench-Icon-font */ GETATTR APPLICATION.FONT.ICON.NAME VAR ikonschrift SAY "The Workbench uses the font >"ikonschrift"< for" SAY "Icon-names." When you this script in one Shell commence, get you following informations: 9.Ram Disk:> rx Workbench-informations.rexx The Workbench leaves he over the ARexx-Port >WORKBENCH< speak to. The Workbench uses the font >Helvetica.font< for Icon-names. What is new on these script in the opposition to the first example? The second comand "OPTIONS RESULTS" know ARexx on, from other program result contrary to to take. Without these comand could you from the Workbench no informations inquire. The both "GETATTR"-comands ask defferent attributes the Workbench self off. With the first is the result easy in the standard-ARexx-variable for result, in the variable "RESULT" conserved. With the second is expressly specified, in which variable the result saved become shall. Now still an some fortgeschritteneres example, the alike an list all geöffneten Workbench-window spends and some info over the first Icon in the "ROOT"-window - the Haupt window the Workbench - announce. The must by it not unconditional the Icon whole above left is! /* still-more-information */ /* shows the names all geöffneten Workbench-window */ ADDRESS Workbench OPTIONS RESULTS GETATTR WINDOWS STEM windowliste DO ignoring = 0 UP windowliste.count-1 SAY windowliste.Ignoring WEEK SAY /* question name, position, bigness and type of first Icon in the Workbench-Haupt window off */ GETATTR WINDOW.ICONS.ALL.0 NAME root STEM ikon SAY "name: " ikon.name SAY "position: X:" ikon.Links "Y:" ikon.top SAY "bigness: " ikon.width "x" icon.height SAY "type: " ikon.Letter this script shows now also the uses benzin gas the root-variables from ARexx. The are variables, the more under-variables in he combine able. In these example is the window-list prompted and in the root-variable " windowliste" discarded. " windowliste.count" contains by it the number the window, " windowliste.0" the names of first window, " windowliste.1" the names of second window etc. Those windownamen gives the "DO"-bow from. The second part of Skriptes asks the attributes of first pictograms in the Haupt window the Workbench off. After all how leave he this informations now of use? Some examples find you in the next cut off. 10.3.2. Many beautiful window Workbench-window able over the comand "WINDOWS" changed become: WINDOW [WINDOWS] < windowname> .. < windowname> [OPEN|CLOSE] [SNAPSHOT] [ACTIVATE] [MIN|MAX] [FRONT|BACK] [CYCLE PREVIOUS|NEXT] one gives so the or the names the window on, on the the Workbench an action accomplish shall. The name of window yields he by it from the path to the directory, of it content it represent. Typical names are ever to the architecture theirs intrasystem "ram Disk:", "Workbench:utilities" or "Work:texts". Next to the "WINDOW"-comand gives it also still special comands, the only an appointed action on an window use. So activates the "ACTIVATEWINDOW" an particular window, the "CHANGEWINDOW" changes the bigness of window etc. The Befehlsreferenz contains another such comands. Now an couple examples - an easier 3-Zeiler could to the example the "ram Disk"-window close: /* inferring-RAM.rexx */ ADDRESS Workbench WINDOW WINDOWS '"ram Disk:"' CLOSE --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ you able such lower-case comands also direct in the Shell try out, without an script to write: rx "ADDRESS Workbench WINDOW '""RAM:""' CLOSE" several of these comand leave he with semicolons from each other separate. Of angze comand must by it in quotation mark comprised become, with it "RX" not attempted instead of of it an script-file to commence. With it the double-length Anführungzeichen by "RAM:" still as such recognized become, must you double typed become (am AmigaOS 3.1 ARexx-guide, chapter 3.1.3). Together "GETATTR" leave he all on the Workbench geöffneten window close. To this ließt one first the list all geöffneten window an and shuts every: /* inferring-all.rexx */ ADDRESS Workbench OPTIONS RESULTS GETATTR WINDOWS STEM windowliste DO ignoring = 0 UP fenterliste.count-1 IF windowliste.i~=="root" THEN DO WINDOW WINDOWS '"' windowliste.Ignoring'"' CLOSE WEEK WEEK with it is "root" - the Haupt window the Workbench not closed. The gives in the rule only an error message, then the Workbench based on still current program's not cancels become can. Place all window to schlißen, able you also all window minimalisieren or in the foreground bring. Substitution you there to in the row with the "WINDOW"-comand the action "CLOSE" through an the following actions: OPEN it opens window CLOSE Schließt window SNAPSHOT Fixiert window ACTIVATE Aktiviert window R.P.M. Verkleinert window to hers smallest bigness A MAXIMUM OF Vergrößert window on her maximum bigness FRONT places window in the foreground BACK places window in the background Ðer "WINDOW"-comand and the comands, the special window-operations accomplish, accepting as argument also "TAETIG" for the straight active window. That is in the example here not uses, then when ARexx- script from a Shell-window from commence, no Workbench-window active is. The parameter makes sense, when ARexx-script direct over the Workbench restarted become. See there to the section "menu and Tastenkombinationen" wider behind in these chapter. 10.3.3. Pictograms move he the "ICON"-comand offers an entire row on possibilities: ICON [WINDOW] < windowname> ... [OPEN] [MAKEVISIBLE] [SELECT] [UNSELECT] [GROWN ] [DOWN ] [LINKS ] [X ] [Y 0 THEN DO ICON WINDOW root '"'ikon.name'"' SELECT WEEK ELSE DO ICON WINDOW root '"'ikon.name'"' UNSELECT WEEK WEEK to this requested it from the Workbench first of all the number the in the Haupt window dargestellten pictograms and leaves he then from every Icon the names give. When these an kleingeschriebenes "a" contains, assign the script the Workbench on, it to select, when not, it abzuwählen. This script could to one nattily Suchfunktion erweitet become. In a great window with many pictograms, the he not in the visible Dereicht of window find, could it with the parameter "MAKEVISIBLE" an particular Icon in the visible roll and it then also dial, with it it through his Glüheffekt alike in eye falls. 10.3.4. Menu and Tastenkombinationen The ARexx-interface offers the possibility, existing menu-Punke the Workbench to dial. Moreover able ARexx-script the "resource"-menu own menu items add. Both is over the "MENU"-comand done. With the call from menu items is the Workbench-window, from of it menu an function invoked become shall, quote. That works he then to the example thereupon from, in which directory the menu option "window/new drawer lay against" an drawer create is. Moreover gives one on, which menu option carried out become shall. The Workbench knows following menu items: 10.3.4.1. "Workbench"-menu WORKBENCH.BACKDROP Workbench as background? WORKBENCH.EXECUTE comand accomplish WORKBENCH. Image new base on REDRAWALL WORKBENCH. All update UPDATEALL WORKBENCH. Last report show LASTMESSAGE WORKBENCH.ABOUT version, copyright... WORKBENCH.QUIT Workbench leave... 10.3.4.2. "Window"-menu WINDOW.NEWDRAWER new drawer lay against WINDOW.OPENPARENT Übergeordnete drawer open WINDOW.CLOSE clasps WINDOW.UPDATE Aktualisieren WINDOW. All choose SELECTCONTENTS WINDOW. Indentations clean CLEARSELECTION WINDOW.CLEANUPBY. Content clean up to: chinks COLUMN WINDOW.CLEANUPBY. Names NAME WINDOW.CLEANUPBY. Date DATE WINDOW.CLEANUPBY. Bigness SIZE WINDOW.CLEANUPBY. Type LETTER WINDOW.RESIZETOFIT bigness acclimatize WINDOW.SNAPSHOT. Fix of window WINDOW WINDOW.SNAPSHOT. Fix: all ALL WINDOW.SHOW. Content anzaeigen: only files with pictograms ONLYICONS WINDOW.SHOW. All files ALLFILES WINDOW.VIEWBY.ICON content gold list: as pictograms WINDOW.VIEWBY.NAME to names WINDOW.VIEWBY.DATE to date WINDOW.VIEWBY.SIZE to bigness WINDOW.VIEWBY.LETTER to type 10.3.4.3. "Icon"-menu ICONS.OPEN undoing ICONS.COPY copying ICONS.RENAME Umbenennen... ICONS.INFO informations show... ICONS.SNAPSHOT Fixieren ICONS.UNSNAPSHOT position deallocate ICONS.LEAVEOUT Auslagern ICONS.PUTAWAY Zurïcklegen ICONS.DELETE discharge ICONS.FORMATDISK Disk reformat ICONS.EMPTYTRASH paperbasket deplete 10.3.4.4. "Resource"-menu TOOLS.RESETWB Workbench disfavour with the dialing of these menu items makes the Workbench exactly the, what she make would, when you self these MEnüpunkt with the mouse or the appositely key combination picked have. So opens "WINDOW.NEWDRAWER" the dialog-window to the Erstellen one new drawer: the user is requested a names for the drawer quote and first then, when he establishes, is the drawer generated. The "NEWDRAWER"- comand created however an drawer complete without the Zutun of user's (am the next chapter "what otherwise still possible is"). The following example shows exactly, how it goes. It opens the in these hint so ingratiate "ram Disk"-window and offers the user on, there an drawer to create: /* Erzuge-drawer.rexx */ ADDRESS Workbench WINDOW WINDOWS '"ram Disk"' OPEN MENU WINDOW '"ram Disk:"' INVOKE WINDOW.NEWDRAWER a other possibility would it, with the "ICON"-comand appointed pictograms to select and she with the menu item "ICONS.COPY" to duplicate. Still interessanter is however the possibility, own entries in the "resource"-menu the Workbench to add. With it give you the menu item a internal names and the mark, how he in the "Hilfmittel"-menu appear shall. Moreover is weighty quote, what pass shall, when the menu item choosen is. In addition leaves he still an Tastenkürzel give. The following script complies the resource-menu some interssante functions in addition: /* resource.rexx */ ADDRESS Workbench MENU ADD NAME schlissen TITLE '"all window close"' CMD 'Schließe-all.rexx' MENU ADD NAME oeffneRAM TITLE '"open RAM Disk"' SHORTCUT '"."' CMD '"WINDOW """RAM Disk:""" OPEN' SAY "squeeze you the enter key, around the menu" SAY "again to remove" PULL MENU REMOVE NAME close MENU REMOVE NAME oeffneRAM the script shows two possibilities, an menu-function to define: one can either an external script invoice or direct ARexx-comands in a Einzeiler accomplish leave. With letzterem is it weighty on the quotation mark to respect, with it all flips. For the second menu- entry is an key defined. Those necessary always together with the for menu usual right Amigataste. Pushes one the enter key in the Shell, from the from the script restarted became, become the menu again distant. With it is only necessary, the Workbench the internal names the menu-entries communicate. Next to menu leave he also Tastenkombinationen define. That goes with the "KEYBOARD"-comand. The following script complies the Workbench an keyboard-control for the "ram Disk"-Icon in addition. You able it, so the Tastenkombinationen active are, with the arrow on the Ziffernblock the keyboard ctrl: /* keyboard.rexx */ ADDRESS Workbench KEYBOARD ADD NAME left KEY '"NUMPAD 4"' CMD '"ICON WINDOW root """ram Disk""" LINKS 20"' KEYBOARD ADD NAME high KEY '"NUMPAD 8"' CMD '"ICON WINDOW root """ram Disk""" GROWN 20"' KEYBOARD ADD NAME on the right KEY '"NUMPAD 6"' CMD '"ICON WINDOW root """ram Disk""" RIGHT 20"' KEYBOARD ADD NAME down KEY '"NUMPAD 2"' CMD '"ICON WINDOW root """ram Disk""" DOWN 20"' SAY "you able the 'RAM-Disk'-Icon" SAY "now with the Zehnertasten ctrl, after" SAY "you the Workbench-window activates have." SAY "squeeze you the enter key, around the" SAY "Tastenkombinationen again to remove." PULL KEYBOARD REMOVE NAME left KEYBOARD REMOVE NAME high KEYBOARD REMOVE NAME on the right KEYBOARD REMOVE NAME down each key combination has analagous to the menu a internal names. Also the auszuführende action is on the same wise man fixed how at "MENU"-comand. The definition the to use key is however more flexible as by the menu-definitions. You able in the principle every possible key combination give. Some possibilities: shift key (eng. "Qualifier"): CTRL -key SHIFT any LSHIFT -key RSHIFT -key OLD any -key LALT -key RALT -key NUMPAD key on the Ziffernblock keyname: TAB -key F1-F10 -buttons BACKSPACE DEL -key HELP -key CR NUMPAD ENTER -key eighth you thereupon no Tastenkombinationen to use, the from the Workbench already used become! 10.3.5. What otherwise still possible is Zu the already beschriebenen ordering gives it still another. So gives it some comands around Workbench-actions immediate to carry out. "DELETE" extinguishes files, "NEWDRAWER" deposits new directories on and "RENAME" renames files around. With it is the user, otherwise as at ARexx- gesteuerten invocation the accordingly menu items the Workbench, not asked. /* action-in the-RAM.rexx */ ADDRESS Workbench WINDOW '"ram Disk:"' OPEN SAY "I erstelle now an new drawer." SAY "further with enter key." PULL NEWDRAWER '"ram Disk:new"' SAY "Nun designate I the drawer around." SAY "further with enter key." PULL RENAME '"ram Disk:new" "Umbenannt"' SAY "And now is she excluded ;-)" SAY "further with enter key." PULL DELETE '"ram Disk:Umbenannt"' with all three ordering is weighty, that you a absolute path give. The comands work independent from Workbench-window and know hence otherwise not, on which drive and in which directory she active become shall. Simple only "new" as Schubladenname would have here not handed. Two another comand are not unimportant: The till now unnatural example-script prevented not, that the user the Workbench used, during she self also active are. So would have an user easy the in the previous example created drawer clean able, before the script wider runs. The "RENAME"- and the "DELETE"-comand would be then in emptiness ran. From the fact is it weighty, in critically momenta the surface from the Workbench for the user to barricade and thereafter again to unlock. The following example clarified this: /* spaced.rexx */ ADDRESS Workbench LOCKGUI SAY "The surface the Workbench is now barricided." SAY "further with enter key." PULL /* here able critically actions run off */ UNLOCKGUI The bisherigen examples handled possibly emerging error not. With a error would be you easy with one ARexx-error message broken off. ARexx and Workbench bid however also helpfully functions, around on error gezeilt to react: /* error.rexx */ ADDRESS Workbench OPTIONS RESULTS SIGNAL ON ERROR WINDOW '"ram Disk:gibtsnicht"' OPEN QUITS error: SAY "the comand gave as acknowledgement an" RC "back." SAY "the means, its execution is aborted." SAY "over the WORKBENCH.LASTERROR-variable leaves he more hear." SAY "the last occured error has the issue:" WORKBENCH.LASTERROR FAULT WORKBENCH.LASTERROR SAY "the means:" RESULT CR this script activates with "SIGNAL ON ERROR" the ARexx-error handling. With a error is ARexx not more easy with one error message abbort, but the routine "error:" invoice. After this attempted the ARexx-script an Workbench-window for an not existing directory to open. Then the not goes, miscarries the "WINDOW"-comand and gives an "10" as acknowledgement. Then the "WINDOW"-error with a Rückgabewert irregular "0" a error reports, bounces ARexx now in the error processing routine. Those shows first of all the in the "RC"-variable (cr code) store Rückgabewert of "WINDOW"-imperative on. After this is the "WORKBENCH.LASTERROR"-variable to instalment pulled, the the AmigaDOS- error number of last mistake contains. Those can by means of of Workbench-imperative "FAULT" finally in plain text translated become. The script gives so the following from: the comand gave as acknowledgement an 10 back. The means, its execution is aborted. Over the WORKBENCH.LASTERROR-variable leaves he more hear. The last occured error has the issue: 205 the means: object not found --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ the plain text to AmigaDOS-Fehlernummern able you also in one Shell over the "Fault"-comand get: 12> fault 205 Fault 205: object not found 10.4. Commodities active also some Commodities leave he with ARexx head on. So offers the Commodity "Exchange" different comands to the Erfragen from informations or the encryption from Commodity-surfaces: ACTIVATE Aktiviert the specified Commodity DEACTIVATE Deaktiviert the angebebene Commodity GETINFO it asks informations to the Commodity off. Put following variables: CXINFO.1 Commodity-name CXINFO.2 Commodity-title CXINFO.3 Commodity-description CXINFO.4 TRUE = surface existing FALSE = no surface existing HASGUI has the Commodity an surface? HIDE Versteckt the surface from "Exchange" HIDEGUI Versteckt the surface of angegebenen Commodities ICONIFY Ikonifiziert "Exchange" ISACTIVE Ist the Commodity straight active? ISRUNNING Läuft the Commodity? WILE gives an list the straight current Commodities back. Isolated entries become through the specified separator apart. QUIT Beendet "Exchange" SHOWGUI shows the surface of angegebenen Commodity on. UNHIDE shows the surface from "Exchange" again on. UNICONIFY Deikonifiziert "Exchange" VERSION gives the version number from Exchange back. Fasts all comands give in the variable "RC" back, if you invocation issue had or not. All comands become on the ARexx-Port "Exchange.1" geschrickt - the issue is appended, in case, how by Exchange not possible, more copies of Commodities run off. To this an small example: /* Commodity.rexx */ ADDRESS Exchange.1 OPTIONS RESULTS GETINFO "Exchange" SAY "informations to Exchange:" SAY "name: " CXINFO.1 SAY "title: " CXINFO.2 SAY "description: " CXINFO.3 SAY "surface? " CXINFO.4 WILE "," SAY SAY "Nun follows an through commas unconnectedly list the" SAY "straight current Commodities:" SAY RESULT SAY SAY "Läuft Blanker straight?" SAY "further with enter key." PULL ISRUNNING "Blanker" IF RESULT=0 THEN DO SAY "refusal, start Blanker." ADDRESS COMMAND "Run SYS:tools/Commodities/Blanker" WEEK ELSE DO SAY "yes. Runs already." WEEK SAY SAY "open and clos surface from Blanker several time." SAY "Am end is the surface closed." SAY "further with enter key." PULL DO i=1 UP 5 SHOWGUI "Blanker" HIDEGUI "Blanker" WEEK SAY SAY "Aktiviere the Blanker." SAY "further with enter key" PULL ADDRESS Blanker.1 BRIGHT SAY SAY "Beende the Blanker." SAY "further with enter key" PULL ADDRESS Blanker.1 QUIT the script shows first some informations on and tests then if the "Blanker" runs. When not, is the Blanker over AmigaDOS as comand restarted. Then is the surface of "Blanker" several time open and closed. Then speaks the script the Blanker direct on, the analagous to Exchange over the ARexx-Port "Blanker.1"-comands entgegennimmt. It apportions the Blanker with, the onscreen to shining. Zuguterletzt is cheerful, in that the Blanker dependent is, he self to discontinue. Here to the digest still the comands other Commodities. All Commodities with ReAction-surface react atleast on the comands "HIDE", "UNHIDE", "ICONIFY" and "UNICONIFY", the analagous how by "Exchange" work. Over it out bid you still following comands: Blanker ANIMATION ON = it switches the encouraged graphic at Blanken an or OFF = from BRIGHT Verdunkelt the onscreen CYCLECOLORS ON = it switches the Farbverlauf an or OFF = from SECONDS put the number the seconds, before the onscreen darkened become shall. UNBLANK Beendet the Bildschirmblanken FKey ADDKEY Fügt an key combination in addition, (comands am the list back). KEYINFO Erfragt informations to one particular key layout. Those become in the variable FKEYINFO saved: FKEYINFO.1 = name the key FKEYINFO.2 = Welcher comand shall carried out become? (Am list back) FKEYINFO.3 = Befehlsargumente with it gives it following comands: (by "ADDKEY" and "KEYINFO" please always the Befehlsnummer give): 1 = leaves window 2 = leaves screens 3 = Maximiere window 4 = Minimiere window The following three comands need arguments: 5 = Füge text in addition 6 = start an progam 7 = start an ARexx-script 11. WarpOS - full achievement for the PowerPC 11.1. Introduction WarpOS is an Multitasting-kernel for PowerPc-processors (PPC), whereby PPC- applications on the Amiga used become able. WarpOS can one in about compare with "exec", the operating system-kernel of AmigaOS. So is it not unsurprisingly, that many functions of WarpOS an reflection more corresponding "exec"-functions represent. With WarpOS is also always the "PowerPC.library" bound. WarpOS is in the "PowerPC.library" integrated and is restarted, as soon as the "PowerPC.library" to the first time open is. The PowerPC.library is an miscellanous "Shared-Library" (Mixed Binary), which as well as functions for the 68K-, how also for the PPC-processor contains. --- WEIGHTY -------------------------------------------------------------- as soon as WarpOS revved became, can the original-ppc.library from Phase5/DCE not more used become. Ought WarpUP- and PowerUP-program's simultaneous carried out become, is for this an PowerUP-Emulation required 9der PPCLibEmu from Frank will is he in the WarpOS-archive). It follows an digest the most weighty Features from WarpOS: . Executable on all at present verfügbaren PPC-cards (accomodations on coming PPC-cards are planned) . High-speed-Kumminikations-interface between 68K and PPC-processor. . Complete natives Multitasting . Speicherverwaltung, semaphores, wiles/Tageverwaltung, signaling, Message-accociation complete in PPC-code . Fakulativer memory protection: task get the possibility, geschützten memory to allozieren . Virtual signals, i.e. Signals are "CPU-shared" and become always to the correct CPU redirected . Inter-CPU-Message-system: it able Message (newscast) between the cpu sent become . Optimal use the PPC-MMU and of PPC-cache . MMU/Exeption-Handling-Support for applications . Stromsparfunktion, when no PPC-applications run . PowerPC-Enforcer (cover the first footboy) . Fuller fall-dialog, which developer optimal by the debugging bolstered . Integrated Debugging-system to the simplification the debugging . More specific Support for hochoptimierte software, how games and demos . Complete Entwicklerunterlagen to the optimal development from PPC- software WarpUP and the most add on program become in assembler developed, the greatest part of it with the StormPowerASM (PPC-assembler). 11.2. WarpOS install around WarpOS on you calculator to install, must you the WarpOS- drawer open. Choose you the language, in the WarpOS installed become shall. The installing finds in four they strode instead of: 11.2.1. Which PPC-Board have you! Choose you here the obversely Board from. If you no PPC-card in you calculator have, choose you "no PPC-Board existing". 11.2.2. WShell-compatible when these menu item not activates is, can it in the relation with program how the WShell to great problems come. Worse luck able then but on the other hand the Tool-program's "stackppc" and "changemmu" not more used become. Those Tool-program's find he in the tools-directory, which he in the WarpOS-drawer is. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ this menu item should you on each fall activate! In the WarpOS- Prefs is an deactivation anytime possible! 11.2.3. Selection the Grafikkarte Wählen you here the Grafikkarte from, the you installed have. 11.2.4. Would like she WarpOS V16 or the PowerUP-compatibles V7 fit Wählen you here the WarpOS-versions from. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ take you to possibility always the recent WarpOS-version; in these fall WarpOS V16! Only by problems should you the old version V7 try out. After you WwarpOS prosperous installed have, should you the calculator new boot, around all WarpOS-Systemdateien in you system einzubinden. 11.3. The WarpOS-Prefs in AmigaOS 3.9 is the WarpOS-Preferences new added. He is in five fields divided: 1. General (brasshat) 2. PowerUP 3. Video-address 4. Debugging 5. Logdateien (Logfiles) The settings have following effect: general (brasshat) memory protection is these menu item activates, become the (Memory Speicherschutzmöglichkeiten from WarpOS active. Protection) when Speicherplatzprobleme emerge, can it help, the memory protection to deactivate. No PPC (No PPC) this menu item must by all no-PPC-intersystem activates is. With this work all demos, which also without PPC run, but the "PowerPC.library" to open try. Is these menu item by no- PPC-intersystem deactivated, falls the Library in the Initalisierung off. Early Term is these menu item not activates, can it in the relation with program how the WShell to great problems come, in these fall ought these menu item activates become. Worse luck able then but the Tool-program's "stackppc" and "changemmu" not more used become. Those Tool-program's find he in the "tools"-directory, which in the "WarpOS"-drawer to find is. PowerUP the terminator- this Preferences represent the terminator- Blättersymbol mechanism, which required is, around WarpOS on intersystem hochzufahren, aufdenen he the "ppc.library" not deactivate leaves. This is e.g. By the BlizzardPPC the fall! Those variable ought always on the worth 2 steady become! Premonitions Ist these menu item activates, is the appearance the hide (Hide premonitions virhindert, which in the relation with the Warning) "ppc.library" appear and the operator report, that WarpOS not so without further run up can. No Patch (No is these menu item activates, is not attempted, patch) by use of terminator no.2 the functions the "ppc.library" on "Dummy"-functions umzubiegen. This menu item ought never activates become, out of when expressly specified. This menu item became in first line implemented, around PowerUP-emulations possible to make, with it also PowerUP-software under WarpOS carried out become can. Videro-address Verlangt an hexadecimal Adreßangabe. When the "PowerPC.library" not in the position is the graphic-RAM to localize, learns from it the address these - ambient (Environment)-variable. When now an expansion- Adreßraum found is, which the specified address contains, so is attempted, these Adreßraum in the BEGGED-register to adopt, around an better Zugriffsgeschwindigkeit to reach. Those variable can also on 0 steady become, when no problems with the Grafikadresse emerge. --- WEIGHTY -------------------------------------------------------------- user from CyberVisionPPC- and BVisionPPC-Grafikkarten must on each fall this variable on "e0000000" put. Additional must the variable "powerpc/force" on "1" steady become. Debugging no Debugging (No this Preferences contains 3 Debugg-levels. Shall always Debugging) on "No Debugging" adjusted remained, out of anybody interested he for the goins-on at bootstrapping! Segment-information Ist these menu item activates, become by crashes (segment info) segment-informations (Hunk/Offset-couples) displayed. This Feature requested, that the "SegTrakker" and "Sushi" installed are! Fibbed-files (Logfiles) fall (crash): Verlangt an filename. When an PPC-fall happens, prescribes WarpOS the Absturzdaten in this file. Warning (Alert): Verlangt an filename. When an PPC-fall happens, prescribes WarpOS the system-messages, e.g. By korrupten semaphores, in this file. Save Speichert the settings. Use varied settings become only for the current meeting used. Breaking off Schließt the WarpOS-Preferences-window. Varied settings go lost! 11.4. First help by difficulties with WarpOS The "powerpc.library" can not open become. The WarpUp-demos work at all not and give possibly error reports the kind from 'Kann powerpc.library not open'. The "powerpc.library V8" or greater can only then open become, when the "ppc.library" from phase 5 not runs.The is, when one WarpOS use want, must one for it look after, that no PowerPC-program's run, which the "ppc.library" need. It is by it to note, that self program's, which discretely in the background run, the "ppc.library" use able, under other gives it versions the Grafikkarten-software 'CyberGraphX' which the "ppc.library" use. In these fall must an CyberGraphX-version without "ppc.library"-support installed become, when WarpOS uses become shall. The "powerpc.library" can not open become, although never an application restarted became, which the "ppc.library" opens. In these fall can it is, that the "ppc.library" already at boot open became, she lies then in a nichtflüchtigen memory (ROM). The best solution would, an upgrade of nichtflüchtigen storeroom to make, which the "ppc.library" not more at boot opens. The Funktionstüchtigkeit the hardware and software could problem-free guaranteed become. Only then can he WarpOS also complete conformist in system bind. When no upgrade to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stands, which above effect brings about, ought the Environment-variable 'powerpc/terminator' on a worth irregular naught steady become. Then attempted WarpOS, the "ppc.library" and cognates resources from hand to remove. If the problems make ought, begs H&P around notice, with it one another terminators develop can, which the problems debug. Every demo, which the "powerpc.library" opens, falls off. On intersystem without PPC-card must unconditional the menu item "No PPC" activates become. After this run all demos, which also without PPC come out (but the "powerpc.library" to open try). Always when an demo several time in the Shell restarted became, gives it crashes. The problem step for instance with the WShell on, the signals free unlocks, which she self not alloziert has. The problem can with the activation from "Early Term" remedied become. When these menu item activates is, should the problems removed is. Undoubtedly able then no globalen settings in the Shell more made become, which the PPC concern, i.e. The tools 'stackppc' and 'changemmu' work not more. The PPC-Stapelspreicher (Stack) must then by means of the 'stack'- comand steady become (the PPC-Stack is about double so great how the 68K- Stack). The Voxelspace-demo runs ever since the version 1.6 not more with Picasso96. Since version 1.6 bolstered the Voxelspace-demo the OS3.0-Multibuffering for Picasso96 around an still better Bildqualität to reach. Therefore requested the demo now an newly version from Picasso96. With the activating the demos comes an Screenmode-Preferences, which but empty is. This effect step on, when with one CyberGFX-Emulation for AGA operated is. In these fall must the demos with the parameter 'PAL' restarted become. It tread by different program 'ramlib'-crashes on. This effect step by new BlizzardPPC-cards (or. With new FlashROM-versions) on, because the AmigaOS so patched is, that it without the "ppc.library" not more correct work can. Therefore must an new kind the termination for WarpOS developed become. The terminator-Blättersymbol ought on the worth 2 steady become. The WarpUp-demos run EXTREME slow. Then is presumable the Debugging-variable steady. The variable in the Debugging-Blättersymbol must unconditional on naught steady become. Some applications, which the Grafikkarten-memory direct speak to, fall off. With use from CyberVisionPPC/BVisionPPC-Grafikkarten must WarpOS the Adreßraum the Grafikkarte intimated become. To this must following variables steady become: powerpc/force 1 powerpc/gfxaddr $e0000000 the Installer from WarpUP V4 and V5 ought this config automatic carry out. 12. Picasso the Treibersystem for Amiga Grafikkarten Picasso is an modularly and stremfreundliche Softwareumgebung for different Amiga-Grafikkarten. The most weighty targets, the by the programming pursues become, are compatibility, transparency and safeness. Around göglichst compatible to remained, become only the notwendigsten functions of AmigaOS changed. A another particularity from Picasso is the ability, more Grafikkarten (also differently model) simultaneous to operated. 12.1. Supplementary Grafikkarten the following Grafikkarten become till now unterstüntzt: CyberVision 64, CyberVision 64/3D, domino, Merlin, oMniBus, PicassoII, PicassoII+, PicassoIV, Piccolo, Piccolo SD64, pixel 64, Retina BLT Z3, Spectrum 24/28 CyberVision 64: The CyberVision 64 is an reasonable modern card with a S3 triplet 64 and ZorroIII bus inferface. This driver became from Michael Teske created, the also the NetBSD-driver for the CyberVision developed has. CyberVision 64/3D: The CyberVision 64/#d is an modern card with a S3 ViRGE and Autosensing-ZorroII/III-bus-inferface. Domino: The domino is an old Grafikkarte, the from one ZorroII-card and one ISA VGA Grafikkarte consists, where the VGA-card piggy-back mounted is. Merlin: The Merline is an ZorroII/III Grafikkarte, the a Tseng ET4000W32 Grafikkontroller and a 24bit Echtfarben-DAC owns. Especially beautiful on the Merlin are you tricolour Hardwaresprite and an really faster Blitter with three sources. oMniBus: the oMniBus VGA system consists from one ZorroII-ISA-Brückenkarte and one ISA-VGA Grafikkarte. PicassoII/II+: The PicassoII from Village Tronic is an weitverbreite ZorroII Grafikkarte with the Cirrus GD5426 or GD5428 Grafikkontroller. The PicassoII is an redesigning the PicassoII. PicassoIV: The PicassoIV from Village Tronic is an ZorroII/III Grafikkarte with the modern and expeditious PCI-CHip Cirrus GD5446. The PicassoIV offers standmäßig a eingebuaten FlickerFixer. Piccolo: The Piccolo is an ZorroII/III Grafikkarte and uses also the Cirrus GD5426. Particularity: the developer the Piccolo (and also the Spectrum) have the connections the red- and the Blaukomponente of RGB-signal exchanged, with it the cards a RGB-mode lean, because the Cirrus normally only the BGR-Echtfarbenmodus bolstered. Piccolo SD64: The Piccolo SD64 used the Cirrus GD5434, a expeditious 64 bit Grafikprozessor. The card is like how the Piccolo and the Spectrum built up. The driver became from Niels Knoop developed. Pixel 64: The pixel 64 is how the Piccolo SD64 an Grafikkarte on basis of Cirrus GD5434. You is for the Ateobus A1200 Erweiterungssystem from Ateo Concepts thought. RetinaBLT Z3: The RetinaBLT Z3 has a leistungsfähigen Grafikprozessor with a very leistungsfähigen Blitter. On the other hand heard standard no automatischer Monitorumschalter how by other cards to the Lieferumfgang, what the handling some aggravates. Spectrum 24/28: The GVP Spectrum relates he in the great and entire how the Piccolo. 12.2. No espoused Grafikkarten: Retina Z2: The Retina Z2 is an very old card, the her memory only segmented einbindet, what with the liniearen Speicherkonzept from Picasso96 collided. Therefore is she possible. Never bolstered become because the there to lead would, that the other cards through the higher administration effort beutlich lansamer become. 12.3. What software collaborates with Picasso together? Basic every software, the conformist collaborates and not direct under bypass of operating system direct on the Grafikspeicher zugreift. Direct support in form of Treibermoduls exist for: . Kind Department Professional (Bildbearbeitungsprogramm from ASDG), . Photogenics (time- and Bildbearbeitungsprogramm from Almathera), . ShapeShifter (Apple macintosh emulator from Christian farmer), . XiPaint (24bit Malprogramm from Thomas thorn and Herbert Beilschmidt). Further module find he in development. Furthermore work with Picasso96 nearly all program's, the CyberGraphX, to the example CyberWindow (obtainable in the AmiNet), or the "vilintuisup.library" the old PicassoII-software, to the example whose Bilderanzeiger ShowGIF, lean. 12.4. The installing to the installing from Picasso96 use you easy the Installationsskript on the OS3.9 CD. With it is the software automatic installed. --- ATTENTION -------------------------------------------------------------- before you Picasso96 install must you your old Graffikarten- software deactivate or deinstallieren. It is technical regrettably not possible, different Grafikkarten-Softwaresysteme simultaneous to use. Please read you in the documentation your old Grafikkarten-software to, how this exactly goes. When you the old Picasso-software use, then go you so before: Enterfnen you the file Picasso from the directory "Devs:monitor" or. From the drawer WBStartup. Enternen you the file "village.library" from the directory expansion yours Startvolumes or. From the directory "libs:". When you CyberGraphX use, then go you so before: Enterfernen you from the directory "Devs:monitor" or. From the drawer WBStartup all CyberGraphX-Kartentreiber. Please remove you from the directory "libs:" the files "cybergraphics.library", "cyberlayers.library" and "cyberintuition.library". Picasso96-driver for another program's The Picasso96-driver for program's how AdPro, Photogenics etc. Find you in the Picasso96-formatters, the the Installationsskript installed. There find you to every driver an decently Installationsskript. 12.5. The use from Picasso after you Picasso96 installed and the calculator new restarted have, choose you easy in the Prefs-progam "ScreenMode" a the new Bildschirmmodi from. The Workbench and other program's able now your Grafikkarte use. If you unerwarteterweise problems have, Picasso96 in firm to take, use you please "CheckBoards", around to find, if your card also right recognized and linked became. If this the fall is and you despite that no Picasso96-DisplayIDs to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stand, should you try, with Picasso96Mode an berstehendes Setting on your card to bind, in that you by Picasso96Mode in the menu "Attach Setting up" your card dial, then conserve and a restart actuate. 12.6. The tees the Monitordateien The monitor-files, the in Devs:monitor installed become, and the names the Grafikkarten carry (e.g. PicassoIV) hold tees (ToolTypes) with those the accordingly cards configured become able: BoardType: necessary; deposits the KartenTyp fast, e.g. PicassoIV. Is from Installationsskript already right registered. IgnoreMask: optionally; with it is by many functions, the the Blitter the Grafikkarte use, the BitPlane-mask ignored, whereby the operations on many cards strong accelerated become able. Undoubtedly is the then not more complete correct, whereby under circumstance boring Grafikfehler occur able! With it an PicassoII with Picasso96 just the same quick scrollt how with the old Picasso-software, must you these ToolType on YES put! Voreingestellt is 'No'. BorderBlank: optionally; sets frame (without: how in the system). BigSprite: optionally; when she "Yes" give, is the Mauszeiger double so great personated. SettingsFile: optionally; voreingestellt is "DEVS:Picasso96Settings". SoftSprite: optionally; "Yes:": no hardware-Mauszeiger take (in case generally possible). DisplayChain: optionally "No": Amiga-signal is not durchgeschleift, the Grafikkarte reaches always the signal the card wider (useful in intersystem with several monitors and Grafikkarten). 12.7. PicassoMode: the Bildschirmmodus-Preferences Picasso96Mode is used, around consisting of dissolutions otherwise adjust and around new to produce. It is exclusive of over the graphical user interface to attend. In the upper lefthand corner of window see you four control elements, the you the following permit: . New objects produce (this able Settings, dissolutions or modes is, ever after on which the three wiles you the new object fall leave), . An object between computer store and it thereafter again there rauziehen, . An copy of object to produce and . An object to clean. From every one the three wiles able you an element the list reach [for], around it then to the above beschreibenen control element to consider. To this must the element with the mouse choosen and then with one zügigen horizontal movement by more pressed left Maustaste from the list pulled out become. Before you a mode on your Grafikkarte represent able, must you still the actual attitude dieserr card by means of of menu allocate. Around an resolution or a mode to activate, must si it easy double with the mouse in the list anklicken. An further Doppelklick deactivated the resolution or the mode again. Only the active dissolutions and modes are for the remainder of intrasystem uncover. Around a mode to change, must you the button "Edit" press, then is an Testbild show. With the arrow able you now: . The fashion postpone (when you only the arrow press), . The frame increase/decrease (when you additional still an -key press) or together with the -key the Videofrequenz change or . The bigness of mode change (when you additional still an the SHIFT buttons press); this is frequently necessary is. The button "test" opens an Geometrietestbild with the difference, that here nothing changed become can. To the conclusion ought the config saved and thereafter an "Reset" caused become, with it the adjustments active become. 12.8. Help by problems with problems stand you your question in the Picasso-Mailingliste. The Mailingliste is on english over "ninemoons.com" led. With interest please an EMail on majordomo@ninemoons.com with the keyword "Help" in the message. When you he fill out leave will, schichken you an mail with "subscribe Picasso" in the trunk on majordomo@ninemoons.com. 13. Keyboard macros (Shortcuts) 13.1. Workbench + Workbench as background + comand accomplish + Workbench leave + new drawer lay against + clasps + Aktualisieren + all choose + indentations clean + content to chinks clean up +<-> only files with Icon show +<+> all files show +<1> content as Icon show +<2> content to names list +<3> content to date ausflisten +<4> content to bigness list +<5> content to kind list + seeking + undoing + copying + Umbenennen + info show + Fixieren + position deallocate + Auslagern +

Zurücklegen + warning message affirm + warning message abbort + Nächster onscreen + Vorheriger onscreen + + + copying instead of postpone + it opens the choosen directory, shuts but the + + 13.2. Editpad + new document + undoing + save +

printing + Ikonifizieren + termination + Ausschneiden + copying + Einfügen + withdrawals + finding +<.> Finde next + finding and replace... + go to row... + + 13.3. ASL - Dateiauswahl + last name + Nächster name + back on default +

no one plaren bitmap computer store + all tees deactivate + all tees activate + Wiederherstellen + 13.5.0.6. Find + information over Find + Ikonifizieren + Find discontinue + filename in the clipboard copy + drawer open + Exakte Dateinamensuche + grand- and use of small letters note + settings computer store 13.5.0.7. AmiDOCK + config + config backup + information to the AmiDOCK + termination 13.6. AWeb + window close + Öffene URL + open www + open local file + seeking + Quelltext computer store +<\> Ikonifizieren + termination + all images load + only Maps load + mood music play back + Netzwerkstatus + current document new load + shop abbort + Proxy deactivate + JavaScript abbort + back + forward + Home-document +<-> window=Geschichte + the Hotlist add + Hotlist show + Hotlist show + Hotlist-manager + copying + Einfügen 13.7. AmigaMAIL + Ikonifizieren + termination +<1> settings +<2> address table +<3> Fixiere window + file anhägen + Ausschneiden + copying + Einfügen + send + mail close 13.8. Genesis + Genesis-report + Netzwerkstatus + info over Genesis + termination +<1> featuring Onlinezeit +<2> featuring led's +<3> featuring Connect String +<4> featuring Schnittstellenliste +<5> featuring Benutzerliste +<6> featuring Mitschnitt +<7> featuring Button +<8> featuring status-window +<9> featuring serial data + settings 13.9. AMPlifier + undoing + add + information + Abspielliste + information over the Amplifier + Verbergen + termination +

onscreen 13.10. Iomega tools + reviewing the SCSI-hardware + reviewing the DOS-hardware + Ikonifizieren + encryption + termination + diskette spit + start drive 14. Problems and solutions this area gives answers and solutions to frequently gestellten question. The seeing you hence always first here beyond, when you an problem have and read you the separate fields attentive through. The question and answers base to the part on the officially OS3.5 FAQs and eilweise on the "unofficial" OS3.5 FAQs, the earlier from "Alex" and now from Gregory thunder (www.gregdonner.org) fostered become and the us kindly the approval to the use given has. 14.1. Preparation to the installing Erstellen you unconditional an Notfalldiskette and when possible an backup your Systempartition. Possibly must you your Systempartition also increase around OS3.9 install to able, because it become at least 20Mb free Festplattenplatz required. While of startings of AmigaOS is the "startup-sequence" and the "user- startup" carried out. Shall you there program's commence, the deeper in AmigaOS encroach, so deactivate you this first. The installing from AmigaOS 3.9 takes no adjustments on these files before. 68040 or. 68060.library with the complete neuinstallation from OS3.9, must you note, that possibly for the firm necessary 68040- or/and 68060-libraries from the respective ones original-diskettes installed become must, with it you system from these new installed Festplattenpartition again restarted become can. In simplest produce you he an Notfalldiskette, boot over this diskette and install then you system new. With it become as well as the necessary CPU-libraries as also an possibly available Grafikkartentreiber automatic installed. 14.2. Problems with Patches, Icons, NewIcons, MagicWB and SetPatch the progam SetPAtch is in the "startup-sequence" restarted and corrected in the essential publicly known error in the AmigaOS. Off OS3.5 compensates it besides the driver for the accessing the internal SCSI- and IDE- hardware the different models. Those new driver permit the firm from hard drives with one capacity greater as 4Gb. It are PRobleme with unite Amiga 3000 model and unite 4fach- expansion card for IDE known. In these fall broaden you the invocation of SetPatch program please as follows: C:SetPatch QUIET SKRIPROMUPDATES "scsi.device" objections you, that also OS3.9 no direct support for 4fach-adapter for IDE contains. Please use you the same software, the you also until the present time uses have. Shall you all the same problems with the boot from AmigaOS 3.9 have, so name you the file "DEVS:AmigaOS ROM update" around. Thereby become the Ersatzmodule altogether hilarious. --- ATTENTION -------------------------------------------------------------- is SETPATCH at activating deactivated, stands neither the new Icon- still the Workbench.library to the zur ~ - at one's disposal. SetPatch with NewStyleDevice Patch the progam SetPatch extended many publicly known Hardwaretreiber around new possibilities. To this used it the Konfigurationsdatei "DEVS:NSDPatch.cfg". Us is an conflict between the Hardwaretreiber "cd.device", the part of AmigaOS is and a wider "cd.device" (fabricator unknown) notified been. Shall you this "cd.device" use, so deactivate you please the obversely row in "DEVS:NSDPatch.cfg", in the you with a text editor before the row an "#"-sign stand. LoadV43Module when you you system already through the comand LoadV43Module and appositely Moduldateien for the firm from hard drives greater 4 gigabyte extended have, so should you this comands remove. SetPatch takes possession now this jobs. NSDPatch the invocation from NSDPatch is not more necessary, then SetPatch this duty takes possession. NewIcons since AmigaOS 3.5 gives it the new "icon.library". Those library is for the accociation and representation the pictograms accountable. Many user have "NewIcons" installed, a Patch, the an improvement the Icon-representation brings about. The effect this Patches is only also through the "icon.library" undertaken. You able and should the invocation of NewIcon-Patches from your "startup-sequence" or "user- startup" remove. --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ the progam IconEdit can used become, around NewIcons in real OS3.5- Icons to transform. The is not necessary, around NewIcons on the Workbench to see, accelerated but the shop and Darstellen the pictograms. Füllstandsanzeiger The Workbench shows you now - how already to times from OS1.3 - the Füllstand your hard drive left in the window on. Those advertisement is however also from unite Patches obtains. Deactivate you this Patches, otherwise get you the Füllstandanzeige double. ARQ ARQ (an Patch, the the system-Requester embellished) has problems on many OS3.1-intersystem causes. For OS3.9 appear more system affected to is. Please replace you these Patch through a other. MagicWB will she furthermore MagicWB-pictograms use, so need you furthermore a Patch, the the colour-Pens for it reserved. Otherwise become the pictograms with false colors personated. FastIPrefs when you the progam FastIPrefs use, so should you this again through IPrefs replace. IPrefs from AmigaOS 3.9 bolstered new Preferences, the OS3.1 not knew and bolstered likewise some options from FastIPrefs. Even so become publicly known error distant. No one GlowIcons to the installing when to the Hauptinstallation no GlowIcons uncover are lies the on a error in the use Filesystem. The phenomenon became under SmartFileSystem already corrected. Please use you the most up to date version. Under PFS3 comes it before, that the Tool, the the pictograms compensates (MergeIcons) no files to the substitution finds. Hereby helps only the manual introduction the pictograms with the new Workbench-attributes. Frame around the Ikons can not switched off become see point "FastIPrefs". DOpus 5 stands the new 3.5 pictograms not there! The Piktogrammformat the WB3.5 is to the previous different and it is also not the NewIcons-format. One required hence the update-Patch for DOpus from the Webseite from GP software. Why opens the IconEdit or the other Preferences always a new Screen, when I a 16-Bit onscreen run have? The lies at it, that not sufficient coloured chalk free are and therefore on a new onscreen quibbled is. Around this to prevent, stand you easy the Piktogrammqualität, in you Workbench-Preferences, on "Schwach". 14.3. Problems with RTG, Picasso 96, CyberGraphX CyberGraphx and Picasso96 OS3.9 bolstered the Grafikkarten-software CyberGraphX and Picasso96. For the firm from CyberGraphX is it however necessary, that you the new version 3 use. Those find you on the OS3.9-CD under Contributions. Nutzer the version 4.0 from CyberGraphX load he please to the update on V4.1 the file biz/patch/cgxv41_r1.lha from the Aminet or from the "open air update"-side the Schatztruhe-homepage (www.schatztruhe.DE). What brings about "LoadWB SIMPLEGELS"? It sets the system on the old OS3.1-style for the sampling and draw from pictograms back: filled and of to the other position. OS3.5 colors she an and positioned all simultaneous. On mine A1200T hindered SIMPLEGELS the losing from 300K chip-RAM with FBlit and WBCtrl on AGA. A operator report, that is system (BVisionPPC with CGX4) before use the option "SIMPLEGELS" very unstable was. If one problems has, ought one once this option attempt, also with one Grafikkarte. 14.4. Hard drives-problems hard drives-partitions vanish when by you Festplattenpartitionen not more displayed become or when your hard drive not over the 4Gb-border partitioniert become can, must the used "Device" the NSD-Patch known made become. Undoing you for this a editor e.g. The EditPad and load the file "DEVS:NSDPATCH.cfg". Seeking you the appositely "Device" and clean you the Kommentarsymbol "#" in beginning the row. For the "CYBPPC.Device" must following row inserted become: DEVICE cybppc.device DEVICETYPE NSDEVTYPE_TRACKDISK COMMANDS 2-7, 9-15, 20-28, 33-39, 41-44, 46-49, 51-72 TD64 save you the file and commence the Amiga new. Towards the restart able you he assure, if the registration serves has, in that you an Shell open and the command: "SetPatch PatchInfo" enter. Seeking you in the angezeigten list you Device from and check you if the details by -Patch countgrößer 0 is. Now ought your hard drive in full with bigness usable is. The has got I the new FastFileSystem (FFS) in the RDB my hard drive? Activating you the HDToolbox and choose you the controller and the ancestral drive. Squeeze you on "hard drive partitionieren". In the bottom right corner is the section "file system", under stands the present used for the picked Partition. Choose you "Hinzu./Update..." And then from the list the Filesystem, which rebuild become shall (it ought "FastFileSystem" be called). Printings "Filesystem renew...". In Dateiauswahl window choose you now the new FFS (L:FastFileSystem). With "OK" turn you to the Partitionen window back, there "save" choose. The HDToolbox is closed and you have it created. Around the change to activate, must you the Amiga new commence. With these they strode copy you the Filesystem *in* the RDB, it is not only an hand on the with the OS3.5-Installer installed Filesystem. I have an HDD, the with SCSIConfig from phase5 prepared became. When I with the HDToolBox thereupon zugreife, appears some not to attune, e.g. Apportions the HDTB with, that to storing adjustments exist. One ought never SCSIConfig and HDToolBox for an and the same hard drive use. That necessary atleast for all versions from SCSIconfig till to the 4 February 2000. Process you your hard drive always with the progam, with the you prepared became. SCSIConfig accounts the geometry otherwise as the HDToolbox; even, when the switch "synchronous" in SCSIConfig activates is, prescribes it its own Geometrieberechnungen in the RDB, what an capable confusion at add newer partitions cause; an result could überlappende partitions is! Where must my Bootpartition is, when I an hard drive greater as 4Gb in internal connection use want? Towards a cold start (when the machine put is), has one neither the 64bit functionality of NSDPatch, still the "AmigaOS ROM update" activates. No disturb, this necessary only at cold start! --- HINT -------------------------------------------------------------- the following hint necessary for all Amiga-models with internem "SCSI"- connection, be it an legit "scsi.device" (A3000/T, A4000T) or "an false" IDE_scsi.device (A600, A1200, A4000): The Bootpartition must in the bottom 4Gb lie! Even by fit FFS v45+ in the RDB the HDD. FFS v45 unaccompanied can NO 64bit comands with the old v40 "scsi.device" of use! Furthermore has the v40 "IDE_scsi.device" an internal invariant 8Gb-border, what means: with use of Dateisystems with "direkt scsi" or "TD64"- support (e.g. PFS, SFS) on a A600/A1200/A4000, must the Bootpartition in the bottom 8Gb lie. I have problems with the ROM-Aktualisierten "scsi.device" (the machine reboots not o's.ä.), can I the "ROM update" remove and NSDPatch for the 64bit functionality of old "scsi.device" (from 3.1 ROM) for hard drives greater 4Gb of use? Is not the NSD-patched "v40 scsi.device" same, how the "v43scsi.device" from "ROM update"? An NSD-gepatchtes "scsi.device" has an simple 64bit-functionality, it is an Emulation over "HD_SCSICMD", not more. The complete parcel with intern control, iterations, error handling etc.Is only with the "scsi.device" v43 in the "ROM update" through SetPatch available. And not forget: with a A600/A1200/A4000 has one by use of v40 IDE_scsi.device an 8Gb-border. With the NSD-gepatchten IDE_scsi.device v40 can one only HDDs till 8Gb of use - 8Gb, not more. Dateisysteme how PFS and SFS with one "direkt scsi"-version must the "IDE_scsi.device" of use, so step also here the 8Gb-border on (the documentation from PFS bypasses this subject some). One can the internal 8Gb-border of old "IDE_scsi.device" not patchen, neither with NSDPatch still with the "direkt scsi"-version of Dateisystems of Drittanbieters. If one an hard drive greater as 8Gb in internal "IDE_scsi"-connection of A600/A1200/A4000 of use want, equal with which Filesystem, must one the "IDE_Scsi.device" of ROM-update use. The has can I more as 30 sign at file names adjust? Worse luck bolstered the FFS only 30 sign, around more to activate, must you an other Filesystem install. e.g. The SFS (smart file system) bolstered 107 sign. 14.5. Problems with uses Wordworth 7 Wordworth7 actuates not more, then the kind of aufrufenden Icon not correct interpreted is. Remedy: Wordworth-Icon anklicken, "informations show" invoice and the "boot through:" from ARexx on Workbench alter. After this leaves he Wordworth again faultless commence. 14.6. Problems with Internet-program mine AWeb Werkzeugleistenknöpfe are destroys. It can one the prevent? Ark you the Werkzeugleisten-image in an Grafikprogramm and restoring you it as GIF-image off or remove you the tees (Tooltype) "diaphanous" the ".info"-file from AWeb. AmigaMAIL fetches no enamel the lies at it, that you no Spool-file specified have. Give you please in the Preferences under "POP Servers" by the point "Spooldatei" a file names on. 14.7. Sundries problems The AnimatedIcons work not, what can I do? Check you yours GIF.Datatype, if these from the OS3.5- or OS3.9-CD comes. In addition must you, when you the "gifanim.Datatype" installed have, these deactivate. SKIPROMMODULES under the error description in the Installationshandbuch is regrettably for the shutdown of new SCSI-Devices an false command line-option specified. The correct command line must be called: SetPatch QUIET SKIPROMUPDATES scsi.device the simple Umbenennen the file "DEVS:AmigaOS3.5 ROM update" leads to the resemble result. Fall at undoing one drawer on the Workbench obvious hangs these error with the installed Picasso 2- Softwarezusammen. Please install you CyberGraphX or Picasso96 which you on the CD-ROM find. Prefs program's able not restarted become obvious is on you system an old ClassAct in "LIBS:" installed. Please control you, if Boopsi-Classen in the drawer "LIBS:Classes" hold are and deactivate you she. Lead you thereafter a restart through and attempt you it renewed. Eventually exist also an drawer "Sys:ClassAct", the likewise deactivated become must. 15. Glossary the in hand glossary contains the computer- and Amiga-specific specialist terms, the in these book, the original-manual and the program uses become. 15.1. A WATER (eng. AGA) see Advanced Graphics Architecture. Backtrace see Tracing. Address The Identifikationsnummer one cell in the computer or of peripheral device (SCSI). Aktionssymbol an symbol with Klartextbeschriftung in a window, kµber of it selection in these window an operation invoked is. Ordinary Aktionssymbole are "save", "further" and "breaking off". Active voice is with reference on the onscreen, the Shell-window or. The Workbench-window uses, in the to the time data entered become able. Advanced Graphics an Amiga-chip-setting, with the more colors displayed Architecture (WATER) become able and the the Systemleistung enhanced. Current The presently position within the directory Verzeichnisstruktur. The directory, the AmigaDOS as standardmäßiges Arbeitsverzeichnis used, when no other directory specified is. Akzenttaste (eng. A key or key combination, which the giving out tot key) the key changed, the immediate thereafter pressed is. To this belong to e.g. The Akzenttasten left and on the right the numerical series on your keyboard (^, ' and `). Surrogate name an alternative name for a AmigaDOS-comand or. An character string, the/the with the comand ALIAS specified is. AmigaDOS the from Amiga-Computern appropriated Disk-operating system (Disk Operating system - DOS). The Disk-operating system contains the most weighty functions of computer. AppIcon an special Icon (Icon), the from one use created and uses is. AppWindow the window one use, in the an Icon pulled become can, around the corresponding file in the use to load. The MultiView-window and the Amiga-Dateiauswahl window are AppWindows. Use (also an or more progam, the an specific duty application) accomplish, e.g. An word processing program, an file or an video-Titler. Display panel an rectangular small box, the normally under a Rollsymbol or next to a Auswahlsymbol stands and the actual selection announce. An display panel can not ediert become. Archive a archival backup copy one or several of these files. Archiver the copying from files on Disk(ette) or tape to Sicherungszwecken. Argument a ancillary information, e.g. An filename, an worth or an option, the to a comand specified is. Those ancillary information certain the accurately action of respective ones imperative. Argumentweitergabe The details from parameter in the coding line for ein(en) subsequent/succeeding progam or. Comand. ASCII (amerikanisch an standard for Textdarstellung, the sign standard code for uniform Codenummern assign and thereby the info data exchange between differently Computertypen Interchange) enables. Resolution (eng. The number the pixel in the respective ones motion) Bildschirmmodus. An normally PAL-high-Res-onscreen has e.g. An resolution from 640 (horizontal) x 256 (vertical) Bildpunkten. Expression what you black on know from you printer consider. A in writen direction, the an follows from variables, field or constants through arithmetical, comparative or logic operators knot. Carry out (eng. The follow the assignments in one coding line, execute) a progam or one script-file through the calculator. Selection through the contemporaneously sampling several of these pictograms through draw (eng. drag Gedrückthalten the Auswahltaste and draw of select) frame around the wished pictograms with help the mouse. With enable the Maustaste are all within this frame lying pictograms picked. Sampling (eng. The Wählen of element, with the you work will, select) through Zeigen on the element with the mouse and anschließendes simple Klicken with the Auswahltaste. Auswahlfeld an field, in the an option an- or cut out become can. When the Auswahlfeld an tick contains, is the option picked (active). Auswahlsymbol an symbol, from the of from several angezeigten element picked become can. That is frequently for colors used. Auswahltaste The left Maustaste. Car-roles the automated relocating the screen display, as soon as the Mauspfeil on the edge of reading area reaches. 15.2. B back up see archival backup copy. Bandlaufwerk see Streamer. Baud-instalment The speed, with the an device informations by the communicating over the serial interface feels or sends. Correspond rough Bit per second. Bedingunskenn- a variable, the a Rückgabewert contains, the for zeichen the triumphantly or not triumphantly execution (Ergebniscode, of imperative stands. Eng. return code) comand a direction on the Amiga to the execution one duty or obtaining of particular result. Befehlswieder- a furniture the Shell, the it enables, ahead holung entered coding line with help the arrow key again abzurufen. Befehlwieder- an storage area, in the the at last in one holungspuffer particular Shell eingegebenen comands preserved become, around where appropriate. With the arrow key (i.e. Without repeated input the coding line) again called up become to able. Befehlsdatei see script. Befehlsschablone a kind, the duly syntax for a AmigaDOS- (eng. template) or ARexx-comand quote. You able he the stencil for each AmigaDOS-comand show leave, in the you the Befehlsnamen with a mark of interrogation (?) as one argument enter. Coding line The row, in the comands and the accompanying arguments entered become. As coding line designates one also the entirety informations, the in the this row entered become. Operating system software in the ROM or on diskette or hard drive, the (OS) (braised.a. The most weighty functions of computer steers. AmigaDOS) library (eng. An contiguous setting from functions and data, library) the from different program used become can. In ROM or. In the drawer LIBS: find he libraries. Pixel (eng. The flying spot, from those he the screen display pixel) of Amiga put. An pixel is the least oneness the Anzeigeinformationen on a onscreen. (The eng. Mark "pixel" became from "picture element" (pixel) deduced.) onscreen (eng. An area the advertisement, for the appointed graphical screen) attributes (e.g. Resolution and colors) worth. Screens are always at least so wide how the visible area. With the Amiga able more screens with differently attributes simultaneous open and uncover is. Bildschirmmodis a naming for the parameter set, e.g. Resolution (eng. screen and Ablenkfrequenz, the a onscreen defined. 640 mode) x 256 pixel (wide x height) are e.g. An high-resolution Bildschirmmodus (high Res) for PAL- Amigas. Binary the two-party-numbering system, in the only the digits 0 and 1 come forward. Bit a single, binary figure (1 or 0), the smallest possible Informationseinheit. Bitplane (eng. An area of RAM, the graphical data for plane = plane) screens contains. Every Bit in one Bitplane steers a pixel of screen. The number the Bitplanes deposits the maximum number from colors fast, the simultaneous on the onscreen displayed become able. Blättersymbol an symbol to the selection one from several options. It is always only an option displayed. Towards selection this symbol is always the each next option uncover. The displayed option is the to the time picked option. Block a contiguous Bytegruppe (normally 512), the in the RAM or in a permantenten Speichermedium as single logic oneness discusses is. An contiguous or markierter section one text file (e.g. IF-block in a script). Boolean (eng. Boolean is, that two different conditions feasible boolean) are: on or From, truth or falsity, yes or refusal, 0 or 1. Bootfähig cover he on an device, from the from the Amiga (bootable, restarted become can (am "boot"). A bootfähige startfähig) Disk must all Systemdateien hold, the the computer to the reception of operating required. Boot (dt. The system commence, in that the for it necessary data commence, new from one Speichereinheit (e.g. Hard drive or commence) diskette) in the memory of computer read in become. Cover he on components, the by these case uses become: the boat-Disk. (See new commence.) Brückenkarte a from AMIGA technology establish expansion card, the the Amiga the hardware- Emulierung PC-compatibles computer enables. Brush see brush. Elbow see error. Byte a from eight Bit consisting of Speichereinheit, the in the rule a sign complies. 15.3. C cache-Spreicher an more temporary storage area with extreme rapid intervention, the the Systemleistung enhanced. CD-ROM only-harvest-memory. On these data medium able more as 550Mb data saved become (commensurable with one audio-CD). Chip an electronic circuit in the Kleinstformat, the he in a lower-case, black, rectangularly casing is and on the pages Verbindungsstifte identifies. An computer sets he from one plurality more specific chips together. Chip-RAM the area of RAM, on the the special-chip-setting of Amiga zugreit. This memory is for graphical/ acoustic data uses and also as Grafikspeicher designates. CLI (imperative- a possibility the communicating with a computer zeileneingabe, through input from ordering over the keyboard. The CLI braised.a. Shell) of Amiga is the Shell. Clipboard see buffer. Steuern- see Steuertastenkombination. Buttons- kombinationen controller an Har\dware-hardware, e.g. On one Steckkarte, the as interface between the computer and a peripheral device (e.g. Hard drive) serves. Coprocessor see Koprozessor. CPU see central processing unit. Cursor an emphasized rectangle or. An upright beam on the onscreen to the advertisement the Schreibposition. Cycle Gadget see Blättersymbol. 15.4. D file (eng. file) a ordered data collection, the with a names designates and on a vehicle saved is. Filesystem The organization and the corresponding software, with the data, files and directories on a data medium saved become. The Amiga uses before all the FFS (fasts file system) and OFS (Old file system). Data a assemblage from informations. Data medium (eng. A declared Speichereinheit, e.g. An diskette volume) or an Festplattenpartition. Datenträgername the name of data medium (not to confound with the Gerätenamen!). The Umbenennen one Disk changes her Datenträgernamen, not but the Gerätenamen. Debugging see Fehlerbehebung. Default see standard. Device see device. Dialog window an window, the appear, when the system on an (eng. requester) Benutzereingabe dependent is. An Dialog window contains Aktionssymbole, under those you between continuation and breaking off the current operation choose able. To the quitting of Dialog windows must you of the angezeigten symbols choose. Density (eng. Number working point per custom. Many printer lean density) more Druckdichten, Normalerweise necessary: ever superior the density, the keener and kontrastreicher the printout. Dientsprogramm an progam, the data created or used, e.g. An (eng. tool = text- or Grafikprogramm. Tool) directory see directory. Disk an vehicle to the storage great amounts of data. The most computer-Disks computer store the data magnetic (diskettes, hard drives), it become but also visual Disks (laser-Disks) uses. Disk- The software, the the most weighty Einlese- and operating system Speicherfunktionen of computer steers. (DOS) (Disk Operating system, DOS) Disk-drive an Speichergerät, the data on an memory-Disk (eng. drive) (e.g. An diskette or hard drive) prescribes and from these reads. Diskette (eng. An auswechselbares, magnetic Speichermedium. The floppy disk) Amiga collaborates with doppelseitigen 3,5-custom-diskettes with more stable Kunststoffhülle. Diskettenwechsel alternately different diskettes in an and dasselb (eng. disk swap) drive inserting, e.g. At copying one diskette on a system with only a floppy. Display Engl. For advertisement, onscreen or also monitor. Doppelklicken Zweimal short one after the other the Auswahltaste press. DOS see Disk-operating system. Drive see Disk-drive. Printer driver an progam, the the Amiga the communicating with a (eng. printer angegebenen printer enables. drive) the printer driver acted by it as "translator" between computer and printer. He accepted data from computer in a standardized format (ASCII- sign and ANSI-Escape-sequences) and sets she in an for the printer understandable format around. Druckknopfsymbol an round symbol next to one option in one list. (Eng. radio to the selection one option is the ancestral tast button) to select. It can always only each an option from the list elective become. Dump (Graphic printout of in onscreen angezeigten image. Dump) 15.5. E ECS see Erweiterter chip-setting. Editor an progam, with the appointed kinds from files created and changes become able. The Amiga disposes over Preferences-Editoren, with those you presettings (Prefs) change of able, as soon as the Texteditoren Memacs and ED to the Bearbeiten from Textdateien. Eingabeauf- a report or an symbol, the/the say, that the forderung computer Texteingabe expected. Eingabepuffer an storage area, the by the seriellen communicating used is, around in-depth data to include. Oneness, an physically or logic device (e.g. Serial Geräteeinheit interface) can where appropriate. More subunits (eng. unit) possession, the over her Einheitennummer discriminated become. Ergebniscode see Bedingungskennzeichen. Extended selection the sampling several of these pictograms on once through Gedrückthalten the shift key and sampling the wished pictograms with the mouse. More extended chip- The rectified version the Agnus- and denise- setting (ECS - Koprozessor-chips of Amiga. The ECS offers additional Enhancer chip Set) Bildschirmmodi (ECS-modes) and extended the bestehenden graphing possibilities. Many preference of ECS able only unused become, when at least with version 2 of operating system operated is. Escape-sequence a follows from sign, the with the Escape-sign begins and the an Sonderfunktion release, when she in the coding line entered or as part one character string printed. Escape-sequences become normally uses, around the font (or other settings) of print page or of Konsolen windows to change. On the side Halfbrite an more specific Grafikmodus to the doubling the number (EHB, half the Bildschirmfarben. With it is to every one existing brightness) colour additional an correspondence with more halved brightness (intensity) prepared. 15.6. F Farbkorrektur a Druckoption, the over the Grafikdrucker- Preferences (PrinterGfx) picked is. You serves there to, the colors one printout the colors the screen display if possible to adjust. Fasts-RAM (nearly = more general memory, the from program and data eng. For quick) used is. In names is already recognizable, that fasts- RAM normally faster collaborates as chip-RAM. Error ("elbow") an software- or Hardwarefehler. Fehlerbehebung the Lokalisieren and Korrigieren from software- and (eng. debugging) Hardwarefehlern. Error code see Bedingungskennzeichen. Field the Bildschirmbereich in the background of text under a Workbench-Icon. The colour this field can with the font-Preferences (Font) changed become. Window (eng. An rechteckiger Bildschirmbereich, the informations window) receive or show can, every window owns an Titelleiste, the it defined, and can symbols on the edge command. Hard drive (eng. An high-speed-Datenspeichergerät high hart disk) capacity, from the the Disks normally not distant become able. Is frequently also as Plattenlaufwerk or Festplattenlaufwerk designates. File see file. Fix (eng. The save the positions of window and/or snapshot = the therein existing pictograms. Schnappschuß) flag see Schutzbits. Font see font. Format description the correcting syntax from AmigaDOS-Befelen. Formatting prepare one Disk for the use with the Amiga. With the formatting become all ahead on these Diskj store data excluded. Fragmentierung that designates the Verstreuung from zusammengehörigen data on one Disk or. In the memory. That leads to one low Systemleistung. In addition able by Speicherfragmentierung some program's where appropriate. Not ordnungsgemæß carried out become. Function keys The buttons whole above on the Amiga-keyboard. You are with F1 till F10 inscribes and able for the Ausfuhrung from special functions programmed become. 15.7. G Gadget see symbol. Gateway (dt. About a externe union between other computer, Verbindungsglied) intersystem or net. Gedrückthalten a (mouse)-key pressed hold, during one other (key) actions undertakes (mouse consider, Zusatztaste press etc.). Geisterschrift- The advertisement from menu- or Symboloptionen in advertisement schwächerer writing. That means, that the those concerned options presently not picked become able. Genlock a Hardwarekomponente, which the overlay from Bildsignalen external hardware (e.g. TV sets, video recorder) with Amiga-Grafikdaten enables and the Amiga thereupon synchronizes. Genlocks become frequently to the Überlagern from Videobildern with title or subtitle deployed. Device (eng. A physically furniture, e.g. An printer or an device) floppy or an Softwareeinheit (logic device), e.g. CON: or NILE: the as spring or goal for data deployed is. Gerätename (eng. An short name how DF0:, PC1: or PRT:, the an device name) particular hardware- or Softwaregerät designates. Gerätenamen must always with a double point (:) end. Polish a Druckoption in the Grafikdrucker-Preferences (Printer Gfx), with the attempted become can, treppenförmige or dental lines to smooth, the casual in print come forward able. Globally in all process valid. The converse from local. Grafikspeicher see chip-RAM. Graphical an on bildlicher representation based system, over user interface the you the computer assignments give. Only happens this here not over the input from ordering, but through use graphic symbols. The Workbench is the GUI of Amiga. Größersymbol an symbol, the in the right bottom corner of (eng. size window appear can and over the an window gadget) enlarges or belittles become can. 15.8. H HAM - Hold and an Grafikmodus of Amiga, the the advertisement the Modify (holding and complete colour palette of Amiga in onscreen Modifizieren) enables. Handler (dt. About program files, the as Zwischeninstanzen zwiswchen device driver) AmigaDOS and the physical device serve. The "trader" are in the directory L: saved. Handshaking the electronically or software journal, the to the liquidation the seriellen communicating between two Computergeräten erforderich is. Main register the center directory on a data medium. The (eng. root main register stands on the vertex the directory) Verzeichnishierarchie and is at formatting of data medium created. All other directories on the data medium find he in the main register, i.e. Are these ancillary. The main register is with the Datenträgernamen, ensued from a double point specified. Hexadecimal this numbering system, the on the basis 16 based on, is häufg in the Computerprogrammierung deployed. As hexadecimal digits become the quantitative 0-9 and the letters A-02135 : cpr (for the values 10-15) uses. Under AmigaDOS must an hexadecimal with 0x or x start, by ARexx is an x trailing. Hierarchical this concept serves to description the geschaltelten Verzeichnisstruktur from AmigaDOS, in the directories as well as other directories (subdirectories) as also files or both hold able. Hintergrundprozeß an progam, the from the Shell with the comand RUN (eng. background restarted became. This progam runs then "in the process) background", during one in the Shell already with Anderem go on working can. Host (dt. About an superordinate calculator - or Softwaresystem, with Gastrechner/ the communicated is. -programm) Hot Key see Tastenbefehl. 15.9. I, J Icon see pictograms. IFF (Interchange the standardized format, in the the Amiga graphical, file format) acoustic and other data saves. .info-file a file, the the image-and Positionsdaten of Icon contains (is marked as "point-info"). Initialize synonym for formatting. With printer also Übermitteln from basic settings, how e.g. Zeilanabstand. Interlace see Zeilensprungdarstellung. Internal cover he on a AmigaDOS-comand, the in the Shell integrated is, so not from one Disk charged become must. Wildcard character an sign, the in Namensmustern use finds and (eng. wildcard) for an row differently values stand can. So able you e.g. File names give, the all with the resemble letters start or end. The mark of interrogation (?) is an wildcard character, the for an any individual sign stands. Jumper (dt. About an smaller jack, the on one printed circuit board on Kurzschlußstecker) different pencils tucked become can, around hardware to configure. 15.10. K, L cold start one ausgeschalteten Amiga plug. Catalog The files, which the compilations the system- and Meldungstexte in an other language (not english) hold. Kb (kilobyte) 1024 byte. Is frequently also as K abbreviated. (Against it stands an small worries keep him awake exact for 1000 how in kg.) Keymap see keyboard assignment. Kickstart cover he on the part of Amiga-Betriebssytstems, the he in the ROM is. Click a Maustaste short press and let go. If not otherwise specified, must the shortlist (left key) pressed become. Konsolen window an window, the to the an- and giving out from text uses is, e.g. The Shell-window. Copying and the copying of data block (text and/or graphic) Einfügen (eng. And Einfügen this blocks on one other place. copy and dough) Koprozessor an more separate processor-chip, the the Zentralprozessor through the execution appointed expenditure bolstered, e.g. Mathematics calculations or faster Datentransfer. Laufwerksname an a Disk-drive or one Festplattenpartition zugeordneter Datenträgemame, e.g. DF0: or DH1:. Reading (eng. read) the interrogation more stored informations. Library see library. Local only in the actual case valid. The converse from globally. Discharge (eng. An Bit or an badges on 0 (from) set, i.e. Klar) inactivate. Opposition to "set". One onscreen or an windowanzeige remove. Discharge (eng. The remove one file, of buffer or of delete) other in the memory standing element. 15.11. M macro an individual comand, the for an row from ordering stands. Many Editoren and uses lean the use from macros to the simplification frequently benutzter Befehlsfolgen. ARexx-program's become frequently as macros designates. Mouse the device, with the you the Mauspfeil on the onscreen move and with the Amiga comunicate able. The Maustasten serve to the announcement from menu as soon as to the sampling and draw from pictograms, window and Bilschirmen. Mouse acceleration a over the input-Preferences (Input) auswahlbare option, through the the movement of Mauspfeils in the relationship to the movement the Mauys accelerated is. The Mausbeschleunigung enables an better control over small Mausbewegungen and an lesser control, for it but higher speed, by great movements the mouse. Mouse pointer (eng. A small mapping in onscreen (frequently in form pointer, hand) of arrow o's.a. Reticles), the the movements the mouse follows. With the Mauspfeil able pictograms, symbols and also menu items picked become. Mb (megabyte) 1024 kilobyte (1,048,576 byte). Is frequently also as M or Meg abbreviated. (In exotischen cases (Festplattenspezifikationen) stands Mb but also for 1000K = 1,024,000 byte or even for exactly 1,000,000 byte.) menu a list from options on the onscreen, the displayed is, when she the Menütaste press. From the menu able you comands to the control of program's choose. Menüleiste The list the Menütitel, the in upper edge of screen appear, when the Menütaste pressed be expected to is. Menu items a option, the in a menu appear. "New drawer" is e.g. The first menu item in the Workbench- menu "window". Menütaste The raked Maustaste. Tees (eng. An random anzugebender parameter, the you in the Tool Types) Informations window of Icon to the control of program enter able. Is e.g. The attribute SECONDS (seconds) in the Informations window the clock entered, shows the clock also seconds on, when she open is. Microprocessor see central processing unit. Modem an device, the the serial data transfer over telephone lines enables. Monitor an video-reproducer, on the the visible giving out of computer displayed is. It gives different kinds from monitors. For the Standardausgabe of Amiga is an analogous "RGB- colored monitor" uses, the as well as text as also graphic show can. Multiscan an appointed Monitortyp, the different Ablenkfrequenzen bolstered (Bildschirmmodi). Multitasking The ability of Amiga-operating system, more program's (or task) quasi simultaneous to carry out. You able you e.g. Simultaneous an budged graphic show, an akutische file play back, with a other computer comunicate and an diskette reformat. 15.12. N, O Namensmuster a AmigaDOS-Fahigkeit, the it the user enables, file- and Verzeichnisnamen under use from wildcard character to enter. Wildcard character enable the details from Suchmustern, with those on more files reference taken become can, whose names an jointly Textmuster hold. It must so not all file names individual specified become. New commence the resetting of Amiga through simultaneous Drükken (eng. reboot) the key Ctrl as soon as the lefthand and right Amiga- key. That has rough the same result how the an- and power down the battery. The memory is rewound. This procedure is also as warm start designates. No- an font (e.g. Topaz) in the every sign the proportionaler resemble space take up. The great "W" takes e.g. Not font more place an as the small "I". Is also as Monospace-font designates. Only legibly (eng. When he the Disk in the status "only legibly" (Read Only) read only) is, can you content only displayed, but not changed become. Undoing (eng. The picked object to the use provide. Open) an Icon is through Doppelklicken on the Icon or through sampling of Icon and anschließendes sampling of menu item "undoing" from the Menu "Icon" open. With the undoing of Disk- or drawers-Icon appear an window, in the the content the Disk or. The drawer displayed is. With the undoing of project- or progam- Icon is an progam restarted. Offset an Versatz to left or on the right or general an distance (relative to a other point). Overscan see guard zone. 15.13. P, Q paperbasket (eng. An directory to the reception from files, the (later) trashcan) excluded become shall. Parallel (also an interfaces-connection, the by the "Centronics") data transfer each an complete byte (8 Bit) transferred. In opposition there to become by the seriellen interface Einzelbits transfer. The Amiga disposes over a parallel connection, the in the rule as printer connection serves. Parity an process to the discovery from debugged by the seriellen communicating. With it is a waiting data bytes an additional Bit added. Partition under it understands one a storage area on one hard drive, the to the storage from data uses is and from system how an own drive discusses is. Dough Engl. For Einfügen. Path see path. Periphery an external, on the Amiga connected Hardwaregerät. Path (eng. path) The character string from data medium- and Schbladennamen, the the Speicherposition one file defined. Icon (eng. A small graphic, the an Disk, an drawer, an icon) project or an progam represent. Pictograms able with the mouse deferred and picked become, so that you with the through the Icon dargestellen element work able. Brush (eng. A IFF-Grafikdatei, normally an cutout from brush) one vollformatigen mapping. Pitch character density by printout (cpi - sign per custom). Pixel see pixel. Pointer english for hand. Sea Mauspfeil. Port english for elektrischen interfaces-connection. As "Message-Port" an software-interface to the communicating between two simultaneous current program (ARexx). PostScript-printer an high-resolution printer, the text and Grafikdaten in the PostScript-Seitenbeschreibungsprache process can. Printer driver see Drucktertreiber. Progam a row from assignments and ordering, the the Amiga report, how appointed workings to carry out are. To the program belong to u's.a. Uses and the systems software. Project a file, in the the from a progam erstellten or benutzten files saved become. Files, the with a text editor or Grafikprogramm created become, are e.g. Projects. With dispatch see Eingabeaufforderung. Processor see central processing unit. Pseudo-Icon an Icon, the for an object displayed is, to (eng. default the no .info=Datei lies, when the menu items icon) "content show all files" picked became. Buffer (eng. An more temporary storage area in the RAM. buffer) point unit of measure for the vertical size of type. Usually is this 1/72 custom. With the Amiga complies this a pixel in onscreen. Pure (eng. Pure) Beschreibt a comand or an progam, the/the resident made become can. When an file "pure" is, is the Schutzbit p steady. Spring (eng. An device, an drawer (i.e. An directory) or source) an file, the/the data affords. With the copying one diskette designates one e.g. The diskette, the copied is, as Quelldiskette. 15.14. R radio button see Druckknopfsymbol. RAM (Random Access the part of internal storeroom of Amiga, the for the Memory), data storage uses become can and on the the main memory processor-chip direct intervention has. Uses become from Disk in the RAM charged and acknowledgement additional RAM to the processing and storage from Date, so the computer active is. Data in the RAM go lost, when the Amiga new restarted (Reboot) or cut out is. RAM-Disk an area of RAM, the the functions of disk drive accomplish can, where the RAM-Disk essential faster is as an physically drive, then she no mechanical elements contains. Guard zone (eng. The normally not used Rahmenbereich around a overscan) onscreen from Standardgröße. With help of Overscan- editor able you yours onscreen broaden, around also these area to of use. Read see reading. Reboot see new commence. Release an more precise details from software-version numbers in the English. Resident as resident designates one a comand or an progam, the/the with the comand RESIDENT staendig in the memory charged became, around its execution to accelerate. Resident commands become special arranged, with it she by repeated execution not renewed charged become must. Only pure files able resident saved become. Cr code see Bedingungskennzeichen. RGB (red-green- a kind from Videosignal; the three primary Farbsignale blue) become by it separate sent. The standard Amiga-giving out uses a analogen RGB-monitor. Rollbalken (eng. The shaded area, in the the Rollbalken pulled scroll bare) become can. You able in the Rolleiste klikken, around the Rollbalken to move. Rolleiste the hervorgehobe area within the Rolleiste, the to the advertisement till now not sichbarer part of window on an other position pulled become can. The bigness of Rollbalkens is variable and leaves thereupon close, how much from entirety window presently uncover is. Roles (eng. The move of contents through the reading area of scroll) window or one list. Rolliste The options, the in a Rollsymbol appear. When the list to great is, around complete in the Rollsymbol displayed become to able, able you the list with help of Rollbalkens or the Rollpfeile cover. Rollpfeile symbols, the in a window appear able and it the user enable, the reading area continuous to postpone. Rollsymbol an window, the it the user enables, an Optionsliste durchzugehen or he through the reading area of window to move. An Rollsymbol consists from Rolliste, Rolleiste, Rollbalken, and Rollpfeilen. ROM (Read Only Permanenter memory, the with Systemanweisungen Memory = only-harvest- preprogrammed is and not changed become can. Memory Benutzerbefehle or Programmoperationen have no influence on the content of ROM. Root see Haputverzeichnis. Root-block (dt. The area one Disk, the the names the Disk, the about Hauptblock) main register and informations to the Disk- organization contains. Is the Root-block excluded, able no data more from the Disk called up become - she is practical empty. 15.15. S shade generation gleichmäßiger colour- or Graustufen- (eng. dithering) shades through rotatory Bildpunktfarben or -compose. The Preferences-Editoren PrinterGfx and PrinterPS bid more Einstellmöglichkeiten for the automated shade from printed graphics. Creation of Erscheinungsbilds one Farge through an from other colors compounder pattern, e.g. The representation the colour violet through alternately red and blue pixel. Schieberegler- an symbol, from the through draw of Schiebereglers symbol through the symbol an worth picked become can. With the move of Schiebereglers become different values displayed. Schiebereglerwert a number, the take a Schiebereglersymbol to see is and the to the time ausgewählten worth announce. Clasps (eng. The remove of window from the advertisement, around an close) progam or the intervention on an Datendatei to discontinue. Codeword an word, the from a AmigaDOS-comand or in a (eng. keyword) attribute-entry as identification of argument or breakdown a option recognized is. Authoring-/legibly when he an Disk in the status "authoring-/legibly" (Read/ (eng. read/write) Write) is, can you content as well as culled as also veränder become. Writing (eng. The write-out from data in the memory or on a write) Speichermedium (e.g. One diskette). Writing with these attitude able data on an activate (eng. Speichergerät written become. A diskette is on write-enable) "write-enable" or. Read/Write adjusted, when the opening in the corner the diskette through the lower-case Kunststoffschieber closed is. Write-protected the entitled of Speichergeräts, by the the writing (eng. write- from data on these Datentäger not possible is. protect) diskettes possession a lower-case Kunststoffschieber, the so deferred become can (the opening in the corner the diskette must uncover is), that the overall diskette write-protected is, i.e. She is only legibly. Drawer (eng. An partition of Disk-storage area. A drawer) drawer complies a AmigaDOS-directory. Schutzbits an row from badges, the with every one file conserved become. Schutzbits denote the Dateityp and ctrl the for this file admissive operations (read, write, clean etc.). Level (eng. An worth of Grafikdrucker-Preferencess (PrinterGfx), threshold) the he on the Farbintensität correlates. He certain, which colors at black-white-stress as black and which as white printed become. Screen see onscreen. Scrollen see roles Seitenverhältnis the relationship from height to breadth by picture. (Eng. aspect) serial an interfaces-connection, the data einzelbitweise interface uberträgt. Opposition to the parallel interface, the (eng. serial detailed bytes (eight Bit) simultaneous port, also RS-232) transferred. The Amiga disposes over a seriellen Port, on the often an modem, an MIDI-Schnitstelle or an printer connected is. Set (eng. set) the changeover of bits or sign in the activate status ("an"). Opposition to "discharge". Shell (braised.a. CLI) The Befehlszeilenschnittstelle, over the entered comands on the Amiga sent become. The Shell is an Konsolen window, the numerous special functions bolstered, e.g. Befehlszeilenwiederholung, surrogate name as soon as photostatic- and Einfügeoperationen. Securing Anlegen one archival backup copy. Archival backup copy a copy one file (or one entire hard drive) (eng. backup on diskette, Bandkassette or plate, the in the fall copy) of data loss to the Wiederherstellen the data used become can. Scaling the to scale re design the bigness one anzuzeigenden or to drukkenden mapping or font. In the rule is an onscreen to the printing belittles. A aggrandizement is however self-evident also possible. Script (also a text file, the an row automatic more practicable Befehlsdatei, AmigaDOS-comands contains, which together to the eng. Also batch) execution one komplexen or he repetitively duty serve. An example for an script is the file "Startup-sequence", the at activating of Amiga carried out is. Source see spring. Memory (eng. The internal storage area of Amiga, in the data and memory) program's saved become. The Amiga disposes over chip-RAM (Grafikspeicher), fasts-RAM (normally memory) as soon as ROM-memory (Read Only Memory). The bigness of RAM-storeroom (Random Access Memory) is an decisivier factor for bigness and number the on the Amiga simultaneous ausführbaren program's. External memory (how Disks) is also as bulk memory designates. Trace (eng. Tracked) Teilt an Disk in concentric circle on. See also cyl. Standard (eng. An worth or an action, the/the the system default) automatic accepts, so far the user nothing other specifies. Standard program an in the Informations window of project-Icon (eng. Default specified progam. With undoing of project- Tool) Icon is the standard program automatic charged and to the Bearbeiten of project restarted. Pop stack an more specific area of RAM, the as more temporary (eng. stack) memory for an progam reserved is. Activating see boot. Startfähig see Bootable. Startup-Sequence a AmigaDOS-script-file, the at activating of Amiga automatic carried out is and for the config the hardware and the Verzeichnissysteme worrys. Steuertasten- a key combination, the an Sonderfunktion kombination carry out. With it is the Ctrl-key pressed be expected to and simultaneous an other key on the keyboard pressed. Many a one functions from Steuertastenkombinationen become immediate to the squeeze the key combination carried out, e.g. The breaking-off the execution of AmigaDOS-imperative at squeeze from Ctrl-C. Others combinations turn out merely an reverse dargestelltes sign and have no other immediate effect. Stop bits additional bits, the by the seriellen communicating appended become, around the end of sign to mark. Streamer (also an Massenspeichergerät high capacity, the Tape-Streamer, magnetic Bandkassetten uses. The Bandlaufwerk) Normalanwendungen are backup copies great hard drives. String see character string. Suchpfad (eng. The list the directories, the AmigaDOS by the quest search path) to a comand peruses. Directories able over the comand PATH from the list excluded or in she absorbed become. Symbol (eng. A programmed graphic, the in a window, a gadget) Dialog window or a onscreen appear and over the with the mouse an appointed function caused become can. Every symbol heard to a individual type and has an appointed function. With the dreidimensionalen representation in onscreen appear the most symbols some from the advertisement herauszuragen and at sampling how an tast in the onscreen to "sank". SYS: the name, the the data medium allied is, on the the Amiga its Systemdateien and -verzeichnisse seeks. Normally also the data medium, from the from the system restarted is. 15.16. T keyboard assignment a file, the the layout from sign on the (eng. keymap) keyboard and the signification every one separate key defined. Each language owns her own keyboard assignment. Tastaturkuzbefehl a method, an Mausaktion over the keyboard to carry out (through squeeze one key or key combination). Tastenbefehl a key or key combination, with the by (eng. hot key) Commodity-Exchange-program an concealed window open become can. An rechtecktiges small box, in the you Textinformationen enter able, e.g. A file names or a comand. Texteingabefelder appear by invocation the menu items "rename" and "comand accomplish" and become also from many program uses. Titelleiste the upper edge of screen or window, the normally the Manen of screen or window announce. Tool see utility. Tool Types see attribute. Tracing (dt. A appointed mode of interpreter how e.g. Backtrace) ARexx, in the interim results of actual object run einsehbar are and to every date in the object run encroached become can. With it leave he Programm window exact encircle. Trashcan see paperbasket. Separator an sign, the the beginning and the end one (eng. Delimiter) character string marked. 15.17. U, V Übergeordnet the window, from the from an other window open (window, eng. Became. The directory, the the actual directory parent) or. The actual drawer contains. Overwriting the writing from data in the memory, in an file or on an Disk, where the till now there stored content through the new data compensates is. Deflect (eng. The Umdefinieren the Standardvorgaben for spring or redirect) goal the an- or giving out of imperative with help the special character < and >. Changeover (eng. Cover he on an option, by the between two toggle) be there- and hergeschaltet become can (e.g. Between "an" and "From"). Reverse (eng. A key how Shift (the actual shift key), qualifier) Ctrl or alto, the an other interpretation the simultaneous or thereafter erfolgenden keyboard-/ Mauseingabe through the Amiga brings about. Is normally with Commodity-Exchange-program uses. Unit see oneness. Submenu an Sekundärmenü, the appear, when appointed menu items picked become. When an menu item he to a submenu verzeigt, see you really from these menu item the sign >>. Subdirectories an directory, the within of other (eng. List stands (complies one drawer subdirectory) within one drawer). User-startup an from user created file, the the specific (file) comands for settings contains, the at system start processed is. Utility english for "utility", most an auxiliary routine. Directory (eng. A subdivision within of Ablagesystems of directory) computer to the organizes Abspeicherung from files and other list (subdirectories). On the Workbench become directories as pictograms in form from drawers personated. Vom by von from see data medium. Vorauseingabe a furniture the Shell, the it enables, comands (eng. Letter ahead) to enter, during still the giving out of ahead eingegebenen imperative displayed is. Fore-/ an symbol, the in the upper right corner of Hintergrundsymbol window or screen appear can. Me help this symbol can an window or onscreen in the foreground the advertisement fetched or in the background posed become. Preferences a Workbench-drawer with Editoren, the Sum to the (eng. Konfiguraturieren and adapt your Amiga-surroundings Preferences) substitute able, e.g. Re design the Bildschirmfarben or set the settings for the communicating over the serial interface. 15.18. W, Z Wartezeiger image one stopwatch, the instead of normal Mauspfeils displayed is, when the Workbench collaborates and therefore no wider input data accepting can. Wildcard see wildcard character. Window see window. Workbench The on pictograms resting upon, graphical user interface (GUI) of Amiga. Write see writing. Character density The number sign, measured in cpi, the within of custom (horizontal) listed become. Character string an zusammenhängendes bit text, the as oneness (eng. string) discusses is. Font (eng. Also: font. An particular redesigned of setting font) from letters, special character and digits, the for the Textanzeige used become, e.g. Topaz and Helvetica. Fonts or fonts are in the rule in different bulks available, the in points specified become (10-point, 12-point etc.). Show the Mauspfeil so place, that is goal the object affected, on the show become shall. Hand (eng. More general genus for Mauspfeil and Wartezeiger. pointer) in program also an appointed Variablentyp, the for his part the address of other Speicherobjekts contains, so on this shows. Line skip- an Darstellungsmodus, the by many Amiga- darstellung Bildschirmmodi the vertical screen resolution doubled. Time marker (eng. Single sculler file assigned date and time. time stamp) Normalerweise date and time the building or the last change the file (or of list). Central processing unit the "brain" of computer. The microprocessor-chips (Central is an IC (more integrated circuit), the in first Processing Unit = line for the execution from assignments in a CPU) progam accountable is. As central processing unit designates one also often the entire calculator with casing, in the opposition to of him periphery. Draw (eng. Relocating of Icon, window, symbol or drag) screen over the advertisement through Zeigen on the object, Gedrückthalten the Auswahltaste and move the mouse. Goal (eng. The device, the directory or the file, the/the destination) data feels. Goal (eng. The pixel in a Mauspfeil (normally the hot spot) vertex by a arrow or the point of intersection by a crossing), the an object on the onscreen meet must, with it this augewählt is. Zoom-symbol (eng. An symbol, the in the upper right corner of zoom gadget) window appear can. Over this symbol can between windowgrößen bandied become. Allocate with the comand ASSIGN an union between a logic Gerätenamen and a Verzeichnisnamen establish, with it program's, the the directory use, each only a only one Gerätenamen use must. Example: the Gerätename T: is in the rule the directory RAM:T allocated. Buffer an area in the memory, the to the temporären save (eng. clipboard) from text and graphics serves, with it this between program transfer become able. Cyl (eng. A logic subdivision einter Magnetspeicherplatte cylinder) or. -diskette. Amiga-3.5-custom-diskettes become by the formatting in 80 cyl subdivided. An cyl is the summary übereinanderliegender intertrack on several Plattenoberflächen.

Mutterverzeichnis + data medium + Aktualisieren + discharge + Umbenennen +<#> Markieren + OK + breaking off +<1> files to names assorted list +<2> files to date assorted gold list +<3> files to bigness assorted gold list +<+> files in ascending order list +<-> files in get off order gold list +<4> drawers on the beginning stand +<5> drawers and files merge +<6> drawers at the end stand 13.4. Texteingabefelder (e.g. Shell, coding line, line of text in ASL Dateiauswahl, ReAction- text fields etc.) + Springe with the cursor to the beginning the row + Rücktaste or extinguish the highlighting text + breeze all sign on the right from cursor + cr or Enter + breeze previous word + breeze all sign left from cursor + Schneidet the character string from and copied she in the clipboard + cr or Enter go to the voherigen sign + + go to the next sign + + Löscht the sign under the cursor or the highlighting character string + extinguish all sign on the right from cursor Löscht the sign left from cursor or the highlighting character string + breeze all sign left from cursor or Bricht the input off or chang to next Textfeld + chang to the previous Textfeld used the cursor as bookmarks + put the bookmarks + Wiederherstellen + Tauscht the content of Wiederherstellpuffers with the of actual content of field + Schneidet the character string from and copied she in the clipboard + Wechselt at word under the cursor between grand- and use of small letters + Wechselt at sign under the cursor between grand- and use of small letters + Kopiert the highlighting text in the clipboard + Schneidet the highlighting character string from and copied she in the clipboard + Fügt the character string from the clipboard in the cursor position an + replacing the actual text with the in the clipboard +<+> raised the issue under the cursor +<-> Vermindert the issue under the cursor + whole text mark + Wiederherstellen the last change (eng. undo) + Wiederhergestellte again zurückgängig make (eng. redo) +<#> Konvertiert hexadecimal under the cursor to decimals +<$> Konvertert decimal under the cursor to Hexadezimalzahlen + Komlettiert the file names under the cursor 13.4.0.1. Text.Datatype (e.g. By announcement from write in Multiview) or seeking side to in the front side to back --- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------ when one with the mouse an character string dial and the Mausknopf loose leaves, is the character string automatic in the clipboard copied. 13.5. Commodities 13.5.0.1. Exchange ++ Exchange is restarted + Verbergen + Ikonifizieren + termination 13.5.0.2. FKey ++ FKey is restarted + save + Verbergen + Ikonifizieren + termination 13.5.0.3. Blanker ++ Blanker is restarted + save + Verbergen + Ikonifizieren + termination 13.5.0.4. CrossDOS ++ CrossDOS is restarted + save + Verbergen + Ikonifizieren + termination 13.5.0.5. RAWBInfo +<,> next Info window +<.> Vorheriges Info window + default-Icon load + as default-Icon computer store +<ö> Icon clean + general information information to RAWBInfo + Informationsdialog leave +<1> Icontyp on data medium alter +<2> Icontyp on drawer alter +<3> Icontyp on progam alter +<4> Icontyp on project alter +<5> Icontyp on garbage can alter + default Icon use + Icon in the clipboard copy + Icon from the clipboard integrate + Wiederherstellen of Icon + Umfärben of Icon from 1.3 on 2.0 colors + featuring clipboard + Icon load + Icon computer store + Rahmenlos + no one Newicons-informations computer store +